2B. Bid Document Volume II (Part B)

Section VI.
Employers Requirements 1
BIDDING DOCUMENT FOR
DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING &

COMMISSIONING OF ACCEPTANCE TEST
LABORATORY
BID PACKAGE NO.: UREDS-G-10
UNDER IDA CREDIT NO. 5381-BD

Rural Electricity Transmission & Distribution Project
VOLUME: II OF III
(PART II-B)
(EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS)
ISO 9001, ISO 14001 &

OHSAS 18001 Certified
BANGLADESH RURAL ELECTRIFICATION BOARD

(BREB)
HEAD OFFICE, ACADEMIC BUILDING, 6TH FLOOR
NIKUNJA-2, KHILKHET, DHAKA-1229
BANGLADESH
SEPTEMBER 2018
Section VI. Employers Requirements 2
Bidding Document for
DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING &

COMMISSIONING OF ACCEPTANCE TEST
LABORATORY
ICB No.: UREDS-G-10
VOLUME: II OF III
(PART II-B)
ISSUED ON: ________________
EMPLOYER: BANGLADESH RURAL ELECTRIFICATION

BOARD (BREB)
PROJECT: UREDS; DCSD (UP-GRADATION OF RURAL

ELECTRICITY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM;
DHAKA, CHITTAGONG & SYLHET
DIVISION) PROJECT UNDER RURAL
ELECTRICITY TRANSMISSION AND
DISTRIBUTION (T&D) PROJECT OF IDA.
COUNTRY: BANGLADESH
SEPTEMBER 2018
3
VOLUME: II OF III
(PART II-B)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION VI: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS .............................................................3
3.0 Building Equipment and Different Systems Technical Speciffactions....................4
4.0 Civil: General Technical Requirements for Building Works ..............................117
5.0 Civil: Building and Ancillary Facilities..................................................................138
6.0 Civil: Building Sanitary and Water Supply Works & Ancillary Facilities ........188
7.0 Civil: Internal & External Electrification, CCTV, PABX & PAS ......................201
8.0 Miscelleaneous: Desktop Computer, Printer, Photocopy Machine.....................219
9.0 Miscelleaneous: Air Conditioning ..........................................................................223
10.0 Miscelleaneous: Laboratory Furniture ................................................................225
11.0 Fire Detection & Firefighting Protection .............................................................227
12.0 Forms & Procedures ..............................................................................................230
13.0 Floor Plans ..............................................................................................................248
14.0 Contacts ..................................................................................................................253

4
SECTION VI
B. CIVIL
3.0 Building Equipment and Different Systems Technical

Specifications
Table of Contents
Description Specification # Page No.
Overhead Bridge Crane 100 ton Specification # 34 5
Lifts/Elevators (passenger and cargo) Specification# 35 31
Close Circuit TV (CCTV) System for Specification# 36 51

monitoring
Public Address (PA) System Specification# 37 61
PABX System Specification# 38 71
Fire-Fighting System Specification# 39 79
Generator Set Specification# 40 103

5
Specification# 34
BANGLADESH RURAL ELECTRIFICATION BOARD (BREB)
Technical Specification
Overhead Bridge Crane - 100 Ton
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers minimum technical requirements for the design, supply, assembly,
installation, testing and commissioning of an Overhead Bridge Crane (on turn key basis) for
loading and unloading power transformers at Bangladesh Rural Electrification Board (BREB)
material Acceptance Testing Laboratory at Palli Biddyut Area, Savar Dhaka, Bangladesh.
1.2 The 100 ton bridge crane shall consist of parallel runways with a travelling bridge spanning the
gap. A hoist will be the lifting component of the crane, travels along and across the bridge. The
bridge shall be rigidly supported on steel columns to be fixed at ground level. Study and design
of crane shall be the responsibility of the vendor to be approved by BREB.
1.3 Any departure from the provisions of this specification shall be disclosed at the time of bidding
under the title “deviation from specifications”.
1.4 This specification is property of BREB and subject to change or modification without any
notice.
2. Reference Standards
2.1 The Overhead Bridge Crane shall be supplied according to this specification. The Crane
shall be designed, tested, assembled and conform to the latest editions of relevant
applicable international standards in practice to their design, construction, production and
testing including but not limited to those listed below, and their normative references:
 ASME B30.2: Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single or Multiple
Girder, Top Running Trolley Hoist)
 ASME B30.17: Cranes and Monorails (with underhung Trolley or Bridge)
 ASME B30.11: Monorails and Underhung Cranes
 BS 466: Specification for Power driven overhead travelling cranes, semi-goliath and
goliath cranes for general use
 ISO 4301-5: Cranes; classification; part 5: overhead travelling and portal bridge cranes
 ISO 8686-5: Cranes; design principles for loads and load combinations; part 5: overhead
travelling and portal bridge crane
 ASD & LRFD: Manual of Steel Construction
 AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction
 AISE: Technical Report No. 6
 ANSI a 14.3-1992: Safety Requirements for fixed ladders
 ASME B30.9: Slings
 ASME b30.10: Hooks
 ASME B30.20: Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices
 Applicable Bangladesh standards for safety, operation and protection
6
2.2 Conformance to national standards only, such as Chinese, Indian, or Russian is not
acceptable.
3. Experience and Quality Control

3.1 The Crane components, assemblies and accessories shall be manufactured at a plant that has
fabricated units of similar design and characteristics for a period not less than ten years and that
holds ISO: 9001-2015 Certification for the quality management.
4. Service Conditions
4.1 The Crane components, assemblies and accessories shall be suitable for performing tests in a
testing laboratory under the local service conditions in Bangladesh, which are as follows
a) Altitude above mean sea level (MSL): less than 1,000 meters
b) Maximum summer peak ambient temperature: +45°C
c) Minimum outdoor winter temperature: 3°C
d) Average daily temperature: +35°C
e) Maximum yearly average temperature: +30°C
f) Relative Humidity: 50% - 100%
g) Yearly average Humidity: 80%
h) Pollution level: Moderate
i) Storage temperature: -10°C - +70°C
j) Operating temperature: -10°C - +45°C
5. Clearances
5.1 Safe and working clearances shall be maintained between the crane, the building, other objects,
infrastructure or electric wires during normal operating conditions.
5.2 In the design, all factors that influence, such as wheel float, truss sag, bridge skewing or trolley
positions and configuration shall be considered.
5.3 Schedule of working clearances shall be provided with the design for review and approval.
6. Technical Specifications
6.1 The overhead bridge crane shall be used for the purpose of handling power transformers up to
load of 100 ton at a transformer testing bay.
6.2 The crane shall be used for continuous duty with cross travel, long travel and hoist movement,
which may occur simultaneously.
6.3 This specification is adopting definitions from ASME B30-2. Therefore, for cross references
applicable Standards as given clause 2 shall be consulted, referred and applied.
6.4 The master controller shall be wired and used by the operator. No cabin would be required.
6.5 The crane shall be designed, assembled and tested before dispatch. At site crane shall be
installed, tested and commissioned. The technical and other parameters shall be as follows:
7
Technical Specifications
Capacity 100 ton lifting capacity
Hoist limit 100 ton (keep factor of safety in view)

Span Wheel center to wheel center
Long Travel 30 meters (refer to floor plan)
Cross Travel 15 meters (refer to floor plan) with 10m centered on the lab
railroad and 5m laydown area to the left (facing the doors from
inside) of the railroad.
Height of lifting 10/11 meters from ground level with dual/variable speed (effective
hook height shall be 10m)
Operating and Working Vendor to specify for the offered crane for:
Speed maximum (m/s) a) Hoist
b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
Duty Cycle (related to Vendor to specify for the offered crane for:
Drive Motor & a) Hoist
Mechanisms) b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
Motor Ratings Vendor to specify for the offered system for:

Electric Drive Motor a) Hoist
Ratings & Frame size b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
Gear Box Vendor to specify for the offered system for:
Gear Box Size for:
a) Hoist
b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
Acceleration mm/s Vendor to specify for the offered crane for:
a) Hoist
b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
Hoist Rope Size and Vendor to confirm as below and specify for the offered Crane
number of falls of rope System
Control Wired Master Control (No cabin operation)
Type of Control Wired Master Control
Input Voltage 240/415 ± 5% Volts, 50 Hz, 3 Phase - AC
Control Voltage 110 V AC or as proposed by the vendor
Duty Class Class -3, Indoor Service
Design Standards ASME/IEC /ANSI/IEEE/BS
Runway Rail Size for Cross Vendor to specify for the offered crane (kN/m)
Travel
Runway Rail Size for Long Vendor to specify for the offered crane (kN/m)
Travel
8
Wheel Size for Cross Vendor to specify for the offered crane (dia. mm)
Travel
Wheel Size for Long Travel Vendor to specify for the offered crane (dia. mm)
Brake Drum Size for Hoist Vendor to specify for the offered crane (dia. mm)
Brake Drum Size for Cross Vendor to specify for the offered crane (dia. mm)
Travel
Brake Drum Size for Long Vendor to specify for the offered crane (dia. mm)
Travel
Brake Drum Size for Vendor to specify for the offered crane (dia. mm)
Parking Brake
Crane Type Double Girder, Top running

*Rail size shall be designed by the supplier and vendor to provide
calculations for review
Bridge Travel Motorized, geared, dual speed, had chain drop
*supplier to design based on site requirements and vendor to
provide calculations for review
Bridge Beam and Columns Required
*sizes shall be as per design requirements and vendor to provide
Trolley Type Motorized, geared with dual/variable speed
Control System Conventional master control for all motions
Crane operations Through wire master control
Operator Cabin None
Structural Fabrication Crane Structural Constructional Details
Bridge Leg Box type construction
Raw material Only steel plates, tested and certified quality
Welded Joints To be followed for Bridge/leg Fabrication
Number of Joints To be followed for Bridge/leg Fabrication
Number of Joints For span up to 25 meters - two joints, for span 25 meters to 50
meters - three joints
Welding Electrodes Electrode only should be used:
 For all Horizontal Welding: E 7018
 For all Vertical Welding: E 7048.
9
Welded Joint Testing All Butt-Welded Joints (both compression / tension and flanges /
web joints) shall be subjected to 100% X-Ray Testing and X-Ray.
Films to be produced toBREB for evaluation and shall form part of
technical submission.
Splice Joint No splice joint is allowed in girder fabrication.
Leg connection Leg to bridge connection shall be designed for double shear.
Platform on Girders The Platforms provided on both the Girders shall be fixed through
bolted joints using fit bolt only.
Wheel Assembly The Wheel Assembly coming for Cross Travel (CT) & Long
Travel (LT) shall be of live axle system with L-Type Bearings.
Heat Treatment The Trolleys (where applicable) shall be Stress Relieved by

thermal heat-treatment process after welding and non-destructive
testing (NDT) examinations. All welding shall be tested by NDT
means [MPI, LPI & RT] after Stress Relieving operation.
Machining Operation All mechanical mating surfaces and wheel seating areas are to be
machined to the required finish and protected.
Surface Cleaning Both the Girders and the Trolleys are to be shot blasted or
chemically treated for surface cleaning, after completion of all
operations but prior to painting.
Painting The crane parts are to be painted as follows:
One coat of Primer with 25 microns of DFT (Dry Film Thickness)
and 48 hours of compulsory curing after painting. Two coats of
Enamel Paint (Yellow) each with a DFT of 25 microns and
intermittent curing of minimum 16 hours.
Gears Gears in all the stages shall be helical in design and to be of
machined & ground and hardened.
Gear Box Casing Shall be of fabricated type and stress relived by thermal heat-
treatment process, prior to machining
Type of Coupling Only geared coupling to be used:
a) between Electric Motor and Gear Box
b) between Gear Box and Rope Drum
c) between Gear Box and Trolley Wheels
Rope Drum Shall be of fabricated type and stress relieved. The circumferential
weld joints shall be tested by 100 % X-Ray for quality assurance.
Wheels The wheels shall be of Drop-Forged and wheel tread hardened to
300/350 BHN (Brinell Hardness Number).
Wheels shall be fitted with L-Type Bearings
Mechanical Joints Fit Bolts as per IS 3640-1982 for all joints coming in main
members and platform with reamed holes
Pulley Dimension Rope Pulley diameter shall be 23 times that of Rope diameter
Hook
Hook latch shall be provided for both hooks
Wind Clamp
Wind clamp shall be provided in all four corners
10
Roof Covering Single Roof cover shall be provided for trolley and long travel
mechanisms
Electrical Elements
Operational Controls The offered Crane shall be provided with the following controls:
a) Cabin Control [Master Control]
b) Radio Remote Control [Push Button Type]
Control Voltage 110V/220 V AC
Type of Brakes a) Hoist: DC Brake

b) Cross Travel: Thruster Brake
c) Long Travel: Thruster Brake
d) Parking Brake: DC Brake
Protection: All Panels, Limit-Switches and Motors shall have IP 54 protection.
(Outdoor Service)
Electric Motors All Electric Motors shall be as per IIEC/ANSI/IEEE and also
suitable for 500 starts per hour and 40 % CDF.
Electric Contactors All Panels shall have only SIEMENS (make) Contactors and shall
be suitable for AC3 Duty Class.
Contactors Rating The rating of all Contactors shall be at least 50% higher than the
respective electric motor full load current, at the specified duty
cycle.
Resistance Stainless steel punched grid resistance continuous rating
Long Travel Motion A dual Drive Mechanism shall be provided for Long Travel
Motion.
Illumination Four numbers of 500 Watts Halogen Lamps shall be provided
under the Bridge, All Electric Panels shall be provided with
suitable long-lifeillumination for visibility and trouble shooting
Controller Steps: A 5-Step Controller has to be provided for
a. Main Hoist
b. Long Travel
c. Cross Travel
Load Cell for Main Hoist Load weighing system with load cell to be fixed/provided at the
equalizer pulley
The display shall be of 100 mm size-Jumbo
Crab Wiring The CRAB shall be fully wired with junction box
Hoist Limit Each hoist shall be provided with both rotary and counter weight
limits
Operator Cabin Electric Light, Fan, Exhaust-Fan, Warning Bell and Emergency
Stop Push Button shall be provided in the operator cabin
Sources Only US or Western European Sources materials are acceptable
Hoist Hooks Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Wire Rope Vendor to specify for the offered crane

Electric Motors GEC/siemens
11
DC Brake Unit Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Radio Control Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Thrust Brake Unit Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Limit Switch (Gravity Siemens

Type)
Contactors (make) Siemens
Overload Relay for Siemens

protection (make)
HRC Fuses (make) Siemens
Rotary Limit Switch (make) Siemens
Switch Fuse Unit (make) Siemens
MCCB (make) Siemens, Schneider Electric
MCB (make) Siemens, Schneider Electric
Pneumatic Time Delay Vendor to specify for the offered crane

(make)
Push Button (make) Siemens
Connectors (make) Siemens

Couplings Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Bearings Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Power & Control Cables IEC /ANSI/IEEE/BS Certified
Load Cell Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Resistance Box Vendor to specify for the offered crane

12
7. Runways and Supporting Structures

7.1 The crane shall be supported on its own steel structure independent of the building structure,
with foundations independent of the building floor and foundations. Crane vendor shall design
fabricate and supply the supporting steel structure in accordance with standards and
specifications, with safety factor of at least 50%, or such other greater factor required by
standards, above maximum loading in any component or structural element resulting from
lifting of 100 ton and moving it at standard speed in the least favorable location or
circumstance.
7.2 Construction of Runways and rails shall be in accordance with the ASME B 30.2 and shall
conform to AISC Manual of Steal Construction. The crane runways and supporting structures
shall be designed to withstand the loads, forces and impacts imposed by the crane during
operations.
7.3 The Runway columns shall be securely anchored to the foundations. Foundation design
calculations shall be provided for review and evaluation by BREB.
7.4 The structure shall be free from the detrimental vibrations under normal operating conditions.
7.5 Rails shall be level, straight, joined, and spaced to the crane span within the specified tolerance
limits in CMAA specification No. 70. Where curves are required, special design shall be
necessary.
7.6 Runway stops shall be provided to the limits of travel of the bridge.
7.7 Stops shall be designed to withstand the forces applied to the bumpers.
8. Welded Construction
8.1 All welding procedures and welding operator's qualifications to be used on load-sustaining
members shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWSD11, except as modified by
ANSI/AWSD14.1.
9. Girders
9.1 All crane shall conform to the design parameters as specified, and applicable, in CMAA
specification No. 70 or SIE Technical Report No.6.
10. Bridge-Bumpers
10.1 A power operated bridge shall be provided with the bumpers or other automatic means
providing equivalent effect.
10.2 Bridge bumper shall have minimum characteristics as specified in ASME B30-2, as follows:
a) Energy-absorbing (or energy-dissipating) capacity to stop the bridge when traveling with
power off in either direction at a speed of at least 40% of rated load speed.
13
b) The capability of stopping the bridge (but not the load block or lifted load unless they are
guided vertically) at a rate of deceleration not to exceed an average of 3 ft/sec2 (0.9 m/s 2)
when traveling with power off in either direction at 20% of rated load speed and be
designed and installed with a means of retaining the bumper in case of broken or loosened
mounting connections.
c) Multiple power-operated bridges operating on the same runway shall have contact bumpers
that meet the requirements of ASME B30-2.
10.3 Consideration should be given to providing bumpers with greater capacity for energy
absorption (or energy dissipation) than that specified in ASME B30-2and providing bridge end
stops with corresponding increased strength, when anyone of the following conditions are
present:
a) The crane has a maximum bridge speed of 320 ft/min (100 m/min) or greater.
b) The crane is a remote-operated crane.
c) The crane is a pulpit-operated crane.
d) The location of the runway end stops is obscured or uncertain.
e) As an example, the bumper force applied at 100% of rated load speed is 625% greater than
the bumper force applied at 40% of rated load speed.
11. Trolley-Bumpers
11.1 A power-operated trolley shall be provided with bumpers or other automatic means providing
equivalent effect.
11.2 Trolley bumpers shall have the following minimum characteristics:
a) energy-absorbing (or energy-dissipating) capacity to stop the trolley when traveling with
power off in either direction at a speed of at least 50% of rated load speed.
b) the capability of stopping the trolley (but not the load block or lifted load unless they are
guided vertically) at a rate of deceleration not to exceed an average of 4.7 ft/sec 2 (1.4 m/s2)
when traveling with power off in either direction at one-third of rated load speed.
c) be designed and installed with a means of retaining the bumper in case of broken or
loosened mounting connections.
11.3 Consideration should be given to providing bumpers with greater capacity for energy
absorption (or energy dissipation) than that specified in and providing bridge end stops with
corresponding increased strength when anyone of the following conditions are present:
a) The trolley has a maximum speed of 150 ft/min (46 m/min) or greater.
b) The trolley is on a remote-operated crane.
c) The trolley is on a pulpit-operated crane.
14
12. Bridge Rail Sweeps

12.1 Bridge truck rail sweeps shall be provided in front of the leading wheels on both ends of the
bridge end truck.
12.2 The rail sweep shall clear the rail of objects on the runway which, if they came into contact
between the wheel and rail, could cause damage to the wheel or derail the wheel.
a) Clearance between the top surface of the rail head and the bottom of the sweep should not
exceed 3/16in.(5 mm).
b) On overhead crane end trucks, the sweep shall extend below the top surface of the rail
head, for a distance not less than 50% of the thickness of the rail head, on both sides of the
rail head.
c) On gantry crane end trucks, when the railhead is located above the pavement or ground
level, the sweep shall extend below the top surface of the rail head, for a distance not less
than 50% of the thickness of the rail head, on both sides of the rail head.
d) Clearance between the vertical inside surfaces of the sweep should be equal to the wheel
tread width plus 3/8 in. (10 mm), and clearance should be evenly spaced on each side of the
wheel tread width.
13. Trolley Rail Sweeps

13.1 Trolley truck rail sweeps should be provided in front of the leading wheels on both ends of the
trolley end truck.
13.2 The rails sweep shall be clear of objects on the bridge, which could come into contact between
the wheel and rail, and cause damage to the wheel or derail the wheel.
a) Clearance between the top surface of the rail head and the bottom of the sweep should not
exceed 3/16 in. (5 mm)
b) The sweep shall extend below the top surface of the rail head, for a distance not less than
50% of the thickness of the rail head, on both sides of the rail head.
c) Clearance between the side surface of the rail head and the side of the sweep which extends
below the top surface of the rail head should be equal to crane float plus 3/16 in. (5 mm).
14. Guard Moving Parts

14.1 Exposed moving parts, such as gears, set screws, projecting keys, and drive chain and
sprockets, which constitute a hazard under normal operating conditions, shall be guarded.
14.2 Each guard shall be capable of supporting, without permanent deformation, the weight of a 200
Ibs (90 kg) person, unless the guard is located where it is not possible that a person will step on
it-ASME B15.1
15
15. Hoist Handling Brakes

15.1 Each hoisting unit of the crane shall be equipped with at least one holding brake. The holding
brake shall be applied to the motor shaft or a gear reducer shaft and shall have a torque rating
not less than the percentage of rated load hoisting torque at the point where the brake is applied
as follows:
a) 125% of rated load hoisting torque when used with a control braking means other than
mechanical
b) 100% of rated load hoisting torque when used with a mechanical control braking means ..
c) 100% of rated load hoisting torque for each brake if two holding brakes are provided
15.2 Each hoist holding brake shall have thermal capacity for the frequency of operation required by
the service.
15.3 Hoist holding brakes shall be applied automatically, when power to the brake is removed.
15.4 Hoist holding brakes shall be provided with means to adjust for lining wear.
16. Hoist Control Braking Means

16.1 Each hoisting unit of the crane shall be equipped with a control braking means that will control
the load during lowering to a maximum speed of 120% of rated lowering speed for the load
being handled.
16.2 Hoist control braking means can be electrical, such as regenerative, dynamic, counter-torque, or
eddy-current; mechanical; hydraulic; or a worm-geared hoist, where the angle of the worm is
such as to prevent the load from accelerating in the lowering direction.
16.3 Hoist control braking means shall have thermal capacity for the frequency of operation required
by the service.
17. Trolley Brakes and Braking Means

17.1 A power-driven bridge shall be equipped with either a braking means or have bridge drive
frictional characteristics that will provide stopping and holding functions, under conditions
where the rails are dry as follows:
a) have torque capability to stop bridge travel within a distance in feet (meters) equal to 10%
of rated load speed in ft/min. (m/min.) when traveling with rated load.
b) have torque capability to impede horizontal motion of the bridge against a horizontal force
equal to 1% of the combined weight of the bridge, trolley, hoist, and rated load when the
bridge is in parked condition.
17.2 A power-driven, cab-operated crane shall be equipped with a bridge brake that will provide the
stopping and holding functions described in ASME B30-2.
17.3 Each bridge brake shall have thermal capacity for the frequency of operation required by the
service.
16
18. Trolley and Bridge Brake Provisions

18.1 General provisions as outlined below apply to, as merited, trolley and bridge brakes.
a) Brakes may be applied by mechanical, electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic, or gravitational

means.
b) Brakes shall be provided with means of adjustment to compensate for lining wear.
c) Brake pedals, latches, and levers should allow release without the exertion of greater force
than was used in applying the brake.
d) Foot-operated brakes shall require an applied force of not more than 70 lbs. (310 N) to
develop rated brake torque.
e) Foot-operated brake pedals shall be so constructed that the operator's foot will not readily slip
off the pedal.
f) Foot-operated brake pedals should be so located that they are convenient to the operator at the
controls.
g) Foot-operated brakes shall be equipped with a means for positive release, when force is
released from the pedal.
h) When provided, a parking brake shall:
i. be applied automatically or manually.
ii. impede horizontal motion of the trolley or bridge in accordance with the requirements of
ASME B30-2.
iii. not prohibit the use of a drift point in the control circuit.
i) When provided, a service-brake shall:
i. be applied manually by the operator during normal operation

ii. stop trolley or bridge travel in accordance with the requirements ASME B30-2
j) When provided, a drag brake shall provide a continuous retarding torque, without external
control.
k) When provided an emergency brake shall:
i. be applied when initiated by the operator, or automatically upon loss of power.
ii. Stop trolley or bridge traveling accordance with the requirements of ASME B30-2.
iii. impede horizontal motion of the trolley or bridge in accordance with the requirements of
ASME B30-2.
17
19. Electrical Equipment
19.1 Wiring and equipment shall comply with Article 610 of ANSI/NFPA No. 70, National
Electrical Code.
19.2 The control circuit voltage shall not exceed 600V for AC or DC.
19.3 The control circuit voltage in pendant push buttons shall not exceed 150V for AC or 300V for
DC.
19.4 Where multiple conductor cable is used with a suspended push-button station, the station shall
be supported so that the electrical conductors are protected from strain.
19.5 Pendant control stations shall be constructed to prevent electrical shock. The push-button
enclosure shall be at ground potential and marked for identification of functions.
19.6 Electrical equipment shall be located or enclosed so that, under normal operating conditions,
energized parts will not be exposed to inadvertent contact.
19.7 Energized parts of electrical equipment shall be protected from direct exposure to grease, oil,
and moisture, and they should be protected from dirt.
19.8 If guards are provided for energized parts, the guards shall be constructed or located so that
they cannot be deformed, under normal operating conditions, to make inadvertent contact with
energized parts.
19.9 Cables, Controllers, Switches, Contactors, Relays and Protection shall comply the relevant
ANSI/IEEE/IEC standards.
20. Runway Conductors

20.1 Conductors of the open type, mounted on the crane runway beams or overhead, shall be so
located or guarded that persons cannot inadvertently come into contact with the energized
conductors under normal
21. Sheaves
21.1 Sheave grooves shall be free from surface defects, which could cause rope damage. The cross-
sectional radius at the bottom of the groove should be such as to form a close-fitting saddle for
the size of rope used. The sides of the groove shall be tapered outward and rounded at the rim
to facilitate entrance of the rope into the groove. Flange rims shall run true about the axis of
rotation.
21.2 Sheaves carrying ropes, which can be momentarily unloaded, shall be provided with close-
fitting guards, or other devices, to guide the rope back into the groove, when the load is
reapplied.
21.3 The sheaves in the bottom block shall be equipped with close-fitting guards that will minimize
the possibility of ropes becoming fouled when the block is lying on the ground with the ropes
loose.
21.4 All running sheaves shall be equipped with means for lubrication. Permanently lubricated,
sealed, or shielded bearings shall be acceptable.
18
22. Drums
22.1 Rope drums shall be grooved, except when the crane is provided by the manufacturer for a
special application. This requirement does not preclude the use of multiple layer spooling. The
grooves shall be free from surface defects that could cause rope damage. The cross-sectional
radius at the bottom of the groove should be such as to form a close-fitting saddle for the size of
rope used.
23. Chain
23.1 The hoisting chain shall be of a recommended construction for crane service. The total load
(rated load plus weight of load block) divided by the number of parts of line shall not exceed
20% of the minimum breaking strength of the chain.
24. Hooks
24.1 Hooks shall meet the manufacturer's recommendations and shall not be overloaded. If hooks
are of the swiveling type, they should rotate freely. Latch-equipped hooks shall be used unless
the application makes the use of the latch impractical or unnecessary. When required, a latch or
mousing shall be provided to bridge the throat opening of the hook for the purpose of retaining
slings, chains, or other similar parts, under slack conditions as per ASME B30.10.
25. Guards for Hoisting Chain

25.1 If it is possible for hoisting ropes to foul or chafe on adjacent parts of the crane under normal
operating conditions, guards shall be installed to minimize damage to the chain.
25.2 A guard shall be provided to prevent contact between bridge or runway conductors and hoisting
chain if, under normal operating conditions, they can come into contact.
26. Paint
26.1 The Crane parts are painted as follows:
a) One coat of premier with 25 microns of DFT (dry film thickness) and 48 hours of compulsory
curing after painting.
b) Two coating of long lasting Enamel paint color-Yellow, each with DFT of 25 microns and
intermittent curing of minimum 16 hours.
c) Lifting Hook shall also be painted Yellow.
d) Girders, Trolleys, Columns are to be shot blasted or chemically treated for surface cleaning,
after completion of all operations but prior to painting.
e) All nut, bolts and fixing shall be suitable protected against corrosion.
27. Warning Devices

27.1 All warning devices shall be provided appropriately, where necessary. The warning devices
shall comply the ASME B30-2. Type of devices shall be as follows:
a) Manually operated gong

19
b) Power-operated bell, siren or horn
c) Rotating beacon
d) Strobe light
28. Warnings
28.1 Crane shall have labels in compliance with ANSI Z535.4 and shall include cautionary language
(in English and Bangla) against:
a) Lifting more than rated load
b) Operating hoist when load is not centered under hoist
c) Operating hoist with twisted, kinked, or damaged chain
d) Operating damaged or malfunctioning crane
e) Lifting people
f) Lifting loads over people
g) Operating a chain hoist that is not properly seated in its grove
h) Operating manual motions with other than manual power
i) Removing or obscuring safety label
j) Disconnect power and lockout disconnecting means before removing cover or servicing
this equipment
k) Do not operate without cover in place
29. Warranty
29.1 The manufacturer's standard warranty shall cover the performance of the total Crane and/or the
Components / Sub-Assemblies / Bought-Out-Items and shall be guaranteed for a minimum
period of two (2) years from the date of performance acceptance at BREB material acceptance
Lab.
30. Installation, Testing and Commissioning

30.1 Installation, Testing and Commissioning shall be the responsibility of the Vendor.
30.2 Commissioning of the Crane and performance prove-out for the Crane‟s capacity and smooth
functioning of the Crane (at BREB Works) shall be the responsibility of the supplier.
31. Operating and Maintenance Manual

31.1 The Crane shall be provided with detailed operating and maintenance manual and user‟s guide
containing technical specifications, safety warnings, important technical data and circuit
diagrams in English language.
a) Installation
b) Operation
c) Inspection
d) Testing
e) Lubrication (where necessary accessible means and directions for lubrication shall be
provided)
f) Maintenance
g) Parts
h) Wiring diagram (may be supplied separately)
20
31.2 Personnel responsible for the supervision, installation, operation, inspection, or maintenance of
the crane shall be familiar with the applicable contents of the manual furnished with the crane.
a) Crane GA drawings
b) Crab assembly drawings
c) Total crane wiring scheme
d) Detailed wiring drawings of sub-systems/panels
e) Drive's logic circuits drawings
f) Wheel assembly drawings
g) Gear Box assembly drawings
h) Couplings Drawings and details
i) Specifications/Ratings of all bought-out items
j) Warranty Cards for all Bought-out items
k) Trouble shooting charts for main and sub-system
32. Training and Safe Use

32.1 The supplier shall conduct training sessions to BREB staff on the use of the Crane and controls
for operation, sub-assemblies and components etc. shall be given training on safe operation of
the machines, operation and maintenance (O&M) and use of controls, emergency, safety etc.
including other functions and features.
32.2 The training shall comprise of a balanced combination of classroom training and hands-on
experience and shall cover all aspects of equipment operation.
33. Tests
33.1 The manufacturer shall provide at the time of tender, certificates attesting to the fact that
conformance type tests have been performed successfully on the machines of the Crane.
33.2 Acceptance Tests: Acceptance tests will be conducted before shipment. Test protocol shall be
provided by the supplier and approved by the client. If unit fails the acceptance tests the offered
Crane shall be rejected. The acceptance tests shall be as follows:
a) Verification of Test Certificates for Raw Materials used for Girders, End-Carriages, Trolleys,
Gear Box Casings, etc.
b) Verification of X-Ray Report of Butt Joints coming in the Girders and Random Testing on the
Welds, by physical examination
c) Box Girder setting before closing of the Bottom Flanges for inspecting the quality of welding
and presence of waviness.
d) Trolley Frame Fabrication before setting the Mechanisms
e) End-Carriage Fabrication
f) Inspection of Bridges and End-Carriages with Wheel Assembly and Alignment checking.
g) Verification of Span & Diagonal Dimensions, Checking of Wheel Alignment, Mechanical
Assemblies and Total Alignment.
h) Free running of the all the Mechanisms
i) Measurement of "CAMBER" in the Bridges
j) Full / Rated Load Test and Deflection Test. Deflection and Permanent Set measurements.
k) 25% over-load lifting ability
21
34. Markings and Name Plate
34.1 Rated load on the crane shall be marked on each side of the crane and shall be legible from
ground or floor.
34.2 The rated load of the Hoist shall be marked on the hoist or trolley or its load block and shall be
legible from ground or floor.
34.3 The following information shall be given on the name plate:
a) Manufacturer‟s name and address

b) Manufacturer‟s model, serial number, year of manufacture, and identifying number
c) Maximum loading/unloading capacity
d) Factor of safety
e) Civil, Electrical and Mechanical design parameters
f) Manufacturer logo
g) Weight and size
h) Power, AC voltage and frequency
i) Essential Circuit diagram
j) Protection (IP) class
k) Applicable standards
l) All other important data as necessary
35. Packaging and Shipping

35.1 Export packaging and shipping shall be adequate for sea transport and handling up to delivery
site in Bangladesh.
35.2 The material shall be sealed in plastic bags or other suitable moisture proof
materials and packed in sturdy arrangement in completely assembled condition.
Each crate shall contain test equipment and installation instructions.
35.3 The material shall be skidded, crated, boxed or otherwise suitably protected against damage or
loss during shipment and to facilitate field hand storage. All openings shall be effectively
sealed with temporary closures to prevent entry of dust, dirt, moisture and other foreign matter.
35.4 The cover of the main crate shall carry the following information written in English:
a) Number of test equipment contained therein

b) Manufacturer‟s catalog number
c) Description of the material
d) Manufacturer‟s name
e) Purchase order number
f) Gross weight in kg
g) Bar code
35.5 Additional handling and shipping instructions shall be obtained from BREB, as applicable.
22
36. Technical Data, Drawings and Submittal
36.1 The supplier/manufacturer shall provide hard and soft copies of the technical data, catalogues,
documentation and information with the bid submittal of Crane, as follows:
a) Engineering design (civil, electrical and mechanical) calculations of the bridge crane.
b) General Arrangement (GA) drawings of the crane.
c) GA drawings of crab with trolley.
d) Drawings of bridge, End-Carriage and their connections.
e) GA of individual mechanism.
f) Sub-assembly drawings of Wheels, Hook Blocks, Gear Boxes, Hoist Drums.
g) Engineering calculations for selection of electric -motors, gear reducers, brakes, couplings
etc.
h) Calculations for Bridge Girder, Crab End-Carriage and their connections.
i) Wiring drawings of electric circuits.
j) Calculations for power and control cables design and ratings.
k) Total weight of crane including all Electrical equipment.
l) Total weight of Trolley including all electrical equipment.
m) Weight of each Bridge assembled and ready for erection with or without Mechanical and
Electrical equipment.
n) Weight of each End-Carriage assembled and ready for erection.
o) Total Weight of Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Equipment and indicated separately
indicated.
p) Complete list of BOQs of items in the package.
q) Certified calibration test reports.
r) Packaging details.
s) Terms of manufacturer‟s warranty.
t) Manufacturer‟s certificate attesting to 10 years of experience in manufacturing.
u) Statement of country of origin.
v) Copy of ISO:900-2015 Certification for the manufacturing plant.
w) Copies of test certificates evidencing completion of qualification tests.
x) List of clients in last five years with their respective addresses, which were supplied overhead
bridge cranes of similar rating.
y) Confirmation in writing that the equipment and materials will be supported technically and in
parts availability for a minimum of 10 years from the date installed.
z) Clause by clause conformance with this specification and a list of explanations for any
deviations from or exceptions to these specifications.
36.2 If no exceptions are taken to this specification and no list of deviations is submitted, it shall be
deemed that in every respect the offered test equipment conforms to this specification.
Purchaser‟s interpretation of this specification shall be accepted.
36.3 In case of conflict or ambiguity, the vendor may propose a value with corresponding reference
standards without effecting the requirements of this specification.
36.4 Vendor shall visit the site to take measurements, note clearances and discuss BREB
requirements, before their technical bid submittal for evaluation.
23
Vendor shall visit site and take measurements, clearances and information before design
37. Ground Floor Plan (For Concept Only) PROJECT : CLIENT : DESIGN ENGINEER :
MD.SAZZAD HOSSAIN
PROJECT MANAGER : CONSULTANT:
PROPOSED 3-STORIED TESTING LABORATORY BUILDING B.Sc. Engg ( CIVIL) FIEB-12731
BANGLADESH RURAL
WITH 8 STORIED FOUNDATION AT SAVAR, DHAKA
ELECTRIFICATION BOARD (BREB) CAD BY : NADIMHOSSAIN
DRWG. TITTLE :
House 33/A (1st floor), Road 99
DATE : JAN, / 2018 SHEET NO : A-01 GROUND FLOOR PLAN Gulshan-2, Dhaka-1212, Bangladesh
24
Guaranteed Technical Particulars-Overhead Bridge Crane

a) To be filled up by the bidder with appropriate data, otherwise the Bid will be rejected.
b) Failure to provide all of the information requested may lead to the rejection of the bid.
c) Bidder to list offered capability.
d) Statement of “Comply” only is not acceptable.
Sr No Description REB Requirement Bidder's

Guaranteed
Value
1 Manufacturer /Supplier Only North American or Western
name/title Europe sources are acceptable
2 Manufacturer/Supplier Required
address and contacts
3 Reference Standards As specified in clause 2

*Conformance to national standards only,
such as Chinese, Indian, or Russian is not
acceptable.
4 Experience and Quality As specified in clause 3
Control
5 Service Conditions As specified in clause 4
6 Capacity 100 ton lifting capacity
7 Hoist limit 100 ton (keep factor of safety in view)

8 Span Wheel center to wheel center
9 Long Travel 30 meters (refer to floor plan)
10 Cross Travel 15 meters (refer to floor plan) with 10m
centered on the lab railroad and 5m
laydown area to the left (facing the
doors from inside) of the railroad.
11 Height of lifting 10/11 meters from ground level with
dual/variable speed (effective height
shall be 10m)
12 Operating and Working Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Speed maximum (m/s) for:
a) Hoist
b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
13 Duty Cycle (related to Drive Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Motor & Mechanisms) for:
a) Hoist
b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
25
14 Motor Ratings Vendor to specify for the offered

system
15 Electric Drive Motor Ratings a) Hoist
& Frame size b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
16 Gear Box Vendor to specify for the offered

system
Gear Box Size for:
a) Hoist
b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
17 Acceleration mm/s Vendor to specify for the offered crane

for:
a) Hoist
b) Cross Travel
c) Long Travel
18 Hoist Rope Size and number Vendor to specify for the offered crane
of falls of rope System for:
19 Control Control by wired master pendant with
push button hanging in air
20 Type of Control Wired master control
21 Input Voltage 240/415 ± 5% Volts, 50 Hz, 3 Phase -

AC
22 Control Voltage 110 V AC or as proposed by the vendor
23 Duty Class Class -3, Indoor Service

24 Design Standards ASME/IEC /ANSI/IEEE/BS
25 Runway Rail Size for Cross Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Travel (kN/m)
26 Runway Rail Size for Long Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Travel (kN/m)
27 Wheel Size for Cross Travel Vendor to specify for the offered crane
(dia. mm)
28 Wheel Size for Long Travel Vendor to specify for the offered crane
(dia. mm)
29 Brake Drum Size for Hoist Vendor to specify for the offered crane
(dia. mm)
31 Brake Drum Size for Cross Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Travel (dia. mm)
32 Brake Drum Size for Long Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Travel (dia. mm)
33 Brake Drum Size for Parking Vendor to specify for the offered crane
Brake (dia. mm)
26
34 Crane Type Double Girder, Top running

*Rail size shall be designed by the
supplier and vendor to provide
35 Bridge Travel Motorized, geared, dual speed, had
chain drop
*supplier to design based on site
requirements and vendor to provide
Required
36 Bridge Beam and Columns *sizes shall be as per design
requirements and vendor to provide
37 Trolley Type Motorized, geared with dual/variable

speed
38 Control System Conventional master control for all
motions
39 Crane operations Wired master control
40 Operator No operator cabin is needed, operator

to handle through wired master control
41 Structural Fabrication Crane Structural Constructional

Details
42 Bridge Leg Box type construction
43 Raw material Only steel plates, tested and certified
quality
44 Welded Joints To be followed for Bridge/leg
Fabrication
45 Number of Joints To be followed for Bridge/leg
Fabrication
46 Number of Joints For span up to 25 meters - two joints,
for span 25 meters to 50 meters - three
joints
47 Welding Electrodes Electrode only should be used:
· For all Horizontal Welding: E 7018
·For all Vertical Welding: E 7048.
48 Welded Joint Testing All Butt-Welded Joints (both
compression / tension and flanges / web
joints) shall be subjected to 100% X-
Ray Testing and X-Ray Films to be
produced for BREB evaluation and
form part of technical submission.
49 Splice Joint No splice joint is allowed in girder
fabrication
50 Leg connection Leg to bridge connection shall be
designed for double shear.
27
51 Platform on Girders The Platforms provided on both the

Girders shall be fixed through bolted
joints using fit bolt only.
52 Wheel Assembly The Wheel Assembly coming for Cross
Travel (CT) & Long Travel (LT) shall
be of live axle system with L-Type
Bearings.
53 Heat Treatment The Trolleys (where applicable) shall
be Stress Relieved by thermal heat-
treatment process after welding and
non-destructive testing (NDT)
examinations. All welding shall be
tested by NDT means [MPI, LPI & RT]
after Stress Relieving operation.
54 Machining Operation All mechanical mating surfaces and
wheel seating areas are to be machined
to the required finish and protected
55 Surface Cleaning Both the Girders and the Trolleys are to

be shot blasted or chemically treated
for surface cleaning, after completion
of all operations but prior to painting.
56 Painting The crane parts are to be painted as

follows:
One coat of Primer with 25 microns of
DFT (Dry Film Thickness) and 48
hours of compulsory curing after
painting. Two coats of Enamel Paint
(Color –Yellow) each with a DFT of 25
microns and intermittent curing of
minimum 16 hours.
57 Gears Gears in all the Stages shall be helical

in design and to be of machined &
ground and hardened.
58 Gear Box Casing Shall be of fabricated type and stress
relived by thermal heat-treatment
process, prior to machining
59 Type of Coupling Only geared coupling to be used:

a) between Electric Motor and Gear
Box
b) between Gear Box and Rope Drum
c) between Gear Box and Trolley
Wheels
28
60 Rope Drum Shall be of fabricated type and stress

relieved. The circumferential weld
joints shall be tested by 100 % X-Ray
for quality assurance.
61 Wheels The Wheels shall be of Die-Forged and
Wheel Tread hardened to 300/350
BHN (Brinell hardness number).
Wheels shall be fitted with L-Type

Bearings
62 Mechanical Joints Fit Bolts as per IS 3640-1982 for all
joints coming in main members and
platform with reamed holes
63 Pulley Dimension Rope Pulley diameter shall be 23 times
that of Rope diameter
64 Hook Hook latch shall be provided for both
hooks
65 Wind Clamp Wind clamp shall be provided in all
four corners
66 Roof Covering Single Roof cover shall be provided for
trolley and long travel mechanisms
67 Electrical Elements
68 Operational Controls The Crane shall be provided with the
Wired master control to be used by
operator manually
69 Control Voltage 110V/220 V AC

70 Type of Brakes a) Hoist: DC Brake
b) Cross Travel: Thruster Brake
c) Long Travel: Thruster Brake
d) Parking Brake: DC Brake
71 Protection: All Panels, Limit-Switches and Motors
shall have IP 54 protection. (Outdoor
Service)
72 Electric Motors All Electric Motors shall be as per
IIEC/ANSI/IEEE and also suitable for
500 starts per hour and 40 % CDF.
73 Electric Contactors All Panels shall have only SIEMENS

Contactors and shall be suitable for
AC3 Duty Class.
74 Contactors Rating The rating of all Contactors shall be at
least 50% higher than the respective
electric motor full load current, at the
specified duty cycle.
75 Resistance Stainless steel punched grid resistance
continuous rating
29
76 Long Travel Motion A dual Drive Mechanism shall be

provided for Long Travel Motion.
77 Illumination Four numbers of 500 Watts Halogen
Lamps shall be provided under the
Bridge, All Electric Panels shall be
provided with suitable illumination for
visibility and trouble shooting
78 Controller Steps: A 5-Step Controller has to be provided

for
a. Main Hoist
b. Long Travel
c. Cross Travel
79 Load Cell for Main Hoist Load weighing system with load cell to
be fixed/provided at the equalizer
pulley
The display shall be of 100 mm size-
Jumbo
80 Crab Wiring The CRAB shall be fully wired with
junction box
81 Hoist Limit Each hoist shall be provided with both
rotary and counter weight limits
82 Cabin Electric Light, Fan, Exhaust-Fan,

Warning Bell and Emergency Stop
Push Button shall be provided in the
Operator Cabin
83 Sources Only US or Western European Sources
materials are acceptable
84 Hoist Hooks Vendor to specify for the offered crane
85 Wire Rope Vendor to specify for the offered crane
86 Electric Motors GEC/Siemens (make)
87 DC Brake Unit Vendor to specify for the offered crane
88 Radio Control Vendor to specify for the offered crane
89 Thrust Brake Unit Vendor to specify for the offered crane
90 Limit Switch (Gravity Type) Siemens
91 Contactors (make) Siemens

92 Overload Relay for Siemens
protection (make)
93 HRC Fuses (make) Siemens
94 Rotary Limit Switch (make) Siemens
95 Switch Fuse Unit Vendor to specify for the offered crane

96 MCCB (make) Siemens, Schneider Electric
97 MCB (make) Siemens, Schneider Electric

30
98 Pneumatic Time Delay Vendor to specify for the offered crane
99 Push Button (make) Siemens
100 Connectors (make) Siemens
101 Couplings (make) Vendor to specify for the offered crane
102 Bearings Vendor to specify for the offered crane

103 Power & Control Cables IEC /ANSI/IEEE/BS Certified
104 Load Cell Vendor to specify for the offered crane
105 Resistance Box Vendor to specify for the offered crane
106 Name & signature of

authorized representative
with date
107 Official Seal/Stamp
Note:
a) Vendor shall provide clause by clause conformance of this technical specification with the
submittal duly signed and stamped
b) List of deviations (If any)

31
Specification# 35
Lifts/Elevators (for Passenger and Goods)
1. Scope
1.1 This Guide Specification covers General Technical requirements for the design, supply,
installation, testing, commissioning and handing over on turn key basis (TKB) of two (2)
microprocessor-based, Elevators/Lifts complete in all respects (including brake release tools)
for a three (3) story building in phase -I, which will be extended to eight (8) stories later in
phase-II, for Bangladesh Rural Electrification Board (BREB) material Acceptance Testing
Laboratory at Palli Biddyut Area, Savar Dhaka, Bangladesh, as follows:
a) One (01ea.) Passenger Elevator/Lift - capacity for 12 passengers - 1000kG

b) One (01ea.) Goods Elevator/Lift - capacity 3 ton
1.2 Scope of work shall include Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC) for three (3) years and one
(1) year of Defect Liability Period (DLP), after handing over to Bangladesh Rural
Electrification Board (BREB), inclusive of periodic servicing, prompt attention to client
(BREB) complaint, prompt rectification of all malfunctions and equipment failures,
replacement of defective equipment / parts, replacement of light fittings/fixtures, lubrication -
including lubricants, maintaining correct alignment and levelling of cars and ensuring smooth
running, starts and stops etc. all complete to BREB‟s satisfaction shall be done.
1.4 This specification shall be read in conjunction with the terms and conditions of the Contract.
2.1 Elevator/Lift shall conform to the latest editions of the standards applicable to their design,
construction, operation and application including but not limited to those listed below, and their
normative references:
 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility

Guidelines.
 ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
 ANSI/NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
 ASME/ANSI A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators glass
insulators-suspension type
 ANSI/UL 10B Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
 ISO 630 Standards for structural steels
 ASME Safety Codes and Standards, ADA standards and ASME Code A 17.1 & A 18.1
 ISO 22201:2017 (Amended to date) for Lifts and Elevators
 BS Building and safety codes
 IEC/ANSI Standards
32
The Contractor shall follow Bangladesh and International Statutory Requirements as well as best trade
practices in the manufacture & installation of Elevators/Lifts. The Contractor shall arrange to obtain
the statutory approval of the Inspectorate of Lifts as may be required for commissioning of the lifts
and handover for operation after satisfactory tests. The equipment and installation covered by these
specifications shall conform to codes of practice in force and highest standards of safety,
workmanship and materials. This work shall be done in accordance with the provisions of the "Local
Lifts Authority Rules" and shall also conform to requirements of local Municipal by laws, and
subsequent provisions, as also local Act in force for safety and operation.
3.1 The Electric Elevators /Lifts shall be manufactured at a plant that has fabricated units of similar
design and characteristics for a period not less than ten years and that holds ISO: 9001
Certification for the quality management.
4.1 The Electric Elevators/ Lifts shall be suitable for the laboratory building under the local service
conditions in Bangladesh, which are as follows:
k) Altitude above mean sea level (MSL): less than 1,000 meters
l) Maximum summer peak ambient temperature: +45°C
m) Minimum outdoor winter temperature: 3°C
n) Average daily temperature: +35°C
o) Maximum yearly average temperature: +30°C
p) Relative Humidity: 50% - 100%
q) Yearly average Humidity: 80%
r) Pollution level: Moderate
s) Storage temperature: -10°C - +70°C
t) Operating temperature: -10°C - +45°C
5. Design and Performance Specifications
5.1 The Electric Elevators /Lifts shall meet or exceed the technical and performance requirements
of this specification in all respects and shall have minimum technical features as given below:
a) Passenger Elevator capacity: 12 Passengers /Loading Capacity (approximately):

1000kg (supplier to keep factor of safety in load design)
b) Goods Elevator capacity: 3.0 ton (supplier to keep factor of safety in load design)
c) Number of stops: 3 stops
d) Design: Supplier to design both the Elevators for eight stories but this installation
will be for a three (3) story building
e) Type: Microprocessor/PLC based logic controlled Electric Elevators
f) Inside car height: Supplier to design after field verify
g) Door Opening/Closing Time: 1.80 seconds for Center Opening / 2.5 second
closing 4.0 seconds for Side Slide Openings / 4.5 seconds close
h) The following parameters shall be achieved in the installation:
 Levelling Accuracy: + 3 mm for 1.5 m/s speed and + 4 mm for 0.75 m/s
speed; under any loading condition or direction of travel
 Jerk level: 0.9 – 1.5 m/s3
33
 Noise level in car: 50 dB

 Noise level in machine room: 60 dB
 Acceleration rate: 0.6 – 1.0 m/s2 (adjustable)
 Max. car vibration: 20 milli gals
 Hall Signal Frequency: 1500Hz max. (300-3000Hz verbal annunciator)
 Hall Signal level: 10dB above ambient, 80dB max.
Vendor shall specify above parameters for the offered Elevators and associated equipment in the
technical data sheet.
5.2 Car Operating Features: The car shall answer calls in the order in which floors are reached,
without respect to the time sequence in which the calls were registered. Only car calls and up
hall calls shall be answered when the car is traveling in the up direction, and only car calls and
down hall calls hall be answered when the car is traveling in the down direction, except in the
case of the highest or lowest calls, which are answered as soon as they are reached, regardless
of the direction of travel of the car. When the car reaches the last registered call for the
established direction, it shall reverse and proceed to answer calls in the opposite direction if
they are; (bidder shall specify this parameter for the offered machine in the technical data
sheet).
5.3 Anti-Nuisance: If an excessive number of car calls (quantity to be adjustable) are registered
and the passenger load as determined by the weight sensors is less than a predetermined weight,
all car calls shall be canceled requiring re-registration of calls.
5.4 Call Parking Recognition: Field Verify/ Car doors shall only open in response to car and hall
demand. Cars being parked without call demand will be parked without door operation.
5.5 Direction Preference: At the final stop (highest or lowest call), direction preference shall be
given to the hall passenger whereby, if a passenger registers a car call for the original direction
of travel before the doors close, it shall not be possible for a waiting passenger at another floor
to call the car in the reverse direction.
5.6 Direction Reversal: A car without registered car calls arriving at a floor where both up and
down hall calls are registered and the hall call is the last one in that direction, shall first respond
to the hall call in the direction that the car was traveling; and if no car call is registered for
further travel in that direction, the car shall close its doors and immediately re-open them in
response to the hall call in the opposite direction. The hall lantern shall always show the
direction the car will travel, when it leaves a floor.
5.7 Fan and Light Protection: Maximum clamping thickness of flat specimen (mm): 70/75mm
(vendor shall specify this parameter for the offered machine in the technical data sheet).
5.8 Hall Button Protection: If the hall button signal system fails, all of the cars in the group shall
enter Hall Button Protection operation. Each car shall answer all pending car calls. When each
car has no further demand, each car shall travel to the lobby and shut down with the doors
open.
5.9 Landing Passing Tone: An audible signal located in car operating panel shall sound when the
car passes or stops at a landing.
34
5.10 Independent Service: Actuation of the Independent Service switch shall remove that car from
normal group operation, permitting it to respond only to calls registered on car buttons and
making the door close operation subject to the Door Close Button. A car operating on
Independent Service shall not respond to hall calls. Car and/or hall lantern operation shall be
suspended. A Call Cancel push-button shall be provided on the car-operating panel. When the
button is activated all registered calls shall be canceled and a traveling car will stop at the next
landing.
5.11 The sensor shall be long-life and rugged.
5.12 The Elevators/ Lifts shall have built-in overload and electrical surge protection.
Vendor shall specify all the above parameters for the offered machine in the technical data sheet.
6. Fire Fighting Service Operation Features:
6.1 Firefighters Service Phase-I: When a building smoke sensor or a key switch located at the
designated return landing is activated, all cars in the group shall perform an emergency return
to the designated landing. The return operation shall be in compliance with applicable codes.
Passengers shall be alerted that the car is returning by a buzzer and a message indicator
showing "Please Exit when Doors open" and a Fireman's Hat light is also illuminated.
6.2 Alternate Return Landing for Phase-I: The car(s), while responding to a Phase 1
Firefighters' Service operation, shall return to a reselected alternate landing if the smoke
detector at the designated return landing has been activated.
6.3 Firefighters Service Phase-II: This feature shall be activated by the firefighting personnel
using a key switch in the car and shall place the elevator under their control. The operation
shall be in compliance with applicable codes. This feature shall include a Call Cancel push-
button. When the button is activated all registered calls will be canceled and a traveling car will
stop at the next landing.
7. Maintenance and Operation (M&O) Features:
7.1 Top of Car Inspection: Enabling switches in the car operating panel and on top of the car shall
make the car and hall buttons inoperative and allow the controls in a fixture on the top of the
car to be used to move the car at reduced speed for installation, inspection, and maintenance.
This operating station shall include a push-button, which must be continuously depressed to
permit the elevator to move in either the up or down direction. The top-of-car inspection station
shall include a 240V, 15 Amp convenience outlet with ground-fault-circuit-interrupter
protection and a convenience light with switch. The top of car fixture shall also include an
emergency stop button.
7.2 Pit Emergency Switch: A switch, accessible from the pit access door, shall be provided for
each car. When a switch is activated, the corresponding car shall stop running.
35
8. Security Features:
8.1 ADA Emergency Communications: This feature shall provide an "Alarm Received" message
indicator in the car operating panel fixture having an "Alarm" message indicator, key switch,
and buzzer. An Alarm Button in the car-operating panel shall activate the message indicator
and buzzer in the hall fixture. Activating the key switch in the hall fixture shall illuminate the
"Alarm Received" message indicator in the car.
8.2 Door Control Features/Closed Loop Control: Closed loop control Operator will be installed
to allow for smooth operation under varying environmental influences such as, temperature,
wind, friction, and component variation. It will meet the specified door times and required
position and velocity profiles, with consistent running results at all landings.
8.3 Operating and Closing Times: Opening and closing speeds are adjustable. The system will
limit closing speed (and hence the time) based on the code requirement of kinetic energy,
which depends on the door mass. The code may limit the speed of a heavy bronze lobby door,
but at another floor we can move the doors quicker.
8.4 Door Noise: Door noise will be 50dBA. This include reversals.
8.5 Door Control and Closing: Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a
landing in response to a normal hall or car call. Elevator doors shall be provided with a
reopening device that will stop and reopen the car door(s) and hoistway door(s) automatically
should the door(s) become obstructed by an object or person.
a) Primary door protection shall consist of a two-dimensional, multi-beam array projecting across
the car door opening. Under normal operation and for any door position, the system shall detect as
a blockage an opaque object that is equal to or greater than 1.3 inches (33 mm) in diameter when
inserted between the car doors at vertical positions from within 1 inch (25 mm) above the sill to
71 inches (1800 mm) above the sill. Under degraded conditions (one or more blocked or failed
beams), the primary protection shall detect opaque objects that are equal to or greater than 4" (100
mm) in diameter for the same vertical coverage. If the system performance is degraded to the
point that the 4" object cannot be detected, the system shall maintain the doors open or permit
closing only under nudging forces conditions. The door reopening device shall also include a
secondary, three-dimensional, triangular infrared multi-beam array projecting across the door
opening and extending into the hoistway door zone.
b) The door-opening device will cause the doors to reopen when it detects a person(s) or object(s)
entering or exiting the car in the area between the hoistway doors or the entryway area adjacent to
the hoist way doors.
c) At door separations of 18" or less the secondary protection system may cease its normal operation
since the depth of the zone recedes to where it is inside the hoistway doors. The vertical coverage
of the secondary protection shall be ~19" (480 mm) above the sill to ~55" (1400 mm) above the
sill (mid-thigh to shoulder of a typical adult).
d) The size of the secondary protection zone shall vary as the door positions vary during opening and
closing. The width of the zone shall be approximately one-third the size of the separation between
the doors (and door and strike plate for single-slide doors) and shall be approximately centered in
the door separation. In order to minimize detection of hallway passers-by that are not entering the
elevator, the maximum zone penetration into the entryway shall not exceed 20" for any door
separation. Normal penetration depth into the entryway from the car doors shall be ~14" for a
door separation of 42". The penetration shall reduce proportionally as the doors close.
35
36
e) The secondary protection shall have an anti-nuisance feature, which will ignore detection in the
secondary zone after continual detection occurs for a significant time period in the secondary zone
without corresponding detection in the primary protection zone; i.e. a person/object is in the
entryway but does not enter. Normal secondary protection shall be re-enabled, whenever detection
occurs in the primary zone.
f) The reaction time of the door detector sub-system shall not exceed 60 milliseconds when both
primary and secondary protection capabilities are active; nor 40 milliseconds when the secondary
protection is disabled.
8.6 Door Nudging: Door nudging operation to occur, if doors are prevented from closing for an
adjustable period of time.
8.7 Adjustable Door Dwell Time: The time interval that elevator doors stand open after a stop
shall be independently adjustable for car call stops and hall call stops. A separate door time
shall be adjustable for lobby door hall calls.
8.8 Nudging: If the doors are prevented from closing for a fixed time period, the Car Door
Protective Device shall be rendered inoperative, a buzzer shall sound on the car and the doors
shall close at approximately half speed and torque. Normal operation shall resume at the next
landing reached by the car.
8.9 Door Time Open Protection: If the car doors do not open completely within a predetermined
time, the car shall extinguish its hall and car direction lanterns (if provided), sound the in-car
alarm buzzer, and shall if part of a group, remove itself from group operation. Then the car
shall proceed to the next landing in its direction of travel (or reverse direction from a top or
bottom landing) and again attempt to open its doors fully. If the car moves to three consecutive
landings without being able to open its doors fully, it shall shutdown with the doors closed.
8.10 Door Time Close Protection: If the Nudging Operation does not completely close the car
doors within a predetermined time, the car will extinguish its hall and car direction lanterns (if
provided), sound the in-car alarm buzzer, and shall, if part of a group, remove itself from group
operation. Then the car shall open its doors fully and again attempt to close them. If the car
cannot fully close its doors after three attempts, it shall shutdown with the doors open. Every
two minutes the car shall retry closing its doors.
8.11 Door Protection: Infrared door protection shall be installed.
8.12 Car and Hoist Doors: To be installed as per requirements.
9. Materials
9.1 Steel: Sheet Steel for Exposed Work: Stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled, commercial-quality carbon
steel, complying with ASTM A366, matte finish.
9.2 Sheet Steel for Unexposed Work: Hot-rolled, commercial-quality carbon steel, pickled and
oiled, complying with ASTM A569. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36 and AISI
1018.  
36
37
9.3 Stainless Steel: Type 300 Series complying with ASTM A167, with standard tempers and
hardness required for fabrication, strength and durability.  Supply with mechanical finish on
fabricated work in the location shown or specified with texture and reflectivity required
(Federal and NAAMM Nomenclature). Protect with adhesive plastic film or paper covering.
 All finishes specified as "satin" to be Manufacturer's standard directional polish that complies
with commercial No. 4 requirements.  All finishes specified as "mirror" to be Manufacturer's
standard mirror polish that complies with commercial No. 8 requirements.  
9.4 Bronze: Cold finished muntz metal type UNS C28000-H02 complying with ASTM
B36/B36M.  Supply with mechanical finish on fabricated work in the location shown or
specified with texture and reflectivity required (Federal and NAAMM nomenclature) Protect
with adhesive plastic film or paper covering.  All finishes specified as "satin" to be
Manufacturer's standard directional polish that complies with commercial No. 4 requirements.
All finishes specified as "mirror" to be Manufacturer's standard mirror polish that complies
with commercial No. 8 requirements.  
9.5 Aluminum: Extrusions per ASTM B221; sheet and plate per ASTM B209.  
9.6 Plastic Laminate: ASTM E84 Class A and NEMA LD3, Fire-rated Grade (FR-50), 0.050" (1.3
mm) up to 1/16" (1.6 mm) nominal thickness.
9.7 Exposed surfaces: to have color and texture selected by Architect from Manufacturer's
standard selection.
9.8 Fire Retardant Treated Particleboard Panels: Minimum 1/2" (16 mm) thick backup for
natural finished wood and plastic laminate veneered panels, edged and faced as shown, proved
with suitable anti-warp backing; to meet ASTM E84 Class "A" rating with flame-spread rating
of 25 or less, registered with appropriate authorities for elevator finish materials.
9.9 Natural Finish Wood Veneer: Standard thickness 1/36" (0.7 mm) to 1/42" (0.6 mm),
thoroughly dried conforming to ANSI/HPMA HP-1983, Premium Grade. Specified finish to be
chosen from elevator manufacturer's standard selection.  
9.10 Paint: Unexposed Steel and/or Iron: Clean exposed metal of oil, grease, scale and other foreign
matter and paint one shop coat of Manufacturer's standard rust-resistant primer. Primer shall be
of a low V.O.C. water-based type. Galvanized metal need not be painted.
9.11 Exposed Steel: Clean exposed metal of oil, grease, scale and other foreign matter. Eliminate
any dents, scratches, or other defects that would affect the final finish. For material delivered
with primer coat only, apply two coats of manufacturer's standard powder coated primer. For
material delivered with a finish coat apply an additional two coat of manufacturer's standard
powder coated of a color selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard color
selection.
10. Equipment
10.1 Controller: A microcomputer-based control system shall be provided to perform all of the
functions of safe elevator motion. Included shall be all of the hardware required to connect,
transfer and interrupt power, and to protect the motor against overloading. The system shall
also perform car and group operational control.  Each controller cabinet containing memory
equipment shall be properly shielded from line pollution. The microcomputer system shall be
designed to accept reprogramming with minimum system down time.  All high voltage (230V
or above) contact points inside the controller cabinet shall be protected from accidental contact
in a situation where the controller doors are open.
37
38
10.2 Motion Control: A microprocessor-based motion control system with a dictated position and
velocity profile shall be provided.
10.3 Remote Elevator Monitoring: Install a remote monitoring device to allow 24 hours off site
monitoring of the health of the elevator system and to dispatch a service call as required in an
entrapment.
11. Design and Drawings
11.1 Before commencing work, the Contractor shall design, prepare and submit all drawings for
individual two (2) lifts (One passenger and one goods Elevator/Lift) as specified (in required
number of sets) necessary to show the general arrangement and details of lifts installation,
electrical, mechanical and civil etc. These drawings must be approved by the Consultant/BREB
before installation and shall become part of the contract.
11.2 The Contractor shall, within 3 (three) weeks of receipt of a Letter of award of Contract, submit
4 (four) copies of all working drawings showing pit, hoistway and machine room layouts
clearly indicating and specifying all connected structural, electrical and architectural works
including imposed structural static / dynamic loads (including breaking load on guides, reaction
of buffers on lift pits, reaction on support points in machine room, lift well etc.) and electrical
ratings including calculations for selection of kW rating of motor. Within 10 days of receipt of
letter of award of Contract, the Contractor shall obtain from the concerned BREB approved
Authority all the information he needs to prepare his drawings and shall have any interaction
with the concerned Authority to finalize all parameters and data for design.
11.3 The Contractor will be responsible for any discrepancies, errors and omissions in the drawings
or particulars submitted by him even if these have been approved by the concerned BREB
approved Authority. On approval of these drawings (within 2 weeks of submission of full
documentation), the Contractor shall submit 4 (four) copies of approved working drawings
incorporating corrections / comments, if any, and shall immediately commence work.
11.4 On completion of work, the contractor shall supply four sets of soft copies and 4 (four) copies
of the detailed wiring diagram, „As built‟ drawings and equipment operation and maintenance
manuals and original certificates from „Inspector of Lifts‟ for all the lifts. Further, a copy of
such detailed diagram and a set of instructions for evacuation of passengers in case of
breakdown of the lifts shall be framed and installed in the respective machine room by the
Contractor.
11.5 The Contractor shall carry out all the work strictly in accordance with drawings, details and
instructions of concerned BREB approved Authority.
12. Works to be arranged for Contractor
12.1 The following items shall be provided to the Elevator Contractor under instructions of the
Project Manger to suit the requirements of the Contractor.
a) Hoistways, machine rooms and pits of specified dimensions (within normal building
tolerances).
b) Floor, wall and ceiling finishes in Hoistways, pits and machine rooms; including painting
(except painting of equipment and materials supplied by lift Contractor) and waterproofing, as
well as doors and windows in machine room. Cables from main L.T. Panel Board through the
Hoistwaysterminating in and including individual Main Switches of required rating for three
phase and single-phase supply in Machine Rooms including necessary earthing.
38
39
c) Free three phase power supply for group testing and commissioning of lifts after erection is
completed.
d) Lighting installation within machine rooms as required by the lift Contractor including single-
phase main switch with ELCB at machine room.
e) The equipment shall be suitable to operate on 230/415 Volts 3 phase, 4 wires, 50 Hz. A.C.
supply with a variation of +10% in Volts and +5% in frequency respectively. The supply for
illumination and single-phase equipment shall be 230 Volts A.C.
f) Lighting installation within Hoistwaysand pits as required by the lift Contractor including 1-
phase main switch at machine room.
g) Ventilation system of machine rooms with minimum 18" heavy duty exhaust fan in each
machine room as per the requirement of applicable codes and standards.
h) Providing of hoisting beam in the machine room for hoisting of equipment during erection
and to facilitate maintenance in future.
13. Elevators Contractor’s Responsibilities: Ancillary Works
a) All cabling, wiring and earthing from three phase main DB in machine room to Lift
Contractor‟s equipment.
b) All steel items i.e. machine beam/bases, pedestals/ bearing plate in the machine room,
separators wherever required and buffer support channels, vertical iron ladder in lift and
structural steel supports and brackets for the installation in etc., to suit the sizes of the
hoistways.
c) Sill tracks including sill supports, supporting protection at all landings.
d) Screen guards, facia plates and other protection for installation.
e) To carry out minor civil work, such as chipping & making openings in slabs, grouting of
foundation bolts in shaft, pit and machine room, modification and making rail bracket, hall
buttons indicators and laying of sills in positions. Or any other work required for smooth
operation/ commissioning of lifts. All chiselling and cutting of pockets and making good.
(All cutting shall be as approved by Consultant/BREB).
f) Ensuring safety against accidents including barricading all openings and caution signs.
g) Scaffolding and other Tools & Tackles required for installation in the Hoistwayrequired for
erection of lifts.
h) All other items necessary for satisfactory execution & completion of works, whether specified
or not.
i) Power shall be provided at incoming of main DB for lifts. Main DB in the machine room
shall be provided by the lift contractor. From main DB to lifts, cables shall be in the scope of
lift contractor. However, lighting for machine room shall be done by others.
j) Trap doors, floor gratings, steps / ladders and openings in machine rooms and ladders for pits
as required by the lifts Contractor. Contractor shall furnish the details of these items in the
layout drawing for lifts to be submitted after award of the job.
k) Temporary power supply connection(s) for erection work shall be arranged by the lift
Contractor.
l) Electrical: Electrical service to main disconnect in elevator machine room; electrical power
for elevator installation and testing; electrical-disconnecting device to elevator equipment
prior to activation of sprinkler system; electrical service for machine room; machine room and
pit receptacles with ground - fault current protection; lighting in machine room and pit; wiring
for telephone service to machine room.
m) Fire Alarm System: Fire and smoke detectors and interconnecting devices; fire alarm signal
lines to contacts in the machine room. System not to be self-resetting. System may or may not
be tied to the building fire life safety system. Subject to local fire code.
n) Telephone System: Telephone System required for the emergency communications
equipment single dial tone outside line will be required per elevator and will be run to the
corresponding controller.
39
40
14. Sound Reduction
14.1 The Contractor shall provide necessary sound reduction materials, such as rubber pads/ anti
vibration pads of proper density to effectively isolate the machine from the machine beams
and/or flooring.
14.2 Noise level inside cars and in the machine-room shall be maintained at minimum levels as laid
down in the relevant codes and in any case not more than specified under performance
parameters.
15. Traction Machine:
15.1 The machine shall be worm geared traction type with motor (steel worm, bronze gears, steel
sheave shaft & Ferro molybdenum sheave), electro-mechanical type of brake and driving
sheave mounted in proper alignment on a single heavy cast iron base or steel bedplate.
15.2 The worm shaft shall be fitted with roller bearings to take end thrust. The sheave shaft shall
also be fitted with roller bearings to ensure proper alignment. All shafts shall be provided with
well-designed keys.
15.3 Rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
15.4 The drive sheave shall be designed with machined V-grooves to ensure adequate traction with
minimum wear on rope. All sheaves including deflector sheaves, where used, shall conform to
Applicable International codes and standards.
15.5 Adequate and dust – proof lubrication shall be provided for all bearings and worm gears.
15.6 The brake shall be suitably curved and provided with fire proof friction lining. The operation
of brake shall be smooth, gradual and with minimum noise. The brake shall be designed to be
of adequate size and strength to stop and hold the car at rest with rated load. The brake shall be
capable of operation automatically by various safety devices, current failure and by the normal
stopping of the car. The brake shall be released electrically. It shall also be possible to release
the brake manually so as to move the lift car in short stops. Suitable Brake release tools (total 3
nos.) shall be supplied and stored in the machine rooms.
15.7 For manual operation of lifts, up & down direction of the movement of the car shall be clearly
marked on the motor or traction machine. A warning plate in bold signal red colour to switch
off the mains supply before releasing the brake and operating the wheel shall be prominently
displayed.
16. Hoist Motor
16.1 The motor shall be suitable for 415 Volts +10% to –20%, 50 Hz. + 5%, 3 Phase A.C. Supply.
The motor must be designed for arduous lift duty, rapid reversals and constantly repeated starts
& stops as defined in the relevant codes of practice. All windings must be heavily insulated,
adequately impregnated for tropical climate and mechanically strengthened and must be
specifically designed to have a high starting torque and low starting current characteristics
within the limits acceptable to electricity supply company requirements and I.E. Rules. The
motor shall be designed in such a way as to withstand occasional overloading above its rated
capacity and shall have overload protection. The motor shall have good speed regulation under
different conditions of load and shall be designed to give a noiseless and vibration-free
operation. Insulation shall be class F.
40
41
17. Motor Control and Drive
17.1 The lift motor shall be controlled by a variable voltage variable frequency (V.V.V.F.) micro-
processor control system which shall control and monitor every aspect of lift operation at all
stages of the car motion cycle on real time basis.
17.2 The A.C, V.V.V.F. drive system shall control A.C. voltage and frequency concurrently with the
hoist motor to regulate the lift‟s actual performance to match closely the ideal speed pattern,
obtain maximum efficiency of operation and provide a very smooth ride.
17.3 Frequency shall range fully between zero and rated value.
17.4 The Controller shall be provided with a self-diagnostic program to keep downtime to a
minimum possible.
17.5 The controller shall intelligently adjust door times in response to car calls, hall calls and “Door
Open” button operation.
17.6 An Inspector‟s changeover test switch and set of test buttons shall be provided in the controller.
Operation of the Inspector‟s changeover switch shall make both the car and landing buttons
inoperative and permit the lift to be operated in either direction from machine room for test
purposes by pressing corresponding test buttons in the controller. It shall not, however,
interfere with the emergency stop switches inside the car or on the top of the car.
18. Guides and Fastenings
a) Guide-rails for car and counterweight shall consist of machined mild steel Tee sections,
erected plumb, and securely fastened to the lift well framing by heavy steel brackets, suitably
spaced, to limit deflection of guide rails to 3 mm under normal working conditions.
b) The guide-rails shall be of suitable section with ends tongued and grooved, forming matched
joint and shall be connected with steel fish plates.
c) Guide-rails shall cover the full height of the Hoistwayand pit, such that It shall be not be
possible for any of the car or counter weights shoes to run off the guides.
d) Guides shall be designed to withstand the action of safety gear when stopping a counter
weight or fully loaded car.
e) The max. deviation from true plumb and alignment of guide rails shall be 2 mm.
f) All support framing shall be rigid and shall be designed to restrict displacement of the point
of support of brackets to 3 mm under normal working conditions.
g) The whole guide rail installation, including expansion joints, shall be designed for a smooth
ride.
h) The guide-rails shall be protected during storage and installation with a rust inhibiting coating
which shall be cleaned off on completion of installation.
i) Guide-shoes shall be adjustable type & mounted so as to provide continuous contact with
guide rails under all conditions.
j) Guide shoes shall be provided at top and bottom of each side of car and counterweight and
shall be designed for quiet operation.
k) Additional guide shoes shall be provided on each side of buffer frame in case of oil buffers.
l) Each lift shall be equipped with roller guides for up and down travel. There shall not be any
metal-to-metal contact between Car and rail. Roller shall be mounted on ball bearings to
provide quiet operation and excellent ride quality. (It is not required in case the design varies
however the ride quality shall not be compromised for any other design).
41
42
19. Safety
19.1 In addition to other specifications, the lift shall be provided with safety devices as follows:
a) Against overload.
b) Safety gear on car so that in the event of rope breaking or loosening, the car will be brought to
rest immediately by means of grips on the guides.
c) The over speeding car shall be automatically brought to a gradual stop on guide rails and
power supply to the hoist motor shall be switched off.
d) Overspeed centrifugal governor operating the safety gear in case of over speeding of car in
the down direction.
e) Car gate lock so that in the event of car gate being opened when passengers are in the car, the
lift will be brought to rest.
f) Overtravel limit switches at top and bottom limits of travel to disconnect the power supply
and apply brakes to stop the car within a defined safe distance in case of overtravel in either
direction
g) Ultimate terminal switches to stop the car automatically within top & bottom clearances
independently of normal overtravel limit switches but with buffers operative.
h) Protective guards to counterweights in pit, rope sheaves and wherever required.
i) Toe guard apron to the car platform.
20. CAR
20.1 Cabin Size: The internal clear dimensions of the cabin shall fully comply with as specified in
applicable international codes and standards/ specifications for electric Lifts. The car shall be
so mounted on the frame that vibration and noise transmitted to the passengers inside is
minimized.
20.2 Frame and Safety Device: The car frame shall consist of mild steel channel/structural steel top
and bottom securely riveted or bolted and substantially reinforced and braced so as to relieve
the car enclosure of all strains when the safety device comes into action due to overspeed or
when the capacity loaded car is run on the buffer springs at normal speed. The safety device
mounted on the bottom members of the frame operated by a centrifugal speed governor shall be
arranged to bring the car to a gradual stop on the guide rails in the event of excessive
descending speed; and provision shall be made to shut off the power supply to the motor.
20.3 Buffers: Substantial spring buffers (2 Nos.) shall be furnished and installed in the pit under the
car and counterweight. These buffers shall be mounted on RCC Pedestals in the pit. The car
buffer spring must be of correct design to sustain the car with capacity load without damage
should the car terminal limits become inoperative. The car buffers must be located
symmetrically with reference to center of car. The Contractor may alternatively offer oil type
buffers. The plunger shall be mild steel, designed for a very high factor of safety and accurately
machined. A toughened rubber bumper shall be fitted to the plunger top to cushion the impact
of steel buffer plates attached under the car and the counterweight. An oil gauge shall be
provided to check the oil level.
20.4 Counterweight: The lift shall be suitably counter-balanced for smooth and economical
operation. Cast iron weights shall be contained in a structural steel frame properly guided with
suitable guide shoes (minimum 4 Nos). It shall be equal to the total weight of lift plus approx.
50% of the contract load. Substantial expanded metal counter-weight screen guard shall be
furnished and installed at the bottom of hoist way, as required by Lift Inspector.
42
43
20.5 Hoisting and Governor Ropes: Bright steel wire ropes with fiber cores suitable for Lift duty
as per BIS Code shall be used for hoisting ropes. Not less than 3 independent suspension ropes
shall be provided and designed to share load equally by means of adjustable shackle rods with
equalizer springs at each end of hoisting ropes. Each rope shall have adequate section to
provide a minimum factor of safety of 4 based on the max. force on the rope. Governor ropes
shall be similar to hoisting ropes. Their ends shall be securely attached to the car and to the
safety gear. The governor ropes shall be tensioned by a weight loaded device in the pit. The
contractor shall submit the technical details and source of supply of ropes as well as a
certificate of performance of ropes from an approved test laboratory or Authority.
Compensation for travel shall be provided for all lifts having a travel of more than 30m.
20.6 Enclosure: The car enclosure shall be as specified in technical data sheet. The cabin floor,
roof and walls shall be free of distortion and undue deflection.
20.7 Brakes: D.C. brakes will be spring-applied and electrically released. They shall be designed to
provide smooth stops under variable loads.
20.8 Doors: Provision shall be made for vertical and horizontal fine adjustment of doors as per the
specifications given in technical data sheet.
20.9 Door Operators: The door operators shall be VVVF inverter controlled heavy duty A. C.
motor, allowing variable opening and closing speeds, and full synchronization of car and
landing doors.
20.10 Travelling Cables: The traveling cables shall be multi-core with high conductivity stranded
conductors specifically designed for lift duty. The cables shall be provided with retaining
straps and individual cable clamps.
20.11 Emergency Lighting: A self-contained, non-maintained emergency light with a trickle boost
charger shall be provided.
20.12 Intercom: An Intercom system shall be provided between the car, main landing, machine room
and Fire Console room linked to EPABX located at Administration building
20.13 Manual Cranking Facility: Manual cranking facility shall be provided in the machine room to
facilitate evacuation of passengers in case of power failure. The manual mode shall be in
addition to automatic car failure operation specified elsewhere.
20.14 Emergency Stop Switch: A stop switch in the machine room / top of car shall be provided for
use by maintenance crew to cancel all car and landing calls for a particular lift.
20.15 Maintenance Switch: On operation of the maintenance switch located on top of the car by the
maintenance crew, the car shall travel at slow speed not exceeding 0.85 m / sec by continuous
operation of a button
20.16 Landing Door Interlocks: Electrical interlocks shall be provided to ensure that the car does
not operate unless all doors are closed and unless the car reaches a landing zone.
20.17 Overload Indicator (Only in Passenger elevator): An overload indicator with buzzer shall be
provided in the cabin to indicate to the passengers that the car will not start as it is overloaded.
20.18 Other Features: All features specified in the BIS/NBC/CPWD and in the enclosed technical
specifications shall be provided.
43
44
20.19 Operating Panels, Buttons & Switches: Main and secondary car operating panels, buttons
and switches shall be located on one of the two front wall panels next to the car door and as
specified in the Schedule of lifts & as per approved G.A. drawings. All buttons and switches
shall be clearly legible with fade-proof text and figures, and shall be easily accessible,
(especially for disabled persons in the lift designated for them).
20.20 Lift for Disabled: All the Passengers lifts shall be suitable for use by disabled persons. The
following additional facilities shall be provided in this lift:
i. Full length handrails shall be provided on the rear and side wall panels.
ii. The door closing time shall be set for min. 5 seconds and the door closing speed shall
not exceed 0.25 m/sec.
iii. The “door open” and “door closed” announcements shall be audibly made in the car.
iv. Braile signs / buttons.
21. Electric Wiring
21.1 Necessary insulated wiring to connect all parts of the equipment shall be furnished and
installed. Insulated wiring shall be flame retardant and moisture resistant and shall be run in
G.S. conduits. All cables shall be flame retardant with copper conductors.
21.2 Trailing cables shall be PVC sheathed copper conductor multi-core ribbon type designed for lift
service and shall be flame retardant and moisture resistant. They shall be flexible and shall be
suitably suspended to relieve strains on individual conductors. All copper conductors shall be
of appropriate gauge copper to avoid excessive voltage drop. All wires, cables, conduits, metal
boxes, fittings and earthing shall comply with statutory requirements and IEC/ANSI/BIS
specifications.
21.3 All sheet steel work shall be painted with two coats of synthetic enamel paint of suitable shade
both inside and outside over two coats of zinc primer.
21.4 Apart from lift controller enclosure, 7 distribution boards (3 Main DB + 4 DB) are required as
per BOQ. Cables to incomer of these DB‟s shall be terminated by others, whereas outgoing
cables for lift shall be in the scope of lift contractor. Contractor shall furnish the sizes of cables
along with KW rating of motors.
21.5 The controller unit comprising of the MCCB, 25KA, adjustable overload and phase reversal
and phase failure protection, all the circuit elements, transformer, rectifier for D.C. control
supply, inverter power pack, terminal blocks etc. shall be enclosed in an insect vermin proof,
sheet steel floor or wall mounted cabinet with hinged doors at front or at both front and rear.
Proper warning boards and danger plates shall be provided on both sides of the controller
casing. Sheet steel used for controller cabinet shall not be less than 14 gauge and shall be
properly braced, where necessary. Suitable gland plate shall be provided for cable entry. The
battery for the charger unit shall be suitably placed in the machine room. Degree of protection
of Enclosure shall be IP54. Enclosure shall have provision of earthing studs. All sheet steel
work shall be painted with two coats of synthetic enamel paint of suitable shade both inside and
outside over two coats of zinc primer. Apart from lift controller enclosure, seven (7)
distribution boards (3 Main DB + 4 DB) are required as per BOQ. Cables to incomer of these
DB‟s shall be terminated by others, whereas outgoing cables for lift shall be in the scope of lift
contractor. Contractor shall furnish the sizes of cables along with KW rating of motors.
44
45
22. Painting
22.1 All exposed metal work furnished in these specifications, except as otherwise specified, shall
be given one shop coat of anti-corrosive primer after approved surface treatment of metal
surfaces and two coats of approved enamel paint of approved shade. After installation of Lifts,
a final Touch-up Coat of paint shall be applied.
23. Features Required for Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (VVVF) Elevators
23.1 Group / Independent / Attendant Operation:

a) It shall be possible to group specified cars in a group, wherever required with dynamic
disposition of cars as required by the traffic pattern. A smart car dispatching system with
ring communication shall be provided for optimum passenger comfort and lift
performance under all traffic conditions. Any defective car shall be automatically
eliminated from the group.
b) Each car shall be provided with a keyswitch for independent operation housed in a service
cabinet. In this mode, the lift shall respond only to car calls. Hall calls will not be
registered.
c) It should be possible for an attendant to operate any car.
23.2 Fireman’s Switch: A fireman‟s toggle switch shall be provided in a break glass for the
specified lift at ground floor to enable firemen to bring the lift non-stop to ground floor from
any location and to cancel hall calls until the car is operated on attendant control.
23.3 Emergency Power Operation: In case of power failure, standby power equipment shall enable
lifts to reach a pre-determined floor, in a pre-determined sequence, and then permit operation of
one or more lifts on emergency power. A trickling battery shall be provided to supply power to
light fixtures, fan, alarm and intercom.
23.4 Profile Generator: A profile generator or similar device shall be provided to use the car at an
optimum speed level and to improve levelling accuracy.
23.5 Home Landing Facility: A car shall return to a pre-determined landing after the last call is
answered.
23.6 Door Safety: Multi-beam infrared / ultrasonic electronics curtains shall be provided to scan the
doorway and reverse the door closing in case of any obstruction.
23.7 Predictive Car Selection: Once a hall call is registered, a dynamic car algorithm shall transfer
the call to an optimally selected car to provide the maximum traffic efficiency.
23.8 Double Door Operation: If both up and down calls are registered at a hall which is the last
registering hall in the direction of the car, the lift shall travel to that hall and open / close the
doors. After this, the car shall reverse its travel and shall open / close the doors again unless no
car calls are registered at that floor.
23.9 Nudging Door Operation: When the doors remain open for more than a predetermined period,
a buzzer shall sound and the door shall close automatically. The door sensing device shall be
rendered inoperative but the Door Open button and the safety shoe shall remain operative.
45
46
23.10 Selective Floor Service: Programming for selective floors services shall be software driven.
23.11 Manual Cranking & Slow speed Travel: A manual cranking facility shall be provided. Slow
speed operation shall be possible from machine room and car top.
23.12 Auto Fan Off: In case no calls are registered for a pre-set time, the cabin fan shall be
automatically switched off.
23.13 Automatic Rescue Device: In case of mains power failure and Lift control system failure, the
Lift‟s own rechargeable and maintenance free battery power shall move the car to the nearest
floor and the door shall open automatically.
23.14 Double Door Operation: If both up and down calls are registered at a hall, which is the last
registering hall in the direction of the car, the lift shall travel to that hall and open / close the
doors. After this, the car shall reverse its travel and shall open / close the doors again unless no
car calls are registered at that floor.
24. Works Tests
24.1 Notice shall be given to the concerned approving BREB authority/authorized representatives of
the timeline; with testing protocol/procedures of the test, before they are carried out and shall
be given all facilities for observing the tests at works. The following tests shall be carried out at
works:
a) High voltage (HV) works tests of equipment, which is not already tested in accordance
with appropriate applicable codes and standards.
b) Buffer test.
25. Installation, Testing and Commissioning
25.1 The supplier shall be responsible for installation at BREB approved site, testing, programming,
calibration and commissioning of the lifts/elevators including operating software.
25.2 The following tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the BREB/Consultant.
a. Insulation resistance and earth test for all electrical apparatus.

b. Continuous operation of the lift under full load conditions and simulated starts and stops
(150 Nos. per hour each) for one-hourtime at the end of which,the service temperature of
the motor and the operating coils shall be tested. This shall be as per applicable
specifications and standards/BIS standards.
c. The car shall be loaded until the weight on the rope system is twice the combined weight
of the car and the specified load. The load must be carried on for about 30 minutes,
without any sign of weakness, temporary set or permanent set or permanent elongation of
the suspension rope strands.
25.3 The following items shall be tested:
a) Levelling accuracy at each landing in conditions of fully loaded and empty car.
b) No-load current and voltage readings both on „Up‟ and „Down‟ Circuits.
c) Full load current and voltage readings both on „Up‟ and „Down‟ Circuits.
d) One and quarter load current and voltage readings both on „Up and „Down‟ Circuits.
e) Stalling current and voltage and time taken to operate overload.
f) Overload protection.
g) Gate sequence relays, if provided and installed.
46
47
h) Car and landing door interlocks.

i) Collective control and priority sequences, if installed.
j) Safety gear mechanism for car and counterweight with fully loaded car and also with only 68
kg load.
k) Speeds on Up and Down travel with full load, half load and empty car.
l) Door contacts.
m) Final terminal stopping device.
n) Normal terminal stopping device.
o) Car and counterweight buffers with contract load and contract speed.
p) Operation of controllers.
q) Manual operation of lift at mid-way travel.
r) Emergency operation.
25.4 Tests on completion shall also be performed to the satisfaction of Inspector of Lifts and a
certificate will be obtained from the Lift Inspector by the contractor to the Project Manager and
BREB.
25.5 Upon successful testing and commissioning, the Elevators/Lifts and allied equipment shall be
handed over to the BREB nominated representatives in fully functional form. The supplier shall
provide in advance the physical layout plan and civil works/foundation drawings for
installation to BREB for approval.
26. Approvals
26.1 All statutory approvals from commencement to commissioning of lifts shall be obtained by the
Contractor from the Inspector of Lifts and other Authorities. However, the client will provide
all necessary assistance for providing documents, drawings and certificates pertaining to other
contractors, if required.
26.2 The contractor shall pay necessary fees in connection with the approvals of installation of
Elevators/Lifts.
27. Operating Manual
27.1 The Elevators shall be provided with detailed operating manual and user‟s guide containing
technical specifications, safety warnings, important data and operating procedure in English
language.
28.1 The supplier shall conduct training sessions to REB staff on the use of the Elevators/Lifts. User
shall be given training on safe operation of the machines, operation and maintenance and use of
controls, emergency, safety etc. including other functions and features.
29. Tests
conformance tests have been performed successfully on the Elevator/Lift equipment, controls,
machines and mechanical and rope system.
47
48
29.2 Acceptance Tests: Acceptance tests will be conducted at the site after completion. If unit fails
the acceptance tests (proposed by vendor and approved by BREB), the offered Lifts shall be
rejected.
30. Name Plate
a) Manufacturer‟s name
b) Model, year of manufacture and identifying number
c) Maximum loading/capacity
d) Factor of safety
e) Accuracy parameters
f) Speed and acceleration limits
g) Manufacturer logo
h) Weight and size
i) Power, voltage and frequency
j) All other important data as necessary
site in Bangladesh.
31.2 The material shall be sealed in plastic bags or other suitable moisture proof materials and
packed in sturdy arrangement in completely assembled condition. Each crate shall contain test
equipment and installation instructions.

g) Bar code
32. Warranty
32.1 The manufacturer/vendor shall warrant test equipment supplied under this specification to be
free from defects in design, materials, or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the
date of commissioning, unless otherwise specified in tender documents. During the period of
such warranty, defective units shall be replaced at manufacturer /vendor cost.
48
49
33. Maintenance During Defects Liability Period
33.1 Comprehensive maintenance during "Defects Liability Period" inclusive of periodic servicing,
prompt attention to client (CDRI) complaint, prompt rectification of all malfunctions and
equipment failures, replacement of defective equipment / parts, replacement of light fittings,
lubrication including lubricants, maintaining correct alignment and levelling of cars and
ensuring smooth running, starts and stops etc. all complete to client's satisfaction/BREB
approved Authority shall be done.
34. Annual Maintenance (AMC) For Three Years After One Year of Defects Liability Period
34.1 Comprehensive maintenance during (AMC) for three(3) years (after one (1) year of defect
liability period) inclusive of periodic servicing, prompt attention to client (BREB) complaint,
prompt rectification of all malfunctions and equipment failures, replacement of defective
equipment / parts, replacement of light fittings, lubrication including lubricants, maintaining
correct alignment and levelling of cars and ensuring smooth running, starts and stops etc. all
complete to BREB‟s satisfaction shall be done.
35.1 The supplier/manufacturer shall provide hard and soft copies of the technical data, catalogues
and information with the bid submittal for both type of Elevators/Lifts (Passenger and Goods),
as follows:
a) Submit manufacturer's product data for each system proposed for use including signal
and operating fixtures, operating panels and indicators, cab/car design, dimensions and
layout, electrical characteristics and connection requirements, expected heat
dissipation of elevator equipment in BTU.
b) Shop drawings, including driving machines, controllers and other equipment, showing
the dimensions, physical features, attachment and accessories.
c) Operation and maintenance manual and applicable standards/codes.
d) Catalogues with offered items highlighted.
e) List of imported components and their sources, if any.
f) Confirmation that submitted offer meets the technical specifications & scope of work
and there are no deviations and exclusions. Statement of acceptance and compliance
with these specifications or a list and explanations for any deviations from or
exceptions to these specifications.
g) The contractor shall specify in his offer the full capability of his system.
h) Single line diagrams/ schematic diagrams of microprocessor-based logic control panel,
lifts & equipment etc.
i) Layout of Hoistway, Lift machine rooms, showing foundation details in the pit,
machine rooms, electric control panels, rope systems, Lift & equipment etc.
j) Earthing layout.
k) Complete BOQs of elevators/lifts.
l) Inspection manual for equipment & accessories covered in the scope of supply.
m) Technical literature of operation, control and maintenance etc.
n) Schedule of scope of maintenance service during defect liability period and AMC.
o) Certified calibration test reports.
p) Clause by clause conformance to this specification.
49
50
q) Packaging details.
r) Terms of manufacturer‟s warranty.
s) Manufacturer‟s certificate attesting to 10 years of experience in manufacturing.
t) Statement of country of origin.
u) Copy of ISO:9001 Certification for the manufacturing plant.
v) Copies of test certificates evidencing completion of qualification tests.
w) List of clients in last five years with their respective addresses, which were supplied
Electric Elevators/Lifts (Passenger and Goods).
x) Confirmation in writing that the equipment and materials will be supported technically
and in parts availability for a minimum of 10 years from the date installed.  
The technical parameters furnished by the tenderer would be examined in detail during
design submission stage. All improvements considered necessary to meet the tender
Technical specifications shall have to be incorporated without any additional cost to
client/BREB with objective of providing high performance and safety Lifts.
35.2 The successful Contractor, after award of the contract, shall furnish following technical
particulars of the equipment/devices and obtain the approval from the concerned BREB
approved authority/authorized representatives.
a) Single line diagram (SLD)/ schematic diagram of electronic control panel, Elevators/Lifts (for
the passenger and Goods) &necessary allied equipment etc.
b) Layouts of Hoistway, Lifts machine rooms, showing foundation details in the pits, machine
rooms, electric control panels, Lift & equipment etc.
c) Earthing layouts and Electrical wiring layout and SLD.
d) Inspection manual for equipment & accessories covered in the scope of supply (8 soft copies).
e) Technical literature of operation, control and maintenance etc. (8 soft copies).
f) Schedule of scope of maintenance service during defect liability period and AMC.
50
51
Specification# 36
Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System for video monitoring
1. Scope
installation, testing, commissioning, training and handing over on turn key basis (TKB) of
CCTV System complete in all respects for security-monitoring of a three (3) story building of
Bangladesh Rural Electrification Board (BREB) material Acceptance Testing Laboratory at
Palli Biddyut Area, Savar Dhaka, Bangladesh with fixed dome cameras, outdoor fixed mount
cameras, vigilance monitors and Digital Video Recorder (DVR).
2.1 CCTV System shall conform to the latest editions of the standards applicable to their design,
 EN 50132-1:2011 Alarm systems - CCTV surveillance systems for use in security

applications - Part 1: System requirements
applications - Part 5: Video transmission
applications - Part 7: Application guidelines
2.2 The Bidder shall submit copy of certification of all equipment i.e. UL / CE / FCC and the
equipment and installation covered by these specifications shall conform to codes of practice in
force and highest standards of safety, workmanship and materials.
3.1 The CCTV System shall be manufactured at a plant that has fabricated units of similar design
and characteristics for a period not less than ten years and that holds ISO: 9001 Certification for
the quality management.
4.1 The CCTV system shall be suitable for the laboratory building under the local service
51
52

5.1 The CCTV System shall meet or exceed the technical and performance requirements of this
specification in all respects.
5.2 The system shall be so set that it provides minimum 30 days recording for the cameras installed
in the normal branches.
5.3 Vendor shall specify parameters for the offered CCTV System (Cameras, DVR, Monitors,
Cables etc.) and associated equipment in the technical submittal.
5.5 The CCTV System shall have the following technical parameters:
a) Effective Pixels PAL: 752(H) x582 (V) (Minimum) Sync or better

b) System: Internal
c) Resolution: 480 TV Line minimum or better
d) Minimum Illumination: 0.002 Lux / F2.0 /50IRE
e) S/N Ratio: (AGC Off) more than 48 Db
f) Gamma correction: 0.45
g) Gain control: Auto
h) White balance: Auto (2500°K to 9500°K)
i) Exposure Auto E. Shutter: 1/60(1/50) -1/100000 Sec
j) Video output: 1.0 Vp-p Composite: (75ohm Load)
k) Supply Voltage: DC12v +/- 10%
l) Power consumption:100mA
m) Operation temperature: -10°C to + 50°C
n) Lens type: 3.6 mm (Focal Length)
52
53
6. 1/3" (inch) Color CCD CS Mount Infrared (IR) Cameras
6.1 The cameras shall be of 1/3" format CCD (Charged Coupled Device) sensor type Extra View
infrared, compact of rugged design and shall employ solid state circuitry. The camera shall
deliver clear, high resolution color picture without geometric distortion. Approximate 403920
pixels, 480 lines horizontal resolution, 0.05 lux at F1.2. Built in infrared (IR), the CCD color
image automatically to B/W image in the dark.
7. Color CCD Fixed Dome / CS Mounted Camera
7.1 The Color Fixed Dome/CS Mounted Camera shall have the technical parameters:
a) Pick up Element: 1/3-inch Color CCD image Sensor (interline)

b) Power supply: 12V DC/24VAC Auto detectable
c) Scanning System: 2:1 interlace
d) Resolution: 540 TV lines
e) Sensitivity: 0.03 lux
f) S/N Ratio: less than 50db
g) Electronic shutter: Auto: 1/50 (60) to 1/1, 00,000sec
h) Output: 1Vp-p
i) Composite video output: 75 Ohm
j) Lens mount: CS Mount
k) Lens Type: 1/3"3.5-8mm Auto Iris and IR corrected
l) Day/Night: Digital
m) Auto White Balance: Auto
n) Back Light Compensation: Dedicated Dip Switch
o) Automatic Gain Control: Dedicated Dip Switch
p) Flicker less Mode: Dedicated Dip Switch
q) IP rating for Housing: IP 67
r) Operating Temperature: - 10 to 50° C and 30 – 90% Relative Humidity
8. Channel Standalone Digital Video Recorder
8.1 The Camera shall comply with the following functional parameters:
 The DVR shall be a digital image recording device with the functionality of 8 cameras
video inputs.
 The digital video recorder shall be fully multitasking – capable of simultaneously recording
whilst playing back.
 The digital video recorder shall incorporate 3 internal hard disk drives-HDD of 750 GB
capacity each.
 The digital video recorder shall have an integral CD/DVD-Writer for archiving purposes.
 The digital video recorder should have mouse or keyboard control options through USB
ports.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall operate on an embedded Linux Operating System.
 The digital video recorder shall auto-detect connected cameras and be configured to record
at the touch of a button. Pan-tilt-zoom (PTZ) cameras must be configured manually.
 The digital video recorder shall have composite BNC inputs for up to 8 color or
monochrome cameras.
 The digital video recorder shall have loop-through connectors with automatic software-
controlled termination to connect to other equipment.
 The digital video recorder shall have software-controlled contrast and brightness
adjustment settings for each camera.
53
54
 The digital video recorder shall have Automatic and Static Gain Control settings for each
camera.
 The firmware of the digital video recorder shall be upgradeable remotely across a computer
network and through USB port.
 Operation of the digital video recorder shall be from the front panel or via an infrared
remote control.
 The digital video recorder shall have an easy to follow, logical menu system. The digital
video recorder shall have the option to change the menus to different languages.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall feature dual monitor outputs: a primary or main monitor
output and a secondary or spot monitor output. The primary monitor output screen must
have connections for BNC, or SVHS monitors, any of which can be used simultaneously.
 The main monitor shall be able to provide any camera full screen, sequencing full screen,
and 4, 6, 9, 16 ways multi-screen displays whilst full frame recording is taking place.
 The main monitor shall display a true live picture without digitization, on full screen or any
of the multi-screens, up to and including 16-way camera displays. An on-screen colored
indicator shall show whether all individual cameras are recording.
 The secondary monitor shall display live, analogue full screen video from either a selected
camera, sequencing cameras and / or be used to display alarm / motion events.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall provide a digital freeze frame and x2 digital zoom in full
screen live and playback modes, including the ability to move around a zoomed image.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall be capable of displaying user definable cameras in any of
the multi-screen modes available. When sequencing, the Digital Video Recorder shall have
the option to display specified multi-screen display as per the operator‟s requirements so
that specific cameras can be programmed to remain on view even though other cameras
around it may be sequencing.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have the option to remove cameras from normal viewing
on the monitor, so that they are recorded but not viewed.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall record the camera video signals as a full screen image
from each of the cameras.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to record a single camera at up to 25 frames per
second (PAL).
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have a maximum record rate of up to 200 frames per
second (PAL).
 The Digital Video Recorder incorporates quality settings and record rates per camera,
which allows the user to individually program each camera‟s record priority. An adjustable
global resolution of up to 720 x 576 (PAL) (maximum) shall be available.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have the ability to alert the operator via an on-board
buzzer should there be an error while writing images to hard disk.
 Connected cameras shall be able to be removed from the recording sequence without
affecting the ability to display that camera on the main or spot monitor.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall provide a user-programmable character title for each
camera and shall record time, date and title with each video image.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall be capable of playing back one camera full screen.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have the ability to go to a particular time and date.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to playback, pause, frame advance / rewind and
multi speed fast forward or rewind either using front panel buttons, IR remote control or
mouse or keyboard.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have a History log feature displaying system events. This
shall include power failures and recovery, menu access, network access (including user
name), motion detection, sensor activation and video loss.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have a pre-set menu option, which will determine
whether the internal HDD shall overwrite or stop recording once full. The current status of
the HDD space remaining shall be displayed on a status bar on the main monitor.
54
55
 The Digital Video Recorder shall apply a digital signature to recordings contained on the
internal hard disks, without affecting performance.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to copy a specified image sequence to its internal
CD Writer. The digital multiplexer must continue to record, when writing to the CD-RW.
The backup CD or flash memory shall auto-run on a PC and will not require the user to
install any additional software to play back the video images contained on the CD. The
backup CD will also be able to be played back on the digital multiplexer itself via the
internal CD-RW and the main monitor.
 The digital multiplexer will allow the operator to preview the images selected for archiving
before starting the archive process to CD.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to provide a relay trigger on video loss, motion
detection and sensor activation.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have the ability to sound a buzzer on alarm, motion
detection, video loss, disk full or writing to HDD error.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to switch to a full screen image on both the main
and / or spot monitors when an alarm / motion event happens, in addition to alerting a
network operator.
 The operator shall be able to set the polarity of each individual alarm contact to either
normally open or normally closed.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall provide a history log for all the alarms/activity on the
internal hard disk with time, date and camera name and/or number. The history log shall
have a filter to be able to show the operator alarm, motion, video or other events only, as
required.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have 16 internal programmable alarm inputs.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have a user definable schedule to allow multiple
schedules to be set for each individual hour of the day for each camera. This shall include
the ability to select different hours of the day for normal recording, motion recording,
sensor recording, motion & sensor recording, and off.
 Recording schedules shall be able to be copied and pasted to other individual cameras or
copied and pasted to all cameras to assist the operator with the configuration of the unit.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall feature individually programmable activity detection on
all video channels, with an on screen 16 x 12 set up grid, and 5 sensitivity level selectable
on all channels.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have 2 different layers of Password for better authenticity
and flexible level of control.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have both manual and automatic lock functions that will
not affect the recording operation of the unit. This shall either be done manually or by
using a pre-set menu option to automatically lock the unit after 30 seconds of no buttons
being pressed on either the front panel or IR remote control. This will prevent unauthorized
use and shall require an operator to input a password to unlock the unit.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall be able to control telemetry cameras and should support
multiple telemetry protocols.
 Cameras with telemetry shall be controllable using the Enterprise Viewing Software across
an Ethernet network.
 The Digital Video Recorder shall have the ability to connect to LAN / ETHERNET
 Each remote unit will have varying levels of password protection for remote access.
 Users logging on via the network will have their user names logged locally in the digital
video recorder history log with their log on / off dates and times.
 The operator will have the option to be alerted via on-screen symbols and audible alarm for
video loss, motion and sensor events as they happen.
 Optimum bandwidth settings shall be available for Ethernet network transmissions.
 License free Enterprise Viewing Software for Windows® shall be included with each unit.
55
56
8.2 The DVR shall comply with the following parameters:
Display Speed (NTSC/PAL) 120 / 100 fps
Recording Speed Max. CIF (352x240) 120/ 100 fps
Max. 2CIF (704x240) 60 / 50 fps

Video In Signal Level 1.0Vpp Composite (+/-10%) / 75Ohm
Balanced
Channel 8 Channel (BNC)
Main Display 1 VGA(1024x768 at 50Hz)
Loop-Out 8 Channel (BNC)-Loop Out / 1Ch(BNC)
Video Out Out / 1 S-Video
Spot out 2 Channel Digital(BNC)
Audio Input / output 4 Line in (RCA) / 1 Line out (RCA),
Codec: G.711(64Kbps)
Alarm DI / DO 8 input / 8 digital out
(5Vpp)
Panic Alarm Input Yes
Control Device Keypad/PTZ keyboard Controller
Remote Controller
USB mouse controller

USB Keyboard
Screen Display Split 1, 4, 6, 8, 9

Interface Graphic User Interface
Video Format NTSC / PAL Auto detection
Codec Modified MPEG-4

Image Quality Highest/ High/ Standard/ Low
Recording type Continuous/ Motion/ Event /Panic
Multi-Language Support English compulsory
System Reliability Functions Water Mark

Watch Dog
Shut Down Detection
Auto Recovery
Factory Default
Firmware Update by USB or Network
56
57
Storage Interface type PATA, SATA (option)
Hard Disk Capacity 4 X HDD, No Limit on HDD size
Recording HDD mode Write once / Overwriting
Back Up File Format AVI, JPG, BMP

File Export USB Flash, Internal CD/DVD + RW
burner
Playback Search Function Time/Date, Event (Alarm/Motion), Event
motion (Smart search)
Remote Access TCP/IP, View, Search, Recording and

Control (Client Software or browser)
Power Source / Consumption 120 to 240 Vac/ 60-watt Max.
Connectors USB port USB port x 4 (Ver 2.0, Front:2, Rear:2)
RS-232 1-D type female connector (for PTZ,

GPS)
RS-485 2 pins (for Keyboard, PTZ, GPS or POS
connection)
9. Video Cable
9.1 Video Cable RG-59 of the following minimum specifications shall be used for connecting
cameras installed at various locations to the DVR:
a) Centre conductor size: Solid Bare Copper 63mm

b) Di-Electric material: Polyethylene (PE), 7.1mm diameter white color
c) DC resistance inner conductor: 8.5 Ohms/Km:
d) Capacitive impedance: 53 +/- 3 Ohms
e) Di-electric strength: 10 kV AC
f) Insulation resistance: 50 M Ohm/km
g) Nominal impedance: 75 Ohms
h) Min Bending radius: 55mm
57
58
10. LED/ LCD Color Monitor
10.1 The Color display shall be suitable with the standards of the selected cameras. It shall be solid
state and modular in design. It shall provide a bright, clear and well-defined picture display on
the screen.
10.2 All controls for brightness, contrast etc. shall be provided on the front panel for readily
adjusting the levels of the video signal. The rear panel shall be provided with input and output
connectors for coupling the video output to other Monitors.
10.3 The video monitor installed shall be of 17" size. The Monitor shall comply with the following
parameters:
a) Video: PAL / NTSC color composite 1.0Vp-p

b) LED/LCD: 17 diagonal, 0.66 mm Stripe pitch
c) Resolution: 1280 / 1024 pixels
Contrast Ration: 500: 1
d) Viewing angle: 140 degrees horizontal,130 degree vertical
e) Power Input: 90 – 260 VA.C, 50Hz
Consumption: 40 Watts
11. Power Cable
11.1 Power cables complying IEC 60502-2, used for extending power supply to various cameras and
other devices shall have the following minimum specifications:
a) No. of Cores: 04 (four)

b) Conductor size: 1.5 Sq. mm, 7/0.68 multi-strand with standard annealed electrolytic
copper conductor
c) Primary Insulation: PVC Insulated
d) Armouring: Galvanized Steel Wire
12. PVC Conduit
12.1 PVC Conduit of medium grade with 20 mm diameter will be used for laying Video cables /
Power cables.
13. List of Recommended Suppliers for CCTV System
13.1 Recommended suppliers or equivalent are as follows.
a) Cameras: Bosch / Sony / GE / Siemens / Honeywell / Samsung / Panasonic or Equivalent

b) Digital Video Recorder: Bosch / Sony / GE / Honeywell / Bosch / Siemens / Samsung /
Panasonic or equivalent
c) Monitor: LG / SAMSUNG / Sony / NEC / Panasonic or Equivalent
58
59
14. Tests
conformance tests have been performed successfully on the CCTV System and equipment,
controls etc.
the acceptance tests (proposed by vendor and approved by BREB), the offered CCTV System
shall be rejected.
15. Name Plate
c) Accuracy parameters
d) Manufacturer logo
e) Weight and size
f) Power, voltage and frequency
g) All other important data as necessary
site in Bangladesh.

g) Bar code
59
60
17. Warranty
and information with the bid submittal for the offered CCTV system as follows:
a) Submit manufacturer's product data for each system proposed for use with design,
dimensions and layout, electrical characteristics and connection requirements, and
system parameters.
b) Technical literature of operation, control and maintenance etc.
c) Complete BOQs for the offered CCTV system
d) Certified calibration test reports.
e) Packaging details.
f) Terms of manufacturer‟s warranty.
g) Clause by clause conformance to this specification.
h) Manufacturer‟s certificate attesting to 10 years of experience in manufacturing.
i) Statement of country of origin.
j) Copy of ISO:9001 Certification for the manufacturing plant.
k) Copies of test certificates evidencing completion of qualification tests.
l) List of clients in last five (5) years with their respective addresses, which were
supplied CCTV System.
60
61
Specification# 37
Public Address (PA) System
1. Scope
installation, testing, commissioning, training and handing over on turn key basis (TKB) of
Public Address (PA) System complete in all respects for security-monitoring of a three (3)
story building of Bangladesh Rural Electrification Board (BREB) material Acceptance Testing
Laboratory at Palli Biddyut Area, Savar Dhaka, Bangladesh.
2.1 PAS System shall conform to the latest editions of the standards applicable to their design,
 IEC 60268 Sounds system equipment-Part-5

 IEC 60529 Classification of Degrees of Protection provided by Enclosures
(IP Code)
 IEC 60529-2 Power and Control Cables
 IEC 60839-5-2 Alarm System Part 5, Requirements for alarm transmission systems
 IEC 61000 (All Parts)-EMC
 ANSI S3.5 Methods for the calculation pf speech Intelligibility Index
 BS EN 60268 Sounds system equipment, loudspeakers
 BS EN 6840-13 Sound system equipment, listening tests on loudspeakers
 BS 6840-14 Sound system equipment. Guide for circular and elliptical
loudspeakers; outer frame diameters and mounting dimensions.
 BS8473 and A1 Intruder and hold-up alarm systems
2.2 The Bidder shall submit copy of certification of all equipment i.e. ISO, FCC, ITU, NEC, IEEE,
ANSI, NEMA, IEC and the equipment and installation covered by these specifications shall
conform to codes of practice in force and highest standards of safety, workmanship and
materials.
61
62
3.1 The PAS System shall be manufactured at a plant that has fabricated units of similar design and
characteristics for a period not less than ten years and that holds ISO: 9001 Certification for the
quality management.
4.1 The PAS system shall be suitable for the Acceptance Testing Laboratory building under the
local service conditions in Bangladesh, which are as follows:
k) Altitude above mean sea level (MSL): less than 1,000 meters
l) Maximum summer peak ambient temperature: +45°C
m) Minimum outdoor winter temperature: 3°C
n) Average daily temperature: +35°C
o) Maximum yearly average temperature: +30°C
p) Relative Humidity: 50% - 100%
q) Yearly average Humidity: 80%
r) Pollution level: Moderate
s) Storage temperature: -10°C - +70°C
t) Operating temperature: -10°C - +45°C
5.1 The PA System shall meet or exceed the technical and performance requirements of this
specification and other applicable commercial standards and codes in all respects.
Dimensions 19" module height 3U and depth 40 cm (without connectors),

width (without handles) 43 cm, depth 40 cm, height 9 cm/ Or
Vendor to specify in technical data
Weight Vendor to specify in technical data
Cover IP 20
Working temperature range -10 °C to +45 °C with Relative Humidity 50-100% as
Humidity specified in this specification under Service Conditions
Storage temperature –10 °C to +70 °C
Rated power supply voltage 230 V ±10% 50 Hz, max. 8 A (the 300 W version), or 48 V
DC max. 10 A (the 48 V version)
Output power till 100V of 300 W (the 230 V power supply version) or 150 W (the 48 V
distribution power supply version) / or vendor to specify in technical data
The number of output loops 6/ Or as required per site conditions
Connectors LAN (Ethernet) – 2× RJ45

230V intake – EURO plug
62
63
48V intake – two pole connectors

Output lines - 2 two-pin plugs PA256/7,62, cable plugs
PA256/7,62 are included in the source supply
Microphone input, line input and output for analogue
recording – RJ11 plugs
5.2 The offered PA System shall be minimum 2-Channel Page & Party configuration with area-
wise zone stations forming functional groups comprising Field Call Stations and Loudspeakers.
The PA system shall be Paging System shall be IP based. The field call stations shall be IP
addressable, whereas the speakers shall be of analog type without IP addresses.
5.3 The system shall be based on distributed network. The system shall provide coverage to various
locations within the building. The distributed nodes shall be interconnected through OFC based
network.
5.4 The design shall be such as to provide highly intelligible minimum two-channel voice
communication even in areas of high background noise (50 dB to 100 dB).
5.5 The system under this tender shall make use of the Optical Fiber Cable backbone, laid for
connecting PA controllers. In noisy areas shall be used along with acoustic booth. The speakers
and FCS in each zone shall be connected through Star fashion to the respective Ethernet switch.
5.6 Each node location and some other locations equipped with a Field Ethernet Distribution switch
and shall also be equipped with PA Remote Interface equipped switching technology, which
form part of the In-Plant paging and PA remote node. Ethernet switch shall be connected to the
PA Speaker and Call Stations BY Cat6 cable.
5.7 Required functions for individual stations shall be programmable and configurable through pre-
loaded software that permits local changes to the configuration. Levels of system access and
privileges shall only be assignable to selected individuals.
5.8 Fully remote- controlled and supervised public address system with power output of up to 300
W for 100V distribution for the version with 230 V AC power supply and 150 W for the
version with 48 V DC power supply.
5.9 Integrated input VoIP for direct connection to the digital infrastructure.
5.10 6 output loops /or as required per site conditions, with separate indications of currently
broadcasted messages.
5.11 Communication and control by standard protocols (HTML, SNMP, NTP, SYSLOG)
5.12 Option of direct coupling with the automatic announcement system
5.13 Equipment shall be self-protecting against transients in the input A.C supply and against failure
of any component or cable in the entire communication system. The In-Building Paging system
shall provide zoned and building-wide paging together with a min. 2 party communication
channels within each zone or building area.
5.14 The PA and Industrial Talkback system shall be expandable to cater for future expansion
phases in terms of additional nodes, zone expansion and additional control and access panels.
5.15 Speaker cabling and visual alert cabling shall all be on a ring to provide resilience.
63
64
5.16 Calls will be carried out through loudspeakers installed in the various locations across the
Project.
5.17 The area coverage will be such that calls will be clearly audible in the paged operating areas
and their surrounding space.
5.18 The building area shall be divided into zones each with sections. Final distribution of units over
the zones will be finalized during detailed field study, planning and design. This will be related
to area configuration and other operational objectives.
5.19 Some PA and Talk back field call station units may be located in areas with a fair degree of
background noise. Therefore, the requirements shall be for directional dynamic microphones,
with strong noise suppression together with input/pre-amplifier sections including filtering and
speech compression giving the highest practicable levels of intelligibility.
5.20 The In-building Paging system shall provide zoned and plant-wide paging together with a
minimum of 1 Channel-party communication channels within each zone or plant area and
allowing minimum one (1) simultaneous conversation within the area (zone).
5.21 The system shall be capable of providing an audio output to a Digital Voice Recording System.
5.22 Facilities shall be provided for local loudspeaker muting to prevent acoustic feedback that may
be generated from nearby access panels.
5.23 Each operator's control set will be able to:

 Address a call to one or multiple sections.
 Address a call to one or multiple zones, by activating the selected zones.
 Transmit a general call to the whole area activating all sections simultaneously.
5.24 The system shall also provide the following facilities:

a) A two-wire telephone interface is to be connected to the telephone system. The PABX to
which this is to be connected shall be designated during the detailed engineering phase.
b) The interface shall provide 48 V supply on the two-wires respectively with 600-ohm
impedance.
c) An acoustical feedback suppresser.
d) Integrated test equipment to identify faults on the external loudspeaker lines along with a
Notebook PC for testing purposes at remote locations as a maintenance
e) The following shall form part of the central equipment located in the CCR:
 PABX Interface
 Acoustic feedback suppression
 CD audio player
5.25 The operator control sets shall be provided in key location.
5.26 CD audio player shall be provided as one of the input/output sources to/from the public-address
system, which shall have the capability to broadcast the player output.
5.27 Any field call station can selectively dial any other call station from its inbuilt dialing pad
without the manual intervention of any zonal operator. The intelligence unit, dialing
button/keypad etc. shall be an integral part of the call station and shall not be procured form
different OEMs and combined.
5.28 All the system elements in PA and Industrial Talkback system viz. Controller, field call station,
speaker shall be sourced from the same OEM.
64
65
5.29 The powering philosophy for PA and Industrial Talkback system and other allied accessories
shall be provided by the Vendor after conducting field survey of the building.
5.30 Bidder to consider mini UPS suitable to provide power supply to PA system and other allied
accessories. Incoming mains supply (240V AC, 50Hz) to UPS shall be provided by the Owner
within 3 meters of the point of location of the PA system and allied accessories. Power cable
from owner‟s power supply unit to I/C of UPS and power cable required for further distribution
shall be provided by the bidder/vendor.
5.31 All power distribution boards, MCB, power supply cable shall be provided by the
Bidder/Vendor.
5.32 Extending the power supply up to the point of installation of telecom equipment, providing
power supply cable, MCB etc. shall fall under the scope of works of the Bidder/Vendor.
5.33 The Bidder/Vendor shall provide the earthing of the system as per their industry standard. The
telecom earth shall be connected to the main Electrical earthing system by the Bidder/Vendor
under their scope.
6. Junction Boxes
6.1 All junction boxes (JB) shall be made of Fiberglass reinforced polyester material with
minimum thickness 4 mm, door handle, self-locking with common key, door gasket shall be of
synthetic rubber and provided with cage clamp type terminal blocks.
7. Tailed Characteristics
7.1 The equipment shall be fully solid-state type, microprocessor based and programmable.
7.2 The Operator Access Units shall be microprocessor based and connected to the central control
cabinet using Cat6 (Category 6 type) or suitable cable cables as per site conditions.
7.3 PA Controllers at CCR and CHP Control Room shall be fiber optic interfaces to establish
optical communication over OFC link between two PA Controllers.
7.4 Configuration of the system shall be achieved by software for maximum flexibility. A "user
friendly" setting up and checking routine shall be provided which enables an operator using a
PC to implement speed commissioning and fault-finding functions. The use of these methods
shall allow adjustments to be easily made when the system is installed without resulting in
modifications to the system wiring. The system shall be provided with standard serial interface
(preferably a USB connection) to be connected with a laptop for local and remote access for
maintenance and operations activities.
7.5 All software utilized shall be the latest and upgraded version.
7.6 The system shall be designed to comply with EMI and RFI Regulations particularly the
requirements of IEC 61000 series.
65
66
8. Interface with EPABX System
8.1 An interface to the telephone system shall be provided to enable users to broadcast routine
speech announcements from telephones assigned the correct class-of-service. The system
interface to the telephone system shall be via a 2-wire/4-wire E & M tie- line/E1 line/ SIP
channel. Facilities shall be included to prevent acoustic feedback that may be generated from
telephones situated close to loud-speakers. Hardware required for interface with EPABX
system shall be in PA system supplier‟s scope.
9. Technical Features
9.1 The design of the system and distribution of loudspeakers and flashing lights shall be based on
the following requirements:
9.2 The alarm signal level at every location on the installation shall exceed background noise level,
at that location, by at least 10dB.
10. System Cabinet
10.1 The control subsystem, speech amplifiers and their ancillary devices shall be housed in a 19"
standard rack mounted system cabinet with all control, power circuits and necessary amplifiers
and shall be supplied in prewired conditioned and shall be completely tested at manufacturer's
works prior to dispatch.
11. Digital Voice Storage / Playback Unit (DVSP)
11.1 This unit is used, as above, to gain access to the PA system by telephone or radio, but the
message to be broadcast is digitally stored and played through the DVSP monitor speaker on
the Engineers Test Panel, this allows the engineer to intercept calls which he does not think are
suitable for broadcast.
11.2 The DVSP shall record calls that cannot be sent to all required zones because some are
occupied by a higher priority call. The unit shall store up to minimum 15 calls in high quality
format with a maximum of three minutes for each call, including chimes and prerecorded
messages. Playback of a call can start while it is still being recorded. The unit can record and/or
playback up to minimum eight calls simultaneously.
12. Programming and Interface
12.1 The system functions may be programmed from a variety of external and/or internal sources
such as via the connection to a laptop/PC.
12.2 Long range remote access, which may be used for setting up, fault finding, system parameter
changes etc., using the PTT network via V 32 BIS dial up modem is an advantage.
13. PABX Interface
13.1 This unit is provided in order to gain direct access to the PA system via telephones for high
priority announcements by such people as supervisors etc. The interface shall be based on
industry standard open protocol.
66
67
14. Control Sets
14.1 A directional gooseneck microphone shall form part of each control set. When the microphone
shall be used, nearby loudspeakers shall be muted to avoid acoustic feedback. The microphone
amplifier shall be fitted with an automatic gain control (AGC) for convenience in use.
14.2 Each control set shall be equipped as minimum with the following:
a) A magnet dynamic, gooseneck microphone and a telephone handset with automatic

switch from the microphone to the handset upon lifting the last one.
b) Necessary lamps, push buttons, switches, and indicators to monitor and control the
system.
15. Loud Speaker
15.1 General Requirements:
a) The loudspeakers shall be normal, weatherproof in all locations and explosion proof
type, depending upon the location in which they will be installed.
b) The nominal power is intended as the power of a sinusoidal signal continuously
applicable without damage. All speakers shall have the same rated power and shall
be adjusted to provide the required coverage.
c) The primary winding of the transformer shall be tapped so that the loudspeakers
will absorb from the line 100%, 50%, 20%, or 10% of its power, according to the
tapused.
d) The reproduced frequency band shall be at least 370 to 6000 Hz for all the
transducers, within +/-6 dBrange.
16. Weatherproof Loudspeakers
a) They shall have protection to meet IP 65, IEC 60529 Publication.

b) The explosion proof requirement shall be in accordance with the area classification in which it
will be installed.
c) The utilized material shall be polyester resin armored with fiber glass or equivalent, suitable to
resist the aggressive atmosphere. The loudspeakers shall have a diffusion angle between 100°
and 120° with the minimum sound pressure level, measured 1 m away along the diffusion
axis, when a continuous constant level sinusoidal sound signal with 1 W power is applied and
the transformer is tapped for the maximum absorbed power shall be minimum 107 dBA.
d) The indoor loudspeakers installed in various buildings shall provide pleasant appearance and
blend with the surroundings.
e) The flashing light shall be addressable for remote maintenance and checking from the PA
Administration station.
17. Acoustic Feedback Protection
17.1 The system shall be fitted with devices to enable and affect frequency shifting of voice input
during PABX radio access. Acoustic feedback via telephone or radio connection to the
PA/alarm system can only be totally eliminated by the use of a digital voice storage/playback
(DVSP) unit.
67
68
18. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
18.1 UPS shall be supplied as per requirements described in relevant standards. Rating and other
technical data for the compatible UPS shall be provided by the vendor in the technical data
sheet with the submittal.
19. Managed Switch
19.1 Data highway shall be of high speed Ethernet and full duplex configuration. Network shall be
built on the Managed Ethernet switches for better control of data traffic, performance and
future expansion. Switch configuration shall be redundant with seamless changeover without
any upset in the process or equipment. Failure reporting shall be available at HMI. MTBF of
the switch shall be more than 20 Years. Configuration shall be automatic.
19.2 All Ethernet switches to be used in the plant shall be of same type and shall conform the
applicable specification requirements.
19.3 Other requirements shall be as follows:
a) All managed switches shall work in IEC-61850-3 protocol environment and shall
support IEC-62439 standard ring redundancy topology (MRP) and also fast MRP. It
shall also support IEC-62439-3 standard PRP& HSR technology with 0ms recovery
time and also support IEC-61850 switch (RSP & MSP switches)
b) Switch shall have the capacity for maximum of 4 Giga bit fiber port and 24 fast
Ethernet port.
c) Switch shall act as IGMPquerier and minimum 2 alarm contacts shall be available
d) It shall have High MTBF value
e) It shall support ACA adaptor for reconfiguration of the switch in case of failure to
reduce MTTR value to less than one minute and shall have minimum of 4 fiber and
4 copper din rail switch RSPL.
20. Network Management Software (NMS)
20.1 The minimum technical requirement of NMS is given below:
a) Automatic topology discovery and creation of network maps.

b) Should have high level Network Inventory polling capability for IP Network nodes,
all available Switch, Camera, Modules, Ports, Physical links, VLAN interfaces and
all the other SNMP (Simple Network Management Control) capable devices in the
network.
c) Should have powerful administration control.
d) Detailed performance monitoring and management.
e) Should have extensive fault management capabilities with Real time Event and
Alarm notifications, System Logs and Audit trials.
f) Scheduled device configuration backup and restores functionality.
g) Automatic detection of configuration changes for easy trouble shooting and
Isolation.
h) Should support 3rd party devices and end points.
i) Should have the functionality of Group provisioning/Scheduled configuration roll
out management.
j) Should have the ability to perform scheduled or Unscheduled network wide
software or Firmware upgrades.
k) Should have the ability to customize the NMS dash boards as per the requirements
68
69
l) Should have the ability to perform/ create group of devices for applying same task.
m) Should have extensive centralized trouble shooting tools in built.
n) Should provide the flexibility to the network administrator to assign task to an
individual network engineer and assign ownership I track the status of the issue
resolution.
o) The NMS solution should be preferably from the same active compatible switching
vendor, in case vendors proposing for 3rd party NMS solution should provide all
the interop reports certified by both the NMS vendor and Active switching vendor
on seamless interoperability.
p) All the required Hardware and Software for the NMS solution should be proposed
by the bidder.
21. Bidders Required Data Sheets
21.1 Bidder is required to provide data sheets for each the component of the offered PA system/
equipment including accessories, UPS, power and control cables, communications cables,
fiber-optic cable, switches, joints boxes and interfaces. All markings, software and related
documents shall be in English language.
21.2 It is recommended to conduct field survey before making technical submittal. The detailed
design work should include technical data sheets of the material and components, single line
diagrams (SLDs), operation and maintenance manual etc.
22. Tests
conformance tests have been performed successfully on the PA System and equipment, controls
etc.
the acceptance tests (proposed by vendor and approved by BREB), the offered PA System shall
be rejected.
23. Name Plate

c) Accuracy parameters
d) Manufacturer logo
e) Weight and size
f) Power, voltage and frequency
g) All other important data as necessary
site in Bangladesh.
69
70

g) Bar code
25. Warranty
and information with the bid submittal for the PA system as follows:
a) Submit manufacturer's product data for each system proposed for use with design,
dimensions and layout, electrical characteristics of each piece of equipment /
component and connection requirements.
b) Technical literature for operation, control and maintenance etc.
c) Complete list of BOQs of the offered system
g) Clause by clause conformance to this specification.
l) List of clients in last five years with their respective addresses, which were supplied
PA System.
70
71
Specification# 38 /LTD 10700-001
PABX System: A private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX)- An automatic telephone switching
system facility within the Laboratory Building.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers General Technical requirements for the design, supply, installation,
testing, commissioning and handing over on turn key basis (TKB) of a PABX System complete
in all respects for a three (3) story building in phase -I (which will be extended to eight (8)
stories later in phase-II), for Bangladesh Rural Electrification Board (BREB) material
Acceptance Testing Laboratory at PalliBiddyut Area, Savar Dhaka, Bangladesh.
2.1 PABX system shall conform to the latest editions of the standards applicable to their design,
BS 1363: Part 1 A plugs, socket-outlets, adaptors and connection units - Part 1:

Specification for rewireable and non-rewireable 13 A fused pl
BS 6500 Electric cables Flexible cords rated up to 300/500 V, for use with
equipment intended for domestic, office and similar environments
appliances and
BS EN 50075 Specification for flat non-wirable two-pole plugs 2.5 A 250 V, with
connection of class II-equipment for household and similar purposes
cord, for the
ETSI TBR 21 Terminal Equipment (TE); Attachment Requirements for pan-

European approval for connection to the analogue Public Switched
Telephone Networks (PSTNs) to TE (excluding TE supporting the
voice telephony service) in which network addressing if provided, is
by means of Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) signaling
IEC 60227-5 Part 5 Polyvinyl chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and
including 450/750 V - Flexible cables (cords)
71
72
IEC 60245-4 Rubber insulated cables - Rated voltages up to and including 450/750
V - Part 4: Cords and flexible cables
IEC CISPR 22 Information Technology Equipment - Radio disturbance

characteristics - Limits and methods of measurement
ITU-T Recommendation E.161Arrangement of digits, letters and symbols on

telephones and other devices that can be used for gaining access to a
telephone network
IEC 60038 IEC standard voltages
2.2 The Contractor shall follow Bangladesh Telecommunication and International Statutory
Requirements, as well as best trade practices in the manufacture and installation of PABX.
2.3 The work shall be done in accordance with the provisions of the applicable standards and codes
as laid in EIRP (Effective Isotropic Radiated Power), ETSI (European Telecommunication
Standard Institute), FCC (Federal Communication Commission), IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission), ANSI (American National Standard Institute) and Bangladesh
telecommunication standards and shall also conform to the requirements of safety and
operation.
3.1 The PABX system shall be manufactured at a plant that has fabricated units of similar design
and characteristics for a period not less than ten years and that holds ISO: 9001 Certification for
the quality management.
4.1 The PABX system shall be suitable for the laboratory building under the local service
72
73
5.1 The PABX system shall meet or exceed the technical and performance requirements of this
specification in all respects and shall have minimum technical features as mentioned in the
following clauses.
5.2 Power Supply requirements: Power supply requirement shall be as follows:
a) Terminal Equipment (TE) shall be AC or DC powered. For AC power terminal equipment,

the operating voltage shall be 230 +5%, -10% and frequency 50Hz ± 1% as according to IEC
60038 amended to date.
b) The design of the TE shall be such that all essential items of equipment of the TE shall be
powered from batteries on float charge such the performance of the system shall not
deteriorate in any way on failure of the electricity mains supply. Non-essential test equipment
and other auxiliary devices shall be directly work off the electricity mains supply.
c) The system shall operate on 48 volts (nominal) with positing grounding and shall function
satisfactorily within a voltage range of 42 volts to 54 volts for not less than 80% of the calls
and shall function satisfactorily within a voltage range of 44 to 52 volts for 100% of the calls.
d) Where external power supply is used i.e. AC adopter or battery, it shall not affect the
capability of the TE to meet this specification.
e) Adopter shall be preapproved by the relevant regulatory body before it can be used with the
Terminal Equipment.
5.3 Power Supply, Chord and Main Plug Requirements: Terminal Equipment (TE) shall be
fitted with a suitable and appropriate approved power supply chord and mains plug. Both are
regulated products and shall be approved by the BREB/Project Manager.
a) The Main Plug shall be 13A fused plug in accordance with BS 1363 Part-1
b) or 2.5A, 230V, flat non-rewireable twopole plug in accordance with the BS EN 50075.
c) The power supply cord shall be certified according to: BS 6500 or IEC60227-5 or
IEC60245-4.
5.4 Polarity: The performance of the terminal equipment shall be independent of the PSTN line
polarity.
5.5 Interoperability: Terminal Equipment shall be able to exchange information and to use the
information that has been exchanged between two or more systems or components.
5.6 Connectivity: TE shall be able to link with other programs and devices to allow connectivity
and interoperability.
5.7 Language:All markings, software and related documents shall be in English language
5.8 Electromagnetic (EMC) Compatibility and Electrical Safety Requirements: TE shall

comply with limits of the conducted disturbances at the mains terminal and telecommunications
ports, and the limits for radiated disturbances defined in the IEC Standards. TE shall comply
with IEC 60950-1 safety standards. The requirements shall be applicable to the class of
equipment, type of telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuit and types of components.
5.9 Extension Telephones and Exchange Lines: The PABX supplied shall be able to accept the
use of:
73
74
a) Dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) push button telephone
b) Rotary dial telephones
c) Mixture of a) and b) above

5.10 PABX connected to the PSTN shall be designed to meet the following requirements:
a) Where the PABX system is connected to PSTN, in addition to complying this

technical specification, it shall comply with the requirements for connection to
PSTN-Bangladesh FTS PSTN -Telecommunication Standard.
b) Where PABX system supported A-CLIP, in addition to complying this technical

specification shall comply with A-CLIP requirements of Bangladesh FTS P
ACLIP.
5.11 Tones, Cadences: Tone and cadence shall be as follows:
a) The frequency and cadence for the tones shall comply with the specification
given in Table below. The allowable frequency deviation is +/-5% nominal value.
b) The ring back tone shall be returned to the calling party, whenever an extension
line in the system is being rung, irrespective of whether the call is external or
internal.
c) PABX with capacity above 100 extensions shall be incorporated with NU tone
facilities and shall follow Table below.
5.12 Ringing Current: TE shall be able to support as follows:
a) Cadence of ringing current shall comply as given in the Table.
b) Ringing current generator shall have open circuit voltage of not less than 75Vrms and not
greater than 85Vrms and a design nominal frequency with the range of 16 Hz to 25Hz. The
total harmonic distortion shall not exceed 30%.
c) Terminal voltage on full load shall be at least 60Vrms.
Table - I: Ringing Signal and Service Tone
No. TYPE OF CADENCE (Second) FREQUENCY LEVEL (dBm)

TONE (Hz)
Ringing 0.4 ON 0.2 OFF 16-25 75Vrms
1 Current 0.4 ON 2.0 OFF
2 Dial Tone Continuous 425 -15 to –9
3 Ring tone - 1.0 ON, 425 -12

Internal call 3.0 to 5.0 OFF
Ring tone - 0.4 ON, 0.2 OFF -15 to -9
External call 0.4 ON, 2.0 OFF 425
74
75
4 Ring back tone 0.4 ON, 0.2 OFF 425 -15 to -9

- Internal Call 0.4 ON, 2.0 OFF
Ring back tone 0.4 ON, 0.2 OFF 425 -15 to -9

- External Call 0.4 ON, 2.0 OFF
5 Busy Tone 0.5 ON, 0.5 OFF 425 -15 to –9
(Engage tone)
6 Congestion Either, 425 -15 to –9

tone a) 0.5 ON, 0.5 OFF
Or
b) 0.25 ON, 0.25 OFF
7 Intrusion 0.2 ON, 0.2 OFF 425 -15 to –9

warning tone 0.2 ON, 5.0 OFF
Number 2.5 ON, 0.5 OFF 425 -15 to –9

8 Unobtainable
(NU) tone
5.13 Numbering Scheme: Numbering Scheme shall be as follows:
2xxx Extension Numbers
3xxx
4xxx
5xxx
6xxx
7xxx Extension Number/ Abbreviated Dialing
8x Tie Line
9 Access to Exchange Lines
0 PABX Operator
1xx Services
Note: Tie line is a leased/dedicated circuit linking to two PABXs located in different
premises.
75
76
5.14 TE with up to 50 extension lines, two-digit numbering is acceptable.
5.15 TE with more than 50 extension lines and up to 500 extensions lines, three digits numbering
shall be used.
5.16 TE with more than 500 extension lines, four digits and above shall be used, depending on the
capacity of the system.
5.17 Access digit for the public exchange shall be "9".
5.18 Access digit for the operator shall be "0".
5.19 The first digit of tie-lines access code shall be "8".
5.20 Transmission Requirements: The equipment shall function satisfactorily with an extension
line loop resistance of up to 1500 ohms with a leakage resistance of down to 20 KOhm.
5.21 Attenuation: Transmission attenuation for the following call at 1000Hz, measured at
respective termination of the system shall be as follows:
a) Extension to Extension less than 8dB.

b) Extension to Exchange line circuit less than 2.5dB.
c) Extension to line circuit less than 0.5 dB.
d) Tie line to tie line less than 0.5 dB.
5.22 Route Restrictions: Route Restrictions shall be as follows:
a) The route restriction equipment shall be of the type that total number of digits dialed as well
as analyze the number of pulses of the first two or three digits so as to render the route
restriction facility as fool-proof as possible.
b) Alternately the digit analysis in the route restriction shall commence analysis of the first digit
dialed only after the route restriction equipment detects the public exchange dial tone.
c) The route restriction equipment shall reactivate the digit analysis, whenever the public
exchange dial tone is detected.
d) First two digit "00" and first digit"1010", "103", and "108" are barred.
6. Approvals
6.1 All statutory approvals from commencement to commissioning of PABX shall be obtained by
the Contractor from concerned Authorities at their cost. However, the client will provide all
necessary assistance for providing documents, drawings and certificates pertaining to other
contractors, if required.
7. Operating Manual
7.1 The PABX system shall be provided with detailed operating manual and user‟s guide
containing technical specifications, safety warnings, important data and operating procedure in
English language.
76
77
8.1 The supplier shall conduct training sessions to REB staff on the use of the PABX system and its
maintenance. User shall be given training on safe operation of the machines, operation and
maintenance and use of controls, emergency, safety etc. including other functions and features.
9. Tests
conformance tests have been performed successfully on the PABX equipment, controls and
system.
the acceptance tests (proposed by vendor and approved by BREB), the offered PABX system
shall be rejected.
10. Name Plate
10.1 The TE shall have legible, indelible, readily visible and permanent marking with the following
information:
b) Model, year of manufacture, type and identifying number
d) Applicable or reference Standards
f) Manufacturer logo or identification mark
g) Weight and size
h) Power, voltage and frequency
i) All other important data as necessary
site in Bangladesh.

77
78
g) Bar code
12. Warranty
and information with the bid submittal for PABX system as follows:
a) Submit manufacturer's product data for each piece of equipment, component, system
proposed for use with its design, dimensions and layout, electrical characteristics and
connection requirements and system parameters.
b) Technical literature for operation, control and maintenance.
c) Complete list of BOQs for the offered package.
g) Manufacturer‟s certificate attesting to 10 years of experience in manufacturing.
h) Statement of country of origin.
i) Copy of ISO:9001 Certification for the manufacturing plant.
j) Copies of test certificates evidencing completion of qualification tests.
k) List of clients in last five years with their respective addresses, which were supplied
PABX system.
l) Clause by clause conformance to this specification.
13.2 The successful Contractor, after award of the contract, shall furnish following technical
particulars of the PABX equipment and obtain the approval from the concerned BREB
approved Authority.
a) Single line diagram (SLD)/ schematic diagram of electronic PABX system & allied
equipment etc.
b) Layouts details with data sheets
c) Earthing layouts and Electrical wiring layout - SLD
78
79
Specification# 39
Firefighting System: Firefighting System for the BREB Material Acceptance Testing Laboratory
Building.
1. Scope
1.1 The scope of work under this specification shall include design, manufacture, testing, supply,
storage, erection, testing and commissioning of the below given items for complete "Fire
fighting System" including labour, tools and plants etc. as required. The work shall also include
all incidental jobs connected with installation of sprinkler pumps, fire pumps, piping,
sprinklers, valves, wiring, panel etc. The scope of work to be carried out shall be as described
above and briefly listed below:
a) Complete sprinkler piping, sprinklers and accessories in the ceiling, connection with
sprinkler‟s pipe ring main at ground level.
b) Fire Hydrant in the building including distribution system, connection to fire ring main at
ground level
c) Branch connections and vertical risers for stairwell/lobbies etc.
d) Fire Hydrants and swinging hose reels with cabinet and all other accessories in the fire hose
cabinet
e) Fire Brigade inlet connections
f) Fire Extinguishers
g) Fire Doors
1.2 This scope of work shall cover the Fire Fighting System for a three (3) story building in phase -
I, which will be extended to eight (8) stories later in phase-II, for Bangladesh Rural
Electrification Board (BREB) material Acceptance Testing Laboratory at Palli Biddyut Area,
Savar Dhaka, Bangladesh
2.1 The Firefighting System equipment, materials and parts shall be manufactured at a plant that
has fabricated units of similar design and characteristics for a period not less than ten (10) years
and that holds ISO: 9001 Certification for the quality management.
3.1 The Firefighting System shall be suitable for the laboratory building under the local service
79
80

4. Firefighting System Technical Specifications
4.1 This specification specifies salient design and functional features of the "Firefighting System"
for a three (3) story building in phase -I, which will be extended to eight (8) stories later in
phase-II, for Bangladesh Rural Electrification Board (BREB) material Acceptance Testing
Laboratory. The offered Fire Fighting System shall have the latest, effective and efficient
design and operating system.
4.2 The offered Firefighting system shall meet or exceed the technical, functional and performance
requirements of this specification in all respects.
4.3 The material shall conform to the applicable and relevant Bangladesh National Standards,
British Standards or ASTM standards.
5. Specific Technical Requirements
5.1 In general, all materials shall be brand new and of the best quality conforming to this
specification and shall comply to Bangladesh National Standards, British Standards or ASTM
standards. All works executed shall be to the satisfaction of the BREB/Consultant/Project
Manager/ Site In-charge.
a) Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical or horizontal as required in a neat
workmanlike manner.
b) Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at specified intervals.
c) Clamps, hangers and supports on RCC walls, columns and slabs shall be fixed only by
means of approved make of expandable metal fasteners inserted by use of power drills.
d) All pipe clamps, supports, nuts, bolts, washers shall be galvanized mild steel (MS)
throughout the building. Painted MS clamps, MS nuts, bolts & washers shall not be
accepted.
e) Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located as to provide easy accessibility for
operations, maintenance and repairs.
f) Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and profiles.
g) Vendor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for the system from the competent
authority.
h) Location of all hydrants, valve, flow switch etc. shall be got confirmed by the Project
Manager/ Site In-charge.
i) Upon completion of all work and all tests, the Vendor shall furnish necessary operators,
labour and helpers for operating the entire installation for a period of fifteen (15) working
days of ten (10) hours each, to enable the Client‟s staff to get acquainted with the operation
of the system. During this period, the Vendor shall train the Client‟s personnel in the
operation, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment installed.
80
81
j) All equipment shall be installed on suitable foundations, true to level and in a neat
workmanlike manner.
k) Equipment shall be so installed as to provide sufficient clearance between the end walls and
between equipment to equipment.
l) Contractors shall mobilize and employ sufficient resources to achieve the detailed schedule
within the broad frame work of the accepted methods of working and safety. The
contractor shall provide everything necessary for the proper carrying out of the work,
including tools, plants and other materials.
m) No additional payment will be made to the contractor for any multiple shift work or other
incentive methods contemplated by him in his work schedules even though the time
schedule is approved by the Architect/Engineer-in-charge/Project Manager.
n) The work shall be executed as per the program drawn or approved by the Architect and it
shall be so arranged as to have full coordination with any other agency employed at site.
No claim for idle labour shall be entertained nor shall any claim on account of the delay in
the completion of the building work to be tenable except extension of time secured by the
contractor as stated elsewhere.
o) The contractor shall permit free access and afford normal facilities and usual conveniences
to other agencies or departmental workmen to carry out connected work or other work
services under separate arrangements. The contractor will not be allowed any extra
payment on this account.
p) All soil, filth or other matter of any offensive nature taken out of any trench shall not be
deposited on the surface, but shall at once be carted away by the contractor free of charge
to a suitable pit or place to be provided to him.
q) The contractor shall provide all equipment, instruments, labour and such other assistance
required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Project Manager for measurement of the work,
materials etc.
6. Installation Approval
6.1 The contractor shall be responsible for getting the entire installation duly inspected and
approved by the relevant Fire Authorities and shall bear all expenses in connection with the
same. The certificate/ NOC of the above building from the local Fire Authorities should be
furnished by the Contractor. Nothing extra shall be paid on this account. The Contractor shall
carry out, unless stated otherwise in the Description of Works, and shown on the Tender
Drawings, all Firefighting installation as per the design including the following:
a) Schematic diagram for Firefighting system (Hydrant and Sprinkler).

b) Firefighting (Sprinkler & Hydrant) layout of typical floor.
81
82
7. Shop Drawings and Documents
7.1 Within four (4) weeks after the award of contract, the contractor shall furnish for the approval
to the Architect/Consultants, two sets of detailed shop drawings of all equipment and materials,
piping work, sprinkler layouts required to complete the project as per specifications and as
required by the Architect/Consultant. These drawings shall contain details of construction, size,
arrangement, operating clearances, performance characteristics, and capacity of all items of
equipment as also the details of all related items of work by other contractors.
7.2 If the Architect/Consultant makes any amendments in the above drawings, the contractor shall
supply two fresh sets of drawings with the amendments duly incorporated, along with the
drawings on which corrections were made after final approval has been obtained from the
Architect/Consultant, the contractor shall submit a further four sets of shop drawings to
Architect/Consultant. No materials or equipment may be delivered or installed at the job site
unless the Contractor has in his possession, the approved shop drawings for the particular
material or equipment.
7.3 Approval rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or
of building conditions. Where drawings are approved, said approval does not mean that
drawings have been checked in detail nor does it in any way relieve the contractor from his
responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the
contract. All work at site shall be carried out strictly in conformity with approved shop
drawings only.
8. Execution of Work
8.1 The work shall be of the highest standard and confirm to the technical specifications both as
regard its design and workmanship. Modern tools and latest techniques shall be employed for
its execution.
8.2 Any damage done to the building during the execution of work shall be responsibility of the
Contractor and it shall be made good by contractor at his own cost, to the entire satisfaction of
the Architect/Consultant.
8.3 Work shall have to be co-ordinate with the building work and other allied jobs/trades to the
entire satisfaction of BREB /Consultant.
9. Miscellaneous Requirements
a) A site order book will be maintained at site which will be in the custody of the
Architect/BREB or their authorized representative and all instructions given to the
Contractor will be recorded in the site order book and the same has to be signed by the
Contractor to comply with the instructions given therein.
b) The work will not be considered as complete and taken over by the employer till all the
components of the work after being completed at site in all respects have been inspected
tested by the Consultant/BREB to their entire satisfaction and a completion certificate
issued.
c) The Contractor will submit within 15 days of the award of work, a detailed schedule of
programme of work.
d) The Contractor shall provide, within one month after completion of the work or along with
the final bill, three sets of manuals properly bound which shall contain the following
information:
82
83
i. Description of installation items using main items of equipment.

ii. Description of all equipment and system operation with trouble shooting manuals.
iii. Line diagram of each system including main feature of equipment and showing
method of. setting controls
iv. Method of fault finding, routine, adjustment and piping diagram.
v. Description of routine maintenance, oil and greasing points and recommended
lubricants.
vi. Manufacturer service manuals for all equipment.
vii. Spares reference manuals.
10. As Built Drawings
10.1 On completion of work and before the issue of certificate of virtual completion the Contractor
shall submit to the BREB/Consultants four (4) sets of layout drawings (hard copies) and one (1)
soft copy of each drawing drawn in approved scale indicating the complete system as installed.
The drawings shall in particular give the following information:
a) Complete sprinkler piping, sprinklers & accessories in the ceiling, connection with
sprinkler‟s main pipe.
b) Branch connections and vertical risers for stairwell/lobbies etc.
c) Fire Hydrants and swinging hose reels with cabinet and all other accessories in the fire hose
cabinet.
d) Connected wiring between pumps, panels and related work, earthing etc.
e) Fire Brigade inlet connections.
f) Six (6) fire doors
g) Fire Extinguishers
11. Materials and Equipment
11.1 All materials, equipment, components and parts used in fire protection system shall conform to
the latest edition of the Bangladesh National Standards, applicable British Standards(BS) or
equivalent ASTM Standards. All material shall be brand new, sound and robust in construction
and well finished. Surplus material after completion of work shall be taken back by the
Contractor and the cost shall be recovered, if the advance payment has been made earlier by the
Client. Unless otherwise stated in the conditions of contract, samples of all materials to be
supplied by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer-in-Charge/Project
Manager for his approval.
11.2 The Contractor shall not commence the work until the samples are approved, in writing from
BREB/Architect. The Contractor shall ensure that all the materials incorporated in the work are
identical in all respects with the approved sample. All samples not destroyed in testing shall be
returned to the Contractor after completion of contract. No payment shall be made for samples
destroyed in testing.
12. Safety Code
a) Suitable scaffolds shall be provided for workmen for all work that cannot safely be done
from the ground, or from solid construction except such short period work as can be done
83
84
safely from ladders. When a ladder is used, an extra labour shall be engaged for holding the
ladder and if the ladder is used for carrying materials as well, suitable footholds and
handholds shall be provided on the ladder and the ladder shall be given an inclination not
steeper than 1/4 to 1 (1/4 horizontal and 1 vertical).
b) Scaffolding or staging more than 3.25meters above the ground or floor, swung or
suspended from an overhead support or erected with stationary support, shall have a guard
rail properly attached, bolted, braced and otherwise secured at least 1meter high above the
floor or platform of such scaffolding or staging and extending along the entire length of the
outside and ends thereof with only such openings as may be necessary for the delivery of
materials. Such scaffolding or staging shall be so fastened as to prevent it, form swaying
from the building or structure.
c) Working platform, gangways, and stairways shall be so constructed that they do not sag
unduly or unequally, and if height of a platform or gangway or stairways is more than 3.25
meters above ground level or floor level, it shall be closely boarded, have adequate width
and be suitably fenced, as described in 2 above.
d) Every opening in floor of a building or in a working platform shall be provided with
suitable means to prevent fall of persons or materials by providing suitable fencing or
railing with a minimum height of 1 meter.
e) Safe means of access shall be provided to all working platforms and other working places.
Every ladder shall be securely fixed. No portable single ladder shall be over 9 meters in
length. Width between side rails in a rung ladder shall in no case be less than 30 cm. for
ladders up to and including 3 meters in length. For longer ladders this width shall be
increased at least 6mm for each additional 30 cm. of length. Uniform step spacing shall not
exceed 30 cm.
f) Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent danger from electrical equipment. No
materials on any of the sites shall so stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience
to any person or the public. The Contractor shall provide all necessary fencing and lights
to protect public from accidents and shall be bound to bear expenses of defense of every
suit, action or other proceedings at law that may be brought by any person for injury
sustained owing to neglect of the above precautions and to pay any damages and costs
which may be awarded in any such suit, action or proceedings to any such person or which
may with the consent of the Contractor be paid to compromise any claim by any such
person.
13. Piping, Fitting and Basic Materials Specifications (General)
i. All pipe work, valves and fittings, unless otherwise specified, shall comply with
relevant clauses in the National Building Codes (NBC -Part-IV)/BScodes, standards
&regulations.
ii. Supply, deliver and install all pipe work materials and fittings for the pipe work
services installation.
iii. Pipe work shall follow the routes and approximate positions indicated on the
drawings.
iv. Pipe work, ancillaries, valves and demountable joints shall be installed for convenient
and safe routine maintenance and renewals.
v. All pipe work shall be installed with adequate gradients to facilitate draining and
venting.
84
85
vi. Pipe work shall be run in a neat manner and installed plumb, straight, symmetrical
and at right angles to or parallel to adjacent walls. No joints shall be formed in wall or
floor thickness.
vii. All pipe work, fittings and valves shall be free from corrosion, scale and internal
obstruction.
viii. Pipe work ends shall be cut square reamed free from burrs and finished full bore.
ix. Sufficient unions and flanged joints shall be provided to install and dismantle sections
of pipe work, wherever difficulty in dismantling may occur and on straight runs of
more than 25m.
x. Unions or flanges shall be provided at all valves and equipment for easy dismantling.
Connections to equipment shall be made in such a manner as to eliminate undue
strains in piping and equipment. Necessary fittings and bends shall be furnished to
avoid springing of pipes during assembly.
xi. Care shall be taken in placing unions to allow freedom to spring apart. Unions and
flanges shall not be placed in inaccessible positions. Where pipe work is installed in
inaccessible places, a union or flange shall be installed, prior to the pipe passing into
the wall or floor. Unions shall have two bronze conical seats ground in. Long screw
connections will not be accepted.
xii. All black mild steel pipe work in wall chases shall be welded throughout with flanged
joints at 16 m maximum intervals, if applicable.
xiii. Manufacturer‟s standard fittings shall be used and fabricated fittings will not be
accepted without approval.
xiv. Bends and tees shall be of the easy sweep type, except at air vents, drain points and
dead legs where square tees shall be used. Changes in diameter of horizontal pipe
work shall be formed eccentrically.
xv. Prior to any work being "covered up", the installer shall request the Engineer's
approval to that part of the installation in question.
xvi. Pre-fabricated pipe work shall be in accordance with the relevant clauses of ASTM
Standards/ British Standards (BS).
xvii. Take appropriate means to prevent galvanic action where dissimilar metals are
connected.
14. Piping Materials Schedule
14.1 Pipe work up to and including 150mm. nominal bore shall be carried out in black mild steel
(MS) heavy quality tube as per ASTM/ British Standards(BS).
14.2 Above this bore, carbon steel pipes shall comply to ASTM standards/ British Standards(BS).
Service Nominal Size Pipe (as per BS/ASTM Fittings (as per
Standards) BS/ASTM Standards)
Wet Riser 15mm to 50mm Black mild steel to heavy Screwed malleable iron
System, class.
Fire Hose Reel Black mild steel to heavy
System Sprinkler 25mm to 50mm class.
85
86
Risers 65mm to Black mild steel to heavy

150mm class.
Above 150mm Carbon steel to BS
3600.
On Floor 50mm and Black mild steel heavy class. Screwed malleable iron
Sprinkler Piping less
65mm to Black mild steel heavy class.

150mm
Above
150mm Black mild steel of thickness
min.7mm.
Drains All Black mild steel of heavy Screwed malleable iron

class.
Main Wet Riser ALL Black mild steel heavy class

System Supply or
Service Nominal Size Pipe Fittings
and Hydrant Main coated & wrapped,

Supply Underground only
15. Fittings for Wet Riser and Sprinkler Systems
a) Pipes and fittings main tees, elbows, couplings, flanges, reducers and all such
connecting devices that are need to complete the piping work in its totality.
b) Fabricated fittings shall not be permitted for pipe diameters 50mm and below
c) When used, they shall be fabricated, welded inspected in workshops under
supervisions of Project Managers whose welding procedures have been approved by
the Fire Insurance Authority as per Bangladesh Insurance Regulation rules for
sprinkle systems and applicable to hydrant and sprinkle systems. For “T”
connections, pipes shall be drilled and reamed cutting by gas or electrical welding
will not be accepted.
16. Joints
a) Screwed (50mmdia. pipes and below) joints for black steel pipes and fittings shall be
mental to thread joints. A small amount of red lead may be used for lubrication and
prevention. Joints shall not be welded or caulked. (with M.S. forged fittings)
b) Welded (65mmdia. and above) joints between M.S and pipes and fittings shall be
made with the pipes and fitting having “V” groove and welded joints electrical
resistance welding in an approved manner. Butt-welded joints are not acceptable.
Joints for the buried pipes will be subject to radiographic test from an approved
agency as per the Fire Insurance norms. (With welded M.S fittings heavy class with
“V” groove).
86
87
17. Pressure Ratings
a) The pressure rating of all pipe works shall be1.5 times of pressure head specified of
pump.
b) All valves and fittings used in the pipe works system shall not have a pressure rating
less than that of the pipe work.
18. Sleeves
a) Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, and floors
b) Sleeve Materials
c) Sleeve materials shall be 3mm thick galvanized steel
19. Sleeve Sizes
19.1 Sleeves for Un-insulated Piping: Two pipe sizes larger than pipe passing through sleeve
or a minimum of 12mm clearance between inside of sleeve and outside of pipe. Adequate
clearance shall be provided to install fire stopping material.
20. Sleeve Lengths:
Location Sleeve Length
Location Sleeve Length
Floor All floor sleeves to extend minimum of 50mm

above finished floor level.
Walls and Partitions Equal to depth of construction and terminated flush

with finished surfaces.
a) Sleeves which are contained in walls, ceilings or floors which are fire barriers
shall be additionally packed with a non-combustible material for the entire length
to form a fire/smoke stop of the required fire rating.
b) The material shall be subject to approval and must comply with Building Control
and the Building Regulations.
c) The ends of sleeves packed with material which shall have suitable fire-resistant
mastic applied to seal the fibers and present a neat appearance.
21. Gauges
a) Provide pressure gauges, conforming to the requirements of British Standards

(BS)/ASTM Standards, where indicated on the drawings and in accordance with
the schedule given below. All gauges shall be provided with snubbers. Gauges
shall have 100mm diameter dial, white coated with black figures and graduations.
Shutoff cock shall be provided between gauge and piping to permit gauge
removal while system is under pressure.
87
88
b) Gauges shall have graduation such that at normal working pressure the needle is
in the centre of the field.
c) Gauge Location
i. Outlet of Pumps
ii. Sprinkler floor control valves
iii. Top and bottom of all sprinkler and hose reel risers.
d) Mount gauges no higher than 1.5m above finished floor.

e) All gauges shall be calibrated in kg./sq.cm. to a maximum of not less than 1-1/3
times and not more than 2 times the operating pressure.
22. Pressure Switch Assembly
22.1 Pressure switch assemblies shall be provided for the operation of sprinkler pumps. The
assemblies shall consist of pipe work, pressure switches, pressure gauge, valves, orifice plates,
and the like and such arrangement shall conform to National Building Codes (NBC), Relevant
International Standards, British Standards(BS) and shall be accepted by local fire authority.
23. Execution
23.1 During the progress of the work, test the Wet Riser, Sprinkler, and Hose Reel systems
piping.
a) The piping shall be tested in accordance with NBC, local fire requirements and NFPA,
but in no case shall the system be tested at less than 15kg/sq.cm. Hydrostatic pressure or
1½ times working pressure for two (2) hours.
b) Defects disclosed by the tests shall be repaired or replaced with new work. Tests shall be
repeated as directed, until all work is proven satisfactory.
c) Take due precautions to prevent damage to the building and its contents as a result of
such tests. Repair any damage caused.
23.2 During construction, properly cap all lines and equipment nozzles so as to prevent the entrance
of sand, dirt, etc. Each system of piping shall be flushed (for the purpose of removing grit, dirt,
sand, etc., from the piping for as long a time as is required to thoroughly clean the system).
24. Screwed Joints
24.1 Do not damage fitting surface, remove burrs and ream smooth.
a) Screw joints should be factory made with external taper threads/ parallel internal
threads properly conforming to the relevant standards. All site cut threads to be
equal to “factory” made.
b) All screw joints should be executed to cover the complete length of the “useful
thread” as recommended by applicable National Standards or BS (British
Standards).
c) Make joints using suitable compound. Clean joint thoroughly of excess jointing
material. Teflon (PTFE) tape shall be used and apply tape to male threads only.
d) The use of cotton threads roll is not permitted.
e) Threads shall be full and clean cut and burrs formed in cutting shall be reamed. In
screwing up the pipe, care shall be taken that the pipe does not extend into the
fitting obstructing the waterway. Joint compound shall be applied to the threads
88
89
of the pipe and not to the fittings or sprinklers. Pipe shall be straightened before
installation to prevent pockets.
25. Flanged Joints
Use matched flange faces and 4mm thick compressed gaskets in accordance with applicable National
Standards or BS (British Standards).
a) Jointing face of flanges shall be parallel to each other.

b) Flanged joints shall be used on pipe work to enable easy removal of equipment or valves
for inspection or repair. Flanges shall be of the forged steel, flat faced slip on type with
pressure class suitable for the system working pressure involved but in no case less than
16 Bar. Jointing face of the flanges shall be truly parallel to each other and in alignment.
A suitable gasket of the approved type minimum 1.5mm thick shall be used between each
jointing flange. Bolts shall be of hexagonal head and shall be of adequate length such
that at least three complete threads protrude through the hexagonal nut with washers
when the flanged joints are fully tightened.
26. Welded Joints
a) Whenever welding piping connects to equipment, valves or other units connecting joints,
match the pressure rating of the pipe flanges with the pressure rating of the flanges on the
equipment requires maintenance, servicing, or possible removal.
b) Welding process: All sizes use metallic arc process.
c) Make joints between different piping materials with adapter fittings of a type suitable for
the purpose intended.
d) Make joints between pipes of dissimilar metals with dielectric union or flanges.
e) A one-piece reducing fitting shall be used wherever a change is made in the size. The use
of bushings or reducing flanges will not be permitted.
f) Unions shall be used only on pipes 50mm and smaller and provided at connections to
each piece of equipment for easy dismantling.
g) All control valves, pressure reducing valves, check valves, water flow switches, pressure
switches, etc., shall be easily accessible for maintenance and removal.
h) Pipe 80 mm in length and less is considered a nipple. All nipples shall have a non-
threaded area for gripping with wrench.
i) All piping systems shall be flushed free of foreign matter with clean water and left with
strainers clean upon completion of the work.
j) All mechanical couplings shall be installed according to manufacturer‟s instructions.
27. Expansion Joints
a) Expansion joints shall be provided for all pipe work passing through any building
expansion joint and where necessary as specified.
b) They shall be of axial pattern bellow type and shall screwed or flanged ends as
appropriate to facilitate replacement. They shall incorporate internal liners if required
and shall be manufactured from approved material appropriate to the system and shall be
designed or withstand at least two times of the system pressure.
c) Each joint shall be securely held by guides on both sides.
89
90
d) All expansion joints shall have a working life of not less than twenty years.
28. Ground pipe work
a) Underground pipes shall be protected against corrosion and against mechanical damage.
b) The pipes for the shall be laid in soil at 1.0 meter depth, the pipe line shall be cleaned
after jointing and treated with approved quality of bituminous paint then wrapped with
4mm thick pypkote layer (2) mm is a Pipeline Corrosion Resistant Tape) . The internal
surface of the tape shall be heated with the blower and then wrapped around the pipe with
a minimum overlay of 12 mm and bedded in washed sand free of all salts or sieved soil
before the trench is back filled.
c) Pipe work shall be hydraulic tested before the trench is back filled.
d) Anchor blocks shall be made at appropriate locations for thrust bearing. The contractor is
to note that it is their responsibility to design the trust blocks and issue to the engineer for
verification.
e) Pipe work shall be supported at not more than 3m interval.
29. Orifice plate
a) Orifice plates for system balancing, pump churning water circuits, where applicable, shall
be provided as required for proper commissioning of the systems. Wherever necessary to
suit the pump or system performance or in respect of system balance, an orifice shall be
provided even if they are not indicated in drawings.
b) Orifice plates shall be generally constructed and installed according to applicable
National Standards or BS (British Standards) for sprinkler installations.
30. Pipe cleaning and draining
a) All piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose scale, dirt, etc., before installation.
During the course of the installation, all open ends of pipes shall be plugged or capped to
prevent ingress of dirt.
b) After installation and sealing of joints all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned with clean
water under pressure to the satisfaction of Engineer. Water samples test may be required
if the Engineer is considered as necessary. Water used for this purpose shall be
discharged as directed.
c) Any temporary pipe work and equipment necessary for the above cleaning shall be
provided by the contractor.
90
91
31. Pipes support spacing
<------------------- Pipe diameter in mm ------------ ------------ --
S. No. Pipes & 15/20 20/25 32/40 50 75/80 100/110 150/160 200
Position
1 Vertical
1.1 GI /MS 2.4 2.4 3 3.6 4.5 4.5 5.4 5.4
2 Horizontal
2.1 GI /MS 2.0 2.0 2.4 3.0 3.6 4.0 4.5 4.5
32. Valves (General)
32.1 All fire protection water control valves within the building shall be either wedge gate valves
with painted iron wheel handles, shall have gland followers in stuffing boxes, and shall be
constructed so that they may be repacked while open and under pressure, or slow-closing gear-
operated butterfly valves.
a) All valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and working pressure cast or stamped
on body.
b) All fire protection valves are to be applicable National Standards or BS (British Standards).
c) All valves shall be with screwed, flanged, or mechanical coupling ends as required by the
piping system in which they are installed.
d) Valves shall be selected for the working pressure required.
e) All isolating valves and control valves shall be provided with the proper and efficient
operation and maintenance of the entire systems and as may be required by the Water
Supplies Department.
f) All valves supplied shall be suitable for the working pressure and test pressure of the
various water supply system.
32.2 Furnish all valves and accessory material necessary in the piping whether or not shown on
drawings as follows.
32.3 All valves shall be packed with an approved packing and threads shall be coated with oil and
graphite. Packing should be replaced when found deteriorated on site.
32.4 Plastic or metal plates (rust less) shall be provided to indicate the open/close status as well as
the use of each valve in the pump and tank rooms, and in the town main.
91
92
33. Butterfly Valves
a) Use for riser control valves.

b) Butterfly valves to have cast iron full lug body, stainless steel stems with bronze bushings
and aluminum bronze disc, valve shall be confirming to applicable National Standards or
BS (British Standards).
c) The stem journals will be a multiple seal design providing for completely independent
seals. The stem disc assembly will be such that the need for pins, screws or bolts is not
required. Positive stem retention to be provided to permit removal of handle or actuator
while under full operating pressure.
d) The valve seats to consist of replaceable neoprene or equivalent material.
e) Valves to size 150mm to be supplied with multi-position handles; size 200mm and above to
be supplied with enclosed worm gear
f) Valve body to be full-lug pattern to comply with and be compatible with flanges of
appropriate pressure rating. No semi-lug valves are acceptable.
34. OS & Y Gate Valves
a) Bolted bonnet, outside screw and yoke, wedge gate, iron body, bronze trim with flanged
ends, threaded or grooved ends.
b) Valves shall be used at riser control valves and fire pump control valves.
c) Gate valves to be back seating and suitable for repacking under pressure. Packing to be
non-asbestos.
d) Gate valves in normal sizes up to and including 50mm diameter and gate valves from
65mm and above shall conform to their applicable national standards or BS (British
Standards).
35. Check Valves
a) Check valves shall be of materials similar to the gate valves for the appropriate systems in
which they will be installed. All check valves shall be of quick closing type to eliminate the
sudden surge in the pipe line on closing.
b) Swing Type: Use for water and low-pressure general services: 50 mm and smaller with
screwed bonnet, screwed endto 65mm and larger with bolted bonnet, flanged end or
grooved end. Valves to have renewable bronze seat and disc.
c) Silent Type: Use wet riser pumps. Valves to have cast iron body and bronze or stainless-
steel trim and to be of the centre guide type, with flanged end or grooved end.
d) Working pressure shall be 150% greater than the system pressure and of minimum PN10.
36. Ball Valves
a) Use for sprinkler floor control valve trim, pump trim, hose reel system and as drain valves.
b) Provide ball valves of the bronze top-entry body type, having a straight-through full port
flow passage. Design to permit disassembly without removing body from line.
c) Construct seats and all gland packing of Teflon. Lever handle to be vinyl covered. Body to
be 2-piece screwed end.
 Provide lever for quarter turn operation; lever to indicate open or closed position.
92
93
d) When used as drain valves, provide with hose thread and brass cap with chain. Cap to be
rated for full system pressure.
e) Ball floats valves in nominal sizes up to and including 50mmdia. Shall be:
i. To BS1212 part 1
ii. In brass with copper float to BS1968
f) Ball float valves in nominal sizes up to and including 76mmdia. Shall be:
i. To BS1212 part 1
ii. In cast iron with bronze trim and copper ball float to BS1968
iii. With flanged ends, flanges to BS4504, part I, rated at working pressure
involved but in no case less than PN10.
37. Air Vents and Drain Valves
a) Air vents and drain valves shall be provided at high points and low points respectively in
all piping systems.
b) Air vents shall have gunmetal or brass bodies, non-ferrous or stainless-steel float and
guides, and noncorrodible valves and seats. Each automatic air vent shall be controlled by
a ball valve.
c) Drain valves shall be connected to the nearest building floor drain or drain point of
adequate size.
38. Valve List
Execution Service Type Size Ends

Up to 21kg./sq.cm. Gate To 50mm Thread
Gate 65mm to 250mm Flanged
Ball To 50mm Thread
Butterfly All Flanged
Check-Swing To 50mm Thread
Check-Swing 65mm and above Flanged
Check-Silent All Flanged
a) All valves shall be installed only in the upright vertical or horizontal positions unless
specifically otherwise required by the drawings.
b) All valves shall be installed in accessible locations to facilitate easy removal for repair or
replacement.
c) All valves shall be installed at convenient positions or operation from the floor.
d) Each valve shall have a purpose made reference number plate or label engraved or stamped
indicating the manufacturer's catalogue number, pressure and temperature ratings. Valves
shall be arranged so that clockwise rotation of the spindle will close the valve. Demo
labels are not acceptable.
93
94
39. Wet Pipe Sprinkler System
39.1 Sprinkler Heads: Quick response sprays type, with 15mm nominal discharge orifice. Ordinary
temperature rating 68°C throughout except where special conditions exist, which will require
higher temperature sprinklers or when indicated on the drawings. All heads shall designed as
per applicable National Standards or BS (British Standards).
40. Types:
a) Upright: Quick response factory bronze finish. Quick response for use in plant rooms and car
park.
b) Pendent: Quick response factory model chrome plated brass with matching escutcheon
/rosette in building core areas. 68oC rating, 15mm orifice.
c) Sidewall: Horizontal sidewall sprinkler 15mm orifice.
d) Samples shall be submitted for review and acceptance.
e) Sprinkler orifice size shall be 15mm.
f) In addition to the heads actually required, furnish a stock of extra sprinklers including a
minimum of six heads of each type and temperature rating used and two suitable socket
wrenches, contained in neat steel boxes, suitable for use as a service kit on the job. The steel
boxes shall be installed in the fire pump room and fire command centre.
41. Water Flow Switch
a) Paddle type, inserted into horizontal piping systems. The paddle shall actuate a pneumatic
time-delay mechanism between the paddle stem and the micro-switch. After the preset time
delay, the microswitch shall operate and either open or close the electrical circuit. Time
delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds. The normal factory setting is from 35 to 45
seconds. Wire flow switch to fire alarm panel.
b) The water side of the switches shall be completely separated from the electrical side.
Contacts shall be suitable for the working voltage and current of the circuits.
c) Water flow switches shall be capable of standing a test pressure of 21kg/sq.cm for six hours.
42. Sprinkler Control Valve Sets
42.1 Sprinkler control valve sets shall be as per applicable National Standards or BS (British
Standards). Each control valve set shall be complete with the following:
a) Main stop valve and subsidiary stop valve

b) Alarm valve
c) Water motor alarm gong
d) Pressure gauges to indicate „upstream‟ and „down-stream‟ system pressure
e) Test and drain valve
f) Every stop valve in the sprinkler installation including the main stop valve shall be secured
open by a leather strap and brass lock under the master key system.
94
95
42.2 The working pressure of alarm valve shall not be less than 1.25 times the static head difference
between the valve and the highest sprinkler on the installation and of minimum 12kg/sq.cm.
43. Inspector’s Test Connection (Open Drain)

43.1 Bronze female pipe connection with orifice equivalent to one sprinkler head flow..
44. Execution
44.1 Information included in this specification and of various agency requirements are given as a
guide only. The contract documents do not relieve Contractor's responsibility from providing
all work and equipment necessary to complete the installation in accordance with all
requirements.
45. Installation
a) No pipes or other apparatus shall be installed so as to interfere in any way with the full swing
of the doors. The arrangement, positions and connections of pipes, drains, valves, etc., shown
on the drawings shall be taken as a close approximation and while they shall be followed as
closely as possible, the right is reserved by the Architect to change the locations to
accommodate any conditions which may arise during the progress of the work without
additional compensation to such changes, provided that the changes are requested prior to the
installation of this work.
b) All piping shall drain back to the risers or be provided with drain valves. Special precautions
must be taken to avoid electrical work and ventilation ducts, and no piping shall pass below
lighting fixtures in luminous ceilings.
c) All piping shall be unexposed except in no-ceiling areas. Where required, heads shall be
located below ducts. Diffusers and lighting fixtures take preference in room layout.
d) No heads shall be nearer than 150mm to a ceiling support, and heads shall be installed in a
straight line.
e) In areas with restricted head room, heads and piping shall be tight to ceilings and provided
with guards.
f) Sprinkler heads below false ceiling shall be installed at the exact centre of ceiling tiles.
Positions shown on the fire services layout plans are for guidance only. The Contractor shall
be responsible for locating the sprinkler heads in the exact positions according to the
suspended ceiling layout drawings. The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary
bends, tees, etc. to divert the pipe work to avoid structural beams and any other mechanical
and electrical services installations to reach the sprinkler heads in their locations as shown on
the Drawings and as site conditions may dictate.
g) Intermediate level sprinkler heads shall be fitted with 75mm diameter metal water shield.
46. Sprinkler Coverage
a) For determination of sprinkler systems, spacing and sizing, the contractor must ensure that all
hazard classification is in line with the requirements as given in NBC/local fire authority CFO
guidelines and recommendations.
b) All areas of the building shall be sprinkled.
c) Pre-Calculated System: Provide automatic sprinkler system throughout the entire project. The
system shall be designed to provide a density based on BS requirements.
95
96
d) Provide drains at base of riser, valve sections inside building, ends of main runs, and at other
locations indicated or requiring same for complete drainage of systems. Drains shall be
valves and/or plugs as indicated and/or required. Pipe drains to locations as required.
47. Instrumentation
47.1 The diesel engine shall be provided with adequate instrumentation. The gauges etc. as required
are provided for provided for in the Engine Panel.
48. Hose Reel System
48.1 Rubber Hose
a) The rubber hose shall be non-kinking, braided rubber type manufactured with an inner rubber
tube or lining, a reinforcement of braided textile material, and an abrasion resistant rubber
cover. The reinforcement shall be by means of a single rayon braid or a double braid of
cotton.
b) The rubber hose shall be 25mm internal diameter. The minimum bursting pressure shall be
27kg./sq.cm. The length of the rubber hose shall be 36.5metres, unless otherwise indicated in
the drawing, with no joints in its entire length confirming to applicable National Standards or
48.2 Hose Reel Drum
a) The hose reel drum shall be of the swing-out suitable for holding 36.5m of rubber hose. The
hose reel components shall be of adequate strength and rigidity. The whole assembly shall be
so designed that the hose reel drum rotates round a horizontal spigot or shaft such that the
hose can be freely withdrawn in any direction confirming to applicable National Standards or
b) The hose reel drum shall extend not more than 360mm from the mounting surface and shall
have an overall diameter not exceeding 760mm. The side plates of the hose reel shall have a
continuous outer rim and shall be rigid in construction.
c) The diameter of the inner core on which the hose is wound shall be not less than 20mm.
When the full length of the hose is coiled on the hose reel without the use of abnormal tension
the rims on the side plates of the hose reel project at least 15mm beyond the external diameter
of the coiled hose at any point.
d) The fitting to which the hose is attached on the hose reel shall be arranged in such a way that
the hose is not restricted or flattened by the application of additional layers.
e) All burrs and sharp edges shall be removed and all waterways shall have a smooth finish.
The exterior of all components shall be rounded and smoothened to prevent injury during use.
f) All threaded of aluminum alloy components shall be coated with molybenishedlistate grease.
The hose reel waterways connecting the water supply to the hose, excluding the stop valve
and that part between the stop valve and hose reel, shall be constructed of non-ferrous
materials or stainless steel. The body of the waterways casting shall be machined and bearings
supported by a malleable cast iron wall bracket.
g) Where the hose reel is mounted in a cabinet there should be sufficient clearance between the
side of the cabinet and the hose reel to enable the hose to be re-wound on the reel in an
orderly fashion and ensure ease of withdrawal.
96
97
49. Nozzle
49.1 The shut-off nozzle shall be constructed of a corrosion resistant material of adequate strength.
The nozzle shall be adjustable to vary the throw and the flow rate and to shut off the flow. The
internal surface of the nozzle shall be finished to provide a smooth surface. The internal
diameter of the outlet shall be 10mm +0.075mm. The nozzle shall be able to project a jet not
less than 6mm.
50. Stop Valve
a) A 25mm stop valve, of a globe type, shall be provided for the connection of the hose reel to
the water supply. An indication of the open or shut positions shall be fixed or marked on the
wheel of the valve, and the body of the valve, except for the gate valves which shall be
marked with a directional arrow indicating the direction of flow through the valve. The valve
shall be threaded 25mm BSP parallel. The water connection through the rubber hose shall
permit the full flow of water to the hose without external leakage during any rotation of the
reel.
b) A union shall be fitted between the isolating stop valve on the feed pipe and each hose reel to
enable individual hose reels to be dismantled for maintenance or overhaul.
51. Color Identification and Marking
51.1 The sides of the reel shall be painted red and every hose shall be marked with the following
information:
a) Manufacturer's name, trade name or mark of the responsible vendor.

b) Instructions for operation and use in English which shall include the following:
i. Turn on stop valve to release nozzle.

ii. Run out hose.
iii. Turn on water at nozzle.
iv. The hose shall be fully charged before winding it onto reel.
v. Year of Manufacture.
52. Cabinet
a) Hose reel cabinets shall be provided by Contractor in all areas.

b) The cabinet provided by the contractor shall be standard exposed metal type with the
instruction plate. Text in instruction plate shall be 5mm high in English.
53. Plastic Sticker
53.1 Plastic sticker shall be provided inside the cabinet for as per the local Fire Authority
requirements.
97
98
54. Portable Fire Extinguishers
54.1 Fire Extinguishers
a) Portable extinguishers shall comply in all respects the applicable National Standards or BS
(British Standards) and supplied complete with brackets suitable for mounting on the walls or
columns of the buildings, including discharge nozzle and where applicable, regulator valve
for each extinguisher.
b) The type and size of fire extinguishers shall be as indicated on the drawings.
c) The body of fire extinguishers shall be of light weight alloy and shall stand a hydrostatic
pressure test of not less than 24kg/sq.cm with no sign of leakage.
d) Operation and maintenance details shall be clearly shown on the body of fire extinguishers.
54.2 Temperature Range
Extinguishers shall be suitable for use within a temperature range of at least 3oC to 50oC.
55. Execution
55.1 Mounting Height: Extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 9kg shall be installed so
that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 1.5m above the floor. Extinguishers having
gross weight greater than 9kg (except the wheeled types) shall be so installed that the top of
extinguisher is not more than 1.0m above the floor. The contractor shall provide and install all
mounting brackets and accessories.
56. Components
a) Dry Chemical: Dry chemical fire extinguishers shall conform to applicable National
Standard or British Standard (BS). Fire extinguisher shall be rated in accordance with BS
Standards with a capacity up to 75 kilograms as mentioned in drawing Class: B:C.
Automatic ceiling mounted type extinguisher shall be 4 to 6 KG as per the coverage area.
Extinguishers shall be mild steel powder coated construction with pressure gauge,
pneumatic tired steel carriage hand cart, pull pin, trigger and discharge hose. Fire
extinguisher safety standard shall be in accordance with UL 299.
b) Carbon dioxide: Carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall conform to applicable National
Standards/ British Standard (BS). Fire extinguisher shall be rated in accordance with
British Standards with a capacity up to 22.5 kilograms as mentioned in drawing, class
B:C. Extinguishers shall be mild steel powder coated construction with pressure gauge,
O-ring seal valve, and pneumatic tired steel carriage hand cart, pull pin, trigger and
discharge hose. Fire extinguisher safety standard shall be in accordance with UL 154.
c) Foam: Foam type of fire extinguishers shall conform to applicable National

Standard/British Standard (BS). Foam fire extinguishers shall be rated in accordance with
BritishStandards, Class B with a capacity up to 50 liters of AFFF biodegradable foam
agent, rated 20A:20B. Extinguishers shall be mild steel powder coated construction with
pressure gauge, pneumatic tired steel carriage hand cart, pull pin, trigger and discharge
hose. Foam type fire extinguishers safety standard shall be in accordance with UL 8.
98
99
d) Fire Extinguisher Carts: Fire extinguisher hand carts of formed structural grade
galvanized primed with thick base metal sized to fit the specified extinguisher.
Extinguisher shall be installed within combined hose reel cabinet, combined landing
valve, fire hose reel cabinet.
• Extinguisher CO² - 4.5 KG
• Extinguisher dry powder - 5 KG
57. Accessories
57.1 Signage: Instruction panel shall be etched metal affixed to the side of each extinguisher.
Instructions shall be in English.
a) Pressure gauge shall read in kg./sq.cm.
58. Fabrication
58.1 Cart Assembly: The carts shall be formed with right angles, at base and welded inside corner
joints. Handles shall be roll formed to the required shape.
58.2 Welding: Weld joints which are exposed after fabrication shall be continuous flush type. All
welding shall be done neatly and substantially by a process that will produce a smooth weld in
exposed areas. All weld splatters and burrs shall be removed by grounding prior to painting.
58.3 Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be dry and of proper temperature when coated, and free
of grease, oil, dirt, dust, grit, rush, loose mill scale, weld flush, slag, weld spatter, or other
objectionable substances. Surfaces which are specified to be primed shall be prepared in
accordance with the paint manufacturer‟s recommendations. Articles to be galvanized shall be
pickled before galvanizing. All other ferrous metal surfaces shall be cleaned by high-speed
power wire brushing or blasting. Welds shall be scraped, chipped, and brushed as necessary to
remove all weld spatter.
58.4 Edge grinding: Sharp corners of cut or sheared edges shall be ground to a radius as required to
improve paint adherence.
58.5 Shop Finishing: Unless otherwise specified all un-galvanized sheet steel shall be given a coat
of rust inhibitive primer which is compatible with the finish coat. Top or finish coat shall
consist of two coats of baked on enamel. Steel surfaces shall be prime coated as soon as
practicable after cleaning. Steel shall not be moved or handled until the shop coat is dry and
hard.
99
100
59. Installation
59.1 Manufacturer's Recommendations: Wheeled fire extinguishers shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
59.2 Extinguishers shall be installed as indicated on the drawing and as directed by the BREB
Representative.
59.3 Field Quality Control: Field quality control shall be maintained.
59.4 Testing: All extinguishers shall be inspected and tested in accordance with NBC, Relevant
National Standards / British Standards (BS).
59.5 Fire Extinguishers Schedule: Fire extinguishers schedule shall be as indicated on the drawing.
60. Fire Fighting Over Head Water Storage Tank
60.1 Water Storage Tank
a) Firefighting water storage tanks shall be reinforced concrete construction and shall be of
capacity and dimension as indicated in the drawings.
b) Tanks shall be complete with the following:
i. Manhole air and water tight cover and frame.

ii. Internal ladder stainless steel/ Foot Rests.
iii. Inlets and outlets as required on drawings.
c) Necessary perforations for the inlet and outlet pipes shall be provided. Storage tank shall
be equipped with overflow, warning pipes, and vent pipes.
d) The concrete tanks for fire and domestic systems shall be constructed by the Civil Works
Contractor. It is the responsibility of the contractor for firefighting system works to ensure
that the required sleeves/puddle flanges inserted in the concrete tanks at proper location &
levels. The Contractor should supply beforehand the necessary sleeves required, including
all puddle flanges and pipe fittings for the concrete water tank and all of the following:
i. Inlet pipe complete with ball valve, check valve and isolating valve.
ii. Vent pipe.
iii. Suction pipes with strainers.
iv. High and low water level controls as detailed on drawings.
e) Level switches giving overflow warning alarm, low water alarm, etc., as indicated on
drawings complete with wiring and conduits to the Fire Alarm control panel.
f) All necessary puddle flanges for the above pipes and other necessary controls.
g) The BMS control panel will monitor the following dry contact outputs from the Motor
Control Centre (MCC) at each location for each pump. Control Panel shall be provided
with hooter and shall be as per local Authority standards and requirements.
100
101
61. Level Controllers
a) All level controllers, level sensors, level switches and alarms shall be provided by the
contractor.
b) Each probe shall be of the correct length for its particular application and tank location.
Electrodes shall be polished stainless steel 20mm outside diameter. Electrode holders
shall be weather proof in all respect.
c) The earthing probes shall be connected and wired to the building earth system.
d) Each set of electrodes shall be installed inside a 200mm-diameter PVC pipe acting as a
wave barrier.
e) The level switch set shall be operated with a stepped down voltage at 24V maximum.
Stepped down transformer shall be provided for each set of control probes and shall be
installed inside centralized control cubicles inside pump room.
f) Provide interface unit at the pump control panel for the levels to be monitored by BMS.
g) The BMS control panel will monitor the following outputs from the Tank.
• BMS Tank High Level (O/P)
h) Whenever the liquid level in the tank reaches a high level, a high-level dry contact will be
provided at the level controller and monitored by the BMS panel (BMS panel and wiring
to BMS panel by others).
• BMS Tank Low Level (O/P)
i) Whenever the liquid level in the tank reaches a low level, a low-level dry contact will be
provided by the contractor at the level controller and monitored by the BMS panel (BMS
panel and wiring to BMS panel by others.
and information with the bid submittal for Firefighting system as follows:
a) Submit manufacturer's product data for each piece of equipment, component, system
proposed for use with its design, dimensions and layout, equipment characteristics,
size, material, dimensions and Hydrant connection requirements and system
parameters.
b) Technical literature for operation, control and maintenance
c) Complete list of BOQs for the Firefighting System package.
d) Clause by clause compliance of this specification.
e) Certified calibration test reports.
f) Packaging details.
g) Terms of manufacturer‟s warranty.
l) List of clients in last five years with their respective addresses, which were supplied
similar Firefighting system.
101
102
102
103
Specification# 40
Diesel Generator Set and Accessories
1. Scope
1.1 This specification is for supply of a diesel generating set and accessories to act as a backup
generator in case of failure of the main AC supply, complete in all respects for a three (3) story
building in phase -I, for Bangladesh Rural Electrification Board (BREB) material Acceptance
Testing Laboratory at Palli Biddyut Area, Savar Dhaka, Bangladesh.
1.2 The scope of supply covered by the specification consists of a, fully self-contained diesel
generator set in a weatherproof, sound attenuated enclosure with the PRIME POWER rating as
indicated. For purposes of this specification the prime power rating of the generator set means
the output available with varying load for an unlimited time, defined in accordance with ISO
8528.
2. Reference Standards and Manufacture:

2.1 The generator set and associated equipment supplied to this specification shall be designed,
tested, rated, and assembled in accordance with the following standards, latest edition:
 ISO 8528-Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engine Driven Alternating Current Generator

Sets
 ISO 3046-Reciprocating Internal Combustion Engines
 IEC 60034-Rotating Electrical Machines
 BS 5000-Rotating Electric Machines of Particular Types
 IEC 60947-Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear
2.2 Conformance to national standards only, such as Chinese, Indian, or Russian is not acceptable.
3.1 The Diesel Generator Set and accessories shall be manufactured at a plant that has fabricated
units of similar design and characteristics for a period not less than ten years and that holds
ISO: 9001 Certification for the quality management.
3.2 The generator set shall be new, unused, and of current production by a single manufacturer with
at least ten years of experience manufacturing similar equipment of an equivalent rating. The
manufacturer shall certify that the engine, alternator, controls and switchgear have been tested
as a complete system on equivalent representative production or engineering models.
103
104
4.1 The Diesel Generator Set shall be suitable for the laboratory building under the local service
5. Application
5.1 The Diesel Generator Set shall be suitable for the laboratory building under the local service
a) Frequency 50 Hz.
b) Voltage 415/240V three phase
c) Rated capacity at site conditions, not less than 300kW nor more than 350kW
6. Ratings
6.1 The generator set shall have a PRIME POWER output rating of at least 300kW and 375kVA at
1500 rpm, 50 Hz, at a load power factor of 80% lagging, under the site conditions specified in
Article 3.0, net of radiator fan and all parasitic loads.
Product Requirements
7. Diesel Engine:
7.1 General: The engine shall be a water-cooled, four-cycle compression ignition diesel engine
with a minimum of 12.5-liter displacement. It shall produce rated output when operating on
number 2 diesel fuel. The engine shall be equipped with governor, lube oil system, fuel system
including an integral base tank, intake air filters suitable for high dust conditions, and cooling
system.
7.2 Block Design: The complete engine block shall be machined from one casting. Designs
incorporating multiple blocks bolted together are not acceptable.
104
105
7.3 Governor: The engine governor shall be an electronic governor, programmable with software
provided with the order. The governor shall be enclosed in an environmentally sealed, die-cast
aluminum housing that isolates and protects electronic components from moisture and dirt
contamination. The governor shall adjust fuel delivery according to exhaust smoke, altitude and
cold mode limits. The governor shall be factory installed and wired and designed for operation
of the generator set in the islanded (isochronous) mode with steady state frequency regulation
of +/- 0.25% at all loads up to full load. Speed shall be sensed by a magnetic pickup off the
engine flywheel ring gear. A provision for remote speed adjustment shall be included allowing
adjustment of speed by +/- 5%. In the event of a DC power loss, the forward acting actuator
will move to the minimum fuel position.
7.4 Lubrication System: The engine shall utilize a gear-type, positive displacement, full pressure
lubricating oil pump and water-cooled lube oil cooler. Pistons shall be spray-cooled. The
system shall be equipped with a duplex replaceable oil filter, oil pressure gauge, dipstick and
oil drain.
8. Fuel System:
8.1 Integral Fuel Tank: A dual-wall fuel tank with at least 750 usable liters capacity shall be
integrated into the generator set base. An electric fuel transfer pump which exceeds the
maximum fuel consumed by the engine shall be provided to transfer fuel from the customer
provided external storage tank to the generator set base fuel tank along with manual and
automatic controls designed to maintain the level of fuel in engine base tank. Supply piping
connections for fuel suction/return lines to fuel tank, fuel supply/return lines to engine, and
emergency vent, shall be provided, along with local fuel fill, containment drain connection, and
fuel level gauge. The following accessories shall be provided: fuel in containment tank switch,
4-position 5%, 40%, 50% low and 90% high low fuel level switch for annunciation. The fuel
tank shall be provided with additional capacity at top and bottom to prevent spillage due to
thermal expansion of fuel and to accommodate sludge pickup, and shall have internal baffles to
reduce heat build-up.
8.2 Fuel Distribution: The fuel distribution system shall be entirely self-contained and shall
consist of an engine driven pump drawing fuel from the integral base tank, a fuel water
separator, a duplex fuel filter and appropriate controls. The fully duplex fuel filter shall have
replaceable elements located to prevent fuel from spilling onto genset batteries when the filter
is opened. The fuel water separator shall have a drain to allow removal of trapped water. All
fuel piping shall be black iron or flexible fuel hose rated for this service. No galvanized piping
will be permitted. Flexible fuel lines shall be rated for 300°F and 100 PSI (149°C and 689
kPA).
8.3 External Fuel Tank: An external double wall fuel tank of 5000-liter capacity shall be
provided, to be installed within 10 meters of the generator. The system shall be provided
complete with all accessories, sensors, meters necessary for accepting deliveries of fuel to the
external tank from a tanker truck and transferring fuel from the external tank to the generator
base tank, all under the control of an automatic control system. System shall be provided with
a pump for filling the day tank, protected from the weather, as well as a level indicator for the
main tank, accurate to within 5%. All fuel piping shall be of black iron and all piping shall be
contained.
8.4 Air Intake System: The engine shall be equipped with an air intake system with a heavy-duty
dual element air filter with pre-cleaner designed for high dust conditions with replaceable
cartridge or filter media, muffler and dust ejector.
105
106
8.5 Cooling System: The generator set shall be equipped with a rail-mounted, engine-driven
radiator with blower fan and all accessories. The cooling system shall be sized to operate at full
load conditions and 45°C ambient air entering the enclosure without de-rating the unit, and
with a 50/50 anti-freeze mixture. The radiator shall be filled with an extended life coolant with
a minimum estimated life of 6,000 hours or 6 years. The coolant formula shall contain no
phosphates or silicates, and it shall be recyclable. The cooling system shall permit full load
operations of the engine under all rated ambient conditions taking into account any enclosure
static pressure reduction.
8.6 Exhaust System: A complete exhaust system, consisting of a 35db rated silencer, flexible
stainless-steel exhaust coupling, vertical to horizontal elbow, and all flanged piping necessary
to expel exhaust gases shall be furnished. Exhaust system shall be properly sized and the
supplier shall provide support brackets such that the silencer and exhaust system weight is not
supported by the engine nor will exhaust system growth due to thermal expansion be imposed
on the engine. Any exhaust piping inside the enclosure shall be installed so that it does not
interfere with the functioning of the flexible exhaust fitting. The exhaust from the system shall
exit vertically and the output pipe shall be equipped with a damper to prevent the entry of water
into the exhaust system when the engine is not operating.
9. Starting System
9.1 Electric Starting System: A 24 VDC electric starting system shall be furnished.
9.2 Batteries: A lead-acid storage battery set of the heavy-duty diesel starting type shall be
provided. Battery voltage and ampere-hour capacity shall be compatible with the starting
system. Necessary cables and clamps shall be provided. The generator set manufacturer shall
warrant batteries for the duration of the generator set warranty period.
9.3 A battery box shall be provided for the batteries. It shall be treated to be resistant to
deterioration by battery electrolyte and construction shall be such that any spillage or boil-over
of battery electrolyte shall be contained within the box to prevent a direct path to ground.
9.4 The batteries shall be charged by an engine mounted alternator and integral control system
when the generator set is operating.
9.5 Battery Charger - Control Panel Mounted: A battery charger shall be furnished to
automatically recharge batteries from commercial power when generator set is not operating
and disconnect when generator set is in operation. AC input voltage shall be 240 volts, 60 Hz,
single phase and maximum output shall be no less than ten (10) amperes. Charger shall be
control panel installed and shall be regulated to ensure that the batteries are not overcharged.
10. Alternator
10.1 General: The alternator shall be of synchronous three-phase, single bearing, self-ventilated,
drip-proof design per the referenced standards and rated IP23, directly connected to the engine
flywheel housing with a flex coupling. The alternator shall meet performance class G3 of IEC.
Alternator shall have a rated phase to phase voltage of 415 volts at 50Hz and shall be sized to
supply full rated load of at the specified site conditions at 80% lagging power factor.
10.2 Windings: Alternator pitch shall be 0.667. The rotor shall, as a minimum, be capable of
surviving the effects of 125% over speed for 2 minutes. The permissible residual unbalance
permitted in the rotor, measured at maximum service speed (nominal + 25% over speed), must
not exceed the limits as described in ISO 1940/1 - G2.5.
106
107
10.3 Stator: The insulation material for the stator shall meet standards for Class H insulation and be
vacuum impregnated and fungus resistant. Temperature rise of the rotor and stator shall not
exceed Class F limits.
10.4 Stator Windings: Stator windings shall be connected in wye with the neutral brought out along
with the power connections to a separate terminal strip in the power connection cabinet.
11. Excitation System:

11.1 The excitation system shall enable the alternator to provide full rated output at 80% lagging
power factor and to sustain 300% of rated current for ten seconds during a fault condition.
11.2 Automatic Voltage Regulator: The factory installed and wired automatic voltage regulator
(AVR) shall be wired for constant voltage operating mode. In constant voltage mode, the AVR
shall maintain alternator output voltage within +/- 0.5% for any constant load between no load
and full load, and within +/-1% for load change from no-load to full load. The voltage
regulator shall be equipped with a provision for remote voltage adjustment of at least +/-5% at
the generator control panel.
11.3 The regulator shall be solid state with three phase sensing, electronic voltage buildup, volts per
Hertz roll-off selectable between 1:1 and 2:1 volts per Hz., overexcitation protection, loss of
sensing protection, temperature compensation, shall limit voltage overshoot on startup, and
shall be environmentally sealed.
11.4 The voltage regulation system shall be factory installed.
11.5 Dealer installed voltage regulators are not acceptable.
12. Anti-Condensation Space Heater:

12.1 Alternator shall be equipped with 240 VAC, single-phase space heater to minimize
condensation while the alternator set is idle. The heaters shall be capable of removal from the
assembled alternator. An automatic disconnect shall be provided to remove electrical power
upon engine start up.
13. Motor Starting Capability:

13.1 The generator set shall provide motor starting capability of at least 1200 kVA at 30%
instantaneous voltage dip.
14. Power Connection:

14.1 The circuit breaker/power terminal strips shall be physically isolated from the engine and
alternator so as to minimize vibration from the rotating machinery. A flexible design shall be
incorporated in the power connection from the alternator to the circuit breaker/power terminal
strips. The cables will be insulated within an appropriate conduit.
107
108
15. Circuit Breaker:

15.1 Supplier shall provide a circuit breaker, 3 pole, 600V rated, housed in a IP22 enclosure, with a
shunt trip and a current rating appropriate for the kVA output of the generator set at the rated
voltage. The breaker shall utilize a solid-state trip unit and trip settings shall be adjustable in
the field. The breaker shall be UL Listed and connected to engine/generator safety shutdowns.
The circuit breaker shall be equipped with two sets of form C auxiliary switches linked to the
main contacts for Purchaser use. Breaker shall be housed in an extension terminal box which is
isolated from vibrations induced by the generator set. Terminal bars, sized for bolted terminals
for 2x150mm2 copper or aluminum interconnection cables from the generator set to the
transformer, shall be supplied on the load side of breaker.
16. Control Panel

16.1 General: Supplier shall provide a package mounted engine control panel for complete control
and monitoring of the engine and generator set functions. Panel shall include manual start/stop
operation; adjustable cycle cranking, digital AC metering (0.5% true rms accuracy) with phase
selector switch, digital engine monitoring, shutdown sensors and alarms with horn and reset,
adjustable cool down timer and emergency stop push-button. Panel shall incorporate self-
diagnostics capabilities and fault logging. Control shall be selectable for automatic or manual
operation, and when in automatic mode, shall implement auto start and automatic transfer of
load following a main supply failure.
16.2 Critical components shall be environmentally sealed to protect against failure from moisture
and dirt. Components shall be housed in an IP22 enclosure.
17. Digital Metering:

17.1 Provide the following digital readouts:
a) Engine oil pressure

b) Coolant temperature
c) Engine RPM
d) System DC Volts
e) Engine running hours
f) Alternator AC volts
g) Alternator AC amps by phase
h) Alternator frequency
i) Instantaneous three phase kW demand on alternator
j) Percentage of rated Power
k) Three phase KVA
l) Power Factor
m) Three phase kWh (cumulative), accurate to +/-1% or better at all loads from 10% of
n) set rating to full load
18. Alarm Panel-Annunciator:

18.1 Provide a factory installed and wired annunciator panel with the following indications for
protection and diagnostics
a) Low oil pressure

b) High water temperature
c) Low coolant level
108
109
d) Overspeed
e) Overcrank
f) Emergency stop depressed
g) Low coolant temperature
h) Low voltage in battery
i) Control switch not in auto. position
j) Low fuel main tank
k) Battery charger ac failure
l) High battery voltage
19. Programmable Electric Protection Panel:

19.1 Provide programmable protective relay functions that trip the circuit breaker to include the
following:
a) Under-voltage
b) Over-voltage
c) Over-frequency
d) Under-frequency
e) Reverse power, field adjustable for 0-20 second trip delay and a trip threshold of
i. 2%-20% of full power.
f) Overcurrent (phase and ground or residual)
g) KW level (overload)
20. Control Panel Installation:

20.1 The control, annunciation and protection panel enclosure shall be isolated from the vibration
induced by the rotating mass of the generator set. Access to the panels shall not be blocked by
any portion of the generator set.
21. Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS)

21.1 The unit shall be provided with an automatic transformer switch to be installed inside the
building adjacent to the main breaker panel. Both the mains lines and the generator lines shall
be run to the ATS and thence to the main breaker panel.
21.2 The ATS shall comply with IEC 60947 and be provided with a four-pole circuit breaker and
auto transfer switch arrangement rated for full load of the generator or mains transformer,
whichever is larger. All contactors in the ATS shall be of the four-pole type, that is that the
neutral of the generator shall not be interconnected to the mains neutral but shall be connected
to the load neutral when the generator is in operation.
21.3 The ATS shall sense single phase and three phase failure of the mains supply or any variation
in supply voltage. The level of supply voltage depression and time delay prior to initiating the
transfer sequence shall be user-selectable. Once the transfer sequence is initiated, the ATS
shall issue a signal to start the generator and verify that the generator has started, wait a user
programmable period and then disconnect the mains supply, verify that the mains supply is
disconnected, and close the contactor transferring the load to the generator. System shall detect
fault conditions and automatically abort the transfer as follows:
a) Generator failure to start

b) Generator shutdown
c) Mains contactor (one or more phases) failure to open
109
110
d) Generator contactor (one or more phases) failure to close

e) Fault conditions within the load
21.4 ATS shall have an annunciator or other means for advising operator of the cause of a failure of
the type indicated.
21.5 ATS shall automatically restore the load to the mains supply and shut down the generator upon
reestablishment of mains service following a user selectable time period to ensure stability.
22. Sound Attenuated Weather Protective Enclosure

22.1 Weather Protection: A 14- gauge cold rolled steel weather protective enclosure with a
minimum ambient capability of 45°C shall be provided. The factory-installed engine generator
set enclosure shall be performance tested as a package with the Listed and labeled engine
generator set and is considered rainproof in accordance with UL 2200 or equivalent
performance requirements for outdoor-use units. A decal indicating the enclosure meets these
requirements shall be affixed to the enclosure. In light of the location of the unit, the enclosure
panels shall be fabricated of galvanized steel and all fasteners, hinges, and latches shall be
stainless steel. The enclosure shall be painted utilizing a paint system specifically recognized
for coastal environments.
22.2 Sound Attenuation: The enclosure shall reduce sound levels to comply with the Level 2
requirements of European Community regulation 2000/14/EC which became effective on 3
January, 2006, and manufacturer shall provide certification showing such compliance. The
enclosure shall be designed to permit operation at full load of the unit while limiting the sound
level at 1m from any point on the enclosure to not more than 85dBA. The enclosure design
will minimize noise break-out if and when adjustments are made to the control panel during
periods of generator set operation. The enclosure shall have a safety glass control panel
viewing window for easy monitoring of operation. Enclosure shall have lockable, gasketed
doors to provide secure access to fuel fill, oil fill, coolant, and battery. Coolant, fumes disposal
lines and oil drains shall be piped to the base frame. Vibration isolators shall be installed
between genset and base to minimize engine vibration transmitted to base, enclosure, control
panel and circuit breaker.
22.3 The enclosure shall have an externally mounted "mushroom-head" red emergency stop button
for safe operation. Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to
immediately shut down, and be locked out from automatic restarting.
23. Lifting and Setting:

23.1 The enclosure and assembled engine generator set shall be provided with lifting lugs on the
base and with jacking pads at the lifting lug locations. The assembled engine generator set
shall be designed to be self-supporting and to be movable both by being jacked up and moved
on rollers under the base, and by being lifted by a crane using a spreader-bar.
24. Grounding and Bonding:

24.1 All non-energized parts of the genset and its enclosure shall be bonded or connected the base
frame of the unit, and the base frame shall be provided with two welded steel pads at diagonally
opposite corners of the unit for connection of external ground leads. The ground pads shall be
drilled with two holes, spaced 1 ¾” on centers and tapped for ½” Unified National Coarse
(UNC) thread.
110
111
25. System Responsibility:

25.1 The specified generator set and all accessories shall be supplied in its entirety by a single
manufacturer, and such manufacturer shall be solely responsible for the performance and
integration of all aspects of the scope of supply.
26. Warranty:
26.1 The manufacturer's standard warranty shall in no event be for a period of less than two (2)
years from date of initial start-up of the system and shall include repair parts, labor, reasonable
travel expense necessary for repairs at the job site, and expendables (lubricating oil, filters,
antifreeze, and other service items made unusable by the defect) used during the course of
repair. Running hours shall not be a limiting factor for the system warranty by either the
manufacturer or servicing distributor. Submittals received without written warranties as
specified will be rejected in their entirety.
27. Installation, Testing and Commissioning:

27.1 Installation, Testing and Commissioning shall be the responsibility of the Vendor.
27.2 Upon successful testing and commissioning, the Diesel Generator Set and allied equipment
shall be handed over to the BREB nominated representatives in fully functional form. The
supplier shall provide in advance the physical layout plan and civil works/foundation drawings
for installation to BREB for approval.
28. Operating and Maintenance Manual

28.1 The Diesel Generator Set shall be provided with detailed operating and maintenance manual
and user‟s guide containing technical specifications, safety warnings, important technical data
and circuit diagrams in English language.

29.1 The supplier shall conduct training sessions to REB staff on the use of the Generator Set. User
shall be given training on safe operation of the machines, operation and maintenance and use of
controls, emergency, safety etc. including other functions and features.
30. Tests
conformance type tests have been performed successfully on the machines of the Diesel
Generator Set
30.2 Acceptance Tests: Acceptance tests will be conducted before shipment. Test protocol shall be
provided by the supplier and approved by the client. If unit fails the acceptance tests the offered
Generator Set shall be rejected.
111
112
31. Name Plate

d) Factor of safety
f) Manufacturer logo
g) Weight and size
h) Power, voltage and frequency
i) Essential Circuit diagram
j) Insulation type
k) Applicable standards
l) All other important data as necessary

site in Bangladesh.

g) Bar code
h) Additional handling and shipping instructions shall be obtained from BREB, as
applicable.
33. Warranty
33.1 The manufacturer's standard warranty shall in no event be for a period of less than two (2)
years from date of initial start-up of the system and shall include repair parts, labor, reasonable
travel expense necessary for repairs at the job site, and expendables (lubricating oil, filters,
antifreeze, and other service items made unusable by the defect) used during the course of
repair. Running hours shall not be a limiting factor for the system warranty by either the
manufacturer or servicing distributor. Submittals received without written warranties as
specified will be rejected in their entirety.
112
113

34.1 Submittals: The supplier/manufacturer shall provide hard and soft copies of the technical data,
catalogues and information with the bid submittal Generator set shall include the following
information:
a) Factory published specification sheet showing the Prime Power ratings of the unit, generator
voltage and frequency, and confirming items of equipment, both standard and optional, being
supplied.
b) Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets of all auxiliary components such as isolators, battery
charger, silencer, exhaust flex, main circuit breaker, etc.
c) Dimensional elevation and layout drawings of the generator set, enclosure and transfer
switchgear and related accessories
d) Total weight and shipping weight of the equipment
e) Drawings showing the type, size and spacing of the electrical connection lugs for purposes of
ensuring adequate connections.
f) Engine mechanical data at varying loads up to full load, including heat rejection, exhaust gas
flows, combustion air and ventilation air flows, guaranteed noise data and fuel consumption.
g) Alternator electrical data including temperature and insulation data, cooling requirements,
excitation ratings, voltage regulation, voltage regulator, efficiencies, waveform distortion and
telephone influence factor.
h) Generator resistances, reactances and time constants.
i) Generator motor starting capability expressed at 30% instantaneous voltage drop.
j) Control panel, annunciator and protection panel features, including confirmation of auto-
parallel capability as required by these specifications
k) Circuit breaker and contactor characteristics.
l) Manufacturers and dealers written warranty.
m) ISO 9001 certifications for the factories where major components are manufactured or
assembled.
n) Manufacturer‟s certifications of experience and integrated testing as required in Article 5.0.
o) List of recommended spare parts for 5000 hours of operation, per Section 7.6.
i. Certified calibration test reports.
ii. Packaging details.
iii. Terms of manufacturer‟s warranty.
iv. Manufacturer‟s certificate attesting to 10 years of experience in manufacturing.
v. Statement of country of origin.
vi. Copy of ISO:9001 Certification for the manufacturing plant.
vii. Copies of test certificates evidencing completion of qualification tests.
m) List of clients in last five years with their respective addresses, which were supplied
Diesel Generator Set with Accessories.
n) Confirmation in writing that the equipment and materials will be supported technically
and in parts availability for a minimum of 10 years from the date installed.  
34.3 Clause by clause conformance of this specification.
34.4 Complete list of BOQs offered with Diesel Generator Set.
113
114
Guaranteed Technical Particulars-Emergency Generator
Bidder to list offered capability. Statement of “Comply” is not acceptable.
Item Requirement of BREB Offered

Type
Enclosed, tropicalized, diesel generator with Prime
Power Rating
Manufacturer and
Model No. Bidder to Supply
Standards  ISO 8528

 ISO 3046
 IEC 6003
 BS 5000
 IEC 60947
Min. Prime
Power Rating Bidder to state actual values.
Minimum 300ekW, net of radiator fan, at ISO
conditions
(375kVA at 80% power factor)
Rated
Voltage and Bidder to state
Frequency 415/240V three phase
50Hz, 1500 RPM
1.1 Bidder to State
Application 2.1
Conditions  Tropical Environment
 High dust exposure
15C to +40C
Operating
Temperature
Range
 Isochronous- No paralleling capability
Governor  Regulation +/-0.25% at all loads up to full load
 Manual speed adjustment +/- 5%
Starting
24V electric start using batteries
Battery
Charging  Charging with belt driven alternator when
engine on
 Control mounted 120VAC off site powered
battery charger to charge batteries when
engine is off
Generator Bidder to List

 Synchronous three phase, four wire
114
115
wyeconnected
 Self-ventilated with integral fan
 Drip-proof, IP23
 375kVA @ 80% power factor
 415VAC three phase
 Class H insulation and Class F temp rise
 Fungicide impregnated
 125% over speed rating
 Permanent magnet excitation
 Tropicalized, fungus resistant, vacuum
impregnated
 120VAC anti-condensation heater, off board
powered
 Neutral brought out
Voltage  Island (constant voltage) mode

Regulator  Regulation +/- 0.5% for step change of 3% in
speed, and
 +/-1% for step change from no-load to full
load
 Manual voltage adjusts +/- 5%
Control Panel
Package mounted electronic control and alarm panel
with the following features:
Bidder to List
Circuit Bidder to list

Breaker
Package mounted three pole circuit breaker with
electrical shunt trip from the control panel and
electronic, user settable trip unit (no thermo-magnetic
trip units allowed)
Air Filter
Dual replaceable element, heavy duty, dust
suppressing
Fuel and Oil Filter

Duplex fuel filter with water separator
Duplex oil filter
Internal Fuel
Tank Dual-wall engine-base mounted fuel tank with a
capacity of not less than 700 liters with vent,
overflow piping, level gauge and electric fuel transfer
pump with auto start and stop to fill base tank
automatically
External Fuel Dual Wall external fuel tank 5,000 liters capacity
115
116
Tank with pumps, valves, controls, and level indicator for

automatic filling of tank from truck and transfer to
internal fuel tank.
Automatic Automatic transfer switch with user selectable
Transfer detection levels and time delays, four pole contactors,
Switch four pole circuit breaker, error detection sensors and
annunciator
Cooling
system Unit mounted radiator sized for 50C inlet temp
Exhaust Residential grade silencer installed inside of sound

silencer attenuating enclosure
Enclosure Unit installed in sound attenuating weather
proof corrosion resistant enclosure.
 Complies with Level 2 of EU 2000/14/EC
 Max sound pressure level 85dBA at 1m.
 Enclosure painted with epoxy or powder coated
 All fasteners, hinges and door hardware to be
stainless steel
 Enclosure shall be provided with lifting lugs to
allow sling lifting of entire unit.
Data to be
supplied with  Filled out Guaranteed Parameter Table
proposal  Manufacturer and catalog number of generator
and control, including documentation
demonstrating compliance with the required
capabilities
 Outline drawing of assembled unit showing all
dimensions and weights
 Certification that the plant(s) producing the unit
and the control has been engaged in producing
equipment of similar ratings for a period of at
least ten years.
 Copy of ISO 9001:2015 certifications for the
manufacturing plant
Warranty
Manufacturer‟s standard warranty of not less than
two years from date of delivery
Spare Parts
(quote Parts recommended for 5,000 hours of operation for
separately) each unit but not less than
 Air, oil, fuel/water separating, and fuel filters,
including gaskets for replacement at
recommended intervals
 One set of all belts for radiator fan and
alternator
 One voltage regulator module
116
117
SECTION VI
C. CIVIL
4.0 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

FOR
BUILDING WORKS
117
118
4.0General Technical Requirements
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause No. Description Page No.

4.1 Introduction 121
4.2 Design and Construction Standards 121
4.3 Units of Measurement 122
4.4 New Three (3) Storied Testing Laboratory Building 122
4.5 Site Analysis and Topographical Survey 123
4.6 Subsoil Investigations 123
4.7 Laboratory Testing 124
4.8 Bulk Earthworks 124
4.9 Building Foundations 125
4.10 Civil Work 125
4.11 Design and Construction Requirements and Interchangeability 127
4.11.1 General Requirements 127
4.11.2 Specific Requirements 128
4.12 Plant and Equipment Identification 128
4.12.1 Identification on Drawings 128
4.12.2 Labels and Nameplates 129
4.13 Safety and Security 129
4.13.1 Interlocks 129
4.13.2 Locks, Padlocks, and Key Cabinets 129
4.14 Commissioning Spares 130
4.15 Painting and Cleaning 130
4.16 Galvanized Work 132
4.17 Steel Pipe Work 132
4.18 Bolts, Studs, Nuts and Washers 133
4.19 Architectural and Structural Requirements of Buildings 133
4.19.1 Architectural Planning and Design 133
4.19.2 Structural Design 134
4.20 Utility Services 134
4.21 Fire Detection and Protection Facilities 134
4.22 Preparation of the Site 135
4.23 Temporary Buildings on Site 136
4.24 Access to the Site 136
4.25 Site Drainage 136
4.26 Site Maintenance during Construction 137
118
119
4.0 Scope of Work:
The site address is as below:
- Palli Biddyut Area, Savar Dhaka, Bangladesh
The brief scope of work comprises of, but not limited to, the following:
A. Construction of a three (3) storied RCC building but structurally designed for eight (8)
stories on piling foundation and structural columns etc. and with special loading
requirements of power transformer testing bay floor area with load bearing capacity up to
80 ton min., with provision of an overhead moving crane (horizontal and vertical) up to
100 ton capacity for loading/unloading of power & distribution transformers, construction
of rail track and trolley for movement of power transformer and other associated works
with the Building like external development, boundary wall, installation of distribution
transformer for power supply, diesel generator foundation, service rooms , other ancillary
civil works, etc.  
B. External cladding and finishing work in accordance with applicable PWD standards and
codes for all types of construction materials (Portland cement, concrete, sand & steel) and
finishing materials (cement concrete flooring, marble tile flooring, ceramic tile work,
terrazzo flooring, split tile work etc.). The work includes clearance of site and layout of
building, excavation, filling/backfilling and disposal, thermite proofing, steel
reinforcement, damp proof course, brick masonry, concrete block, wood work, kitchen
work, surface rendering, marble chip wall coating, steel doors and windows, metal cover
over, expansion joints, roofing and water proofing, aluminum doors and windows,
painting, polishing, miscellaneous metal works, thermal insulation, protective painting,
supply & storage of material etc.
C. Public health engineering works, which includes piping and allied works for drainage,
sanitary and storm drainage, sewerage piping, wash rooms/toilets, pumping system, pipes
& fittings, valves & strainers, valve installation, flushing, testing & sterilization, water
connection, extension joints & extension loopsetc. for the entire facility.
D. Fire safety provisions, fire alarm system, fire water sprinklers, pumps, motors etc. as per
specification.
E. Compliance to green building norms as per assigned / as per international standards.
F. Passenger lifts, cargo lifts, external paving and car parking.
G. Electrical works, laboratories equipment works, power cables, wires and chords with
associated accessories, PVC conduits & accessories, point wiring, circuit wiring and
socket outlet wiring, main LV switchboard and connections, distribution boards with
connections, supply and installation of light fixtures for adequate illumination and lumens
on floor as per codes and standards, fans, air conditioners, telephone network, CCTV,
public address system.
H. Grounding, bonding and shielding as advised by the client.
119
120
I. Miscellaneous works including site office and other common items as per Schedule of
Quantities.
J. Preparation and submission of detailed and complete set of Civil works BOQs, Electrical
works BOQs, Air-Conditioning BOQs, and Plumbing works BOQs for review and
approval by the client's authorized representatives. The materials shall be from approved
suppliers and supplier's list shall be got approved from client or the Project Manager.
K. Preparation and submission of detailed and complete set of Civil & Architectural
drawings (Ground floor plan, First floor plan, Second floor plan, Sections, Building
elevation, Ceiling plans details, Bath rooms, Kitchen, Structural drawings, Schedules of
columns , Type L-Section of Columns, Reinforcement details of Columns, Footing layout
plan, X-Section details, Footing X-Section details, RCC walls, details of water proofing,
Lift details, Stair sections details, Lintel Beams & Parapet wall, floor plan beams, Floor
plan reinforcement, floor beam details, floor beams framing plan, floor slab
reinforcement, transformer testing bay floor reinforcement plan etc.).
L. Preparation and submission of detailed and complete set of Electrical drawings (Wiring
diagrams SLDs, Lighting & Power DBs, ceiling coordination and illumination layout
plan, raw power socket layout plan, air-conditioning and, power provision layout plan,
Fire alarm, PA system, CCTV lay out plan, cable route and cable tray layout plan,
Telephone networking plan, Lightning protection plan etc.).
M. Preparation and submission of detailed and complete set of Sanitation drawings (Water
supply network, overhead water tank, Roof drainage plan, Soil, Sullage, Water disposal
plan, Sanitation, Bath room Plans, Kitchen plan, Lab. plans etc.)
120
121
4.1 Introduction
This contract is being tendered as a turnkey contract, in which the selected Contractor will be
responsible for carrying out all civil works designs, including preparing working drawings and
specifying materials to be usedin all temporary and permanent works. This section describes
the General Technical Requirements for all civil works, which include earthworks, the
construction of foundations, structures, architectural features and all associated works required
for REB Material Testing Laboratory Building, fitting out structures, buildings and associated
works, and erecting, installing and commissioning in setting up individual laboratories. This
section shall be read in conjunction with the Project requirements, Schedules and Drawings.
The Contractor shall appoint a team of qualified and experienced engineers, architects and
other specialists to undertake the detailed design of all civil, architecture, electrical, mechanical
and associated works, and shall submit detailed and complete set of designs, drawings, bill of
quantities -BOQs (for Civil, Electrical and Mechanical works)with the supporting calculations
and estimations to the Project Manager for review and approval before site work commences.
4.2 Design and Construction Standards
The design and construction shall conform to the latest edition of the relevant codes of
practice and standards listed below and in individual clauses in this document relating to
specific materials or practice. Any proposed substitution for the listed standards by an
equivalent standard shall be subject to approval by the Employer.
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation codes for site
access road design
ACI 318-89 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BNBC (Bangladesh National Building Code) with requirements for building
works
BS 12 Portland Cement
BS EN 124 Gully and Manhole Tops for Vehicular and Pedestrian Areas
BS 812 Testing Aggregates
BS 882 Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete
BS 1387 Specification for Screwed and Socketed Steel Tubes
BS EN ISO 1461 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Fabricated Iron and Steel Articles
BS 1881 Testing Concrete
BS EN 1992-1-1 Design of Concrete Structures (includes foundations)
BS EN 1997-1 Geotechnical Design
BS 2853 Design and Testing of Overhead Runway Beams
BS 3148 Methods of Testing for Water for Making Concrete
BS 3921 Clay bricks
BS 4449 Steel Bars for the Reinforcement of Concrete
BS 5262 External Renderings
BS 5395 Stairs, Ladders and Walkways
BS 5572 Sanitary Pipe Works
121
122
BS 5628 Code of Practice for use of Masonry

BS 5930 Code of Practice for Site Investigations
BS 6031 Code of Practice for Earthworks
BS 6367 Code of Practice for Drainage of Roofs and Paved Areas
BS 6399: Part1 Code of Practice for Dead and Imposed Loads
BS 6399: Part 2 Code of Practice for Wind Loads
BS 6465 Sanitary Installations
BS 6651 Code of Practice for Protection of Structures against Lightning
BS 6700 Design, Installation, Testing and Maintenance of Services Supplying
Water for Domestic Use
BS 8004 Code of Practice for Foundations
BS 8005 Sewerage
BS 8100 Lattice Towers and Masts
BS 8102 Code of Practice for Protection of Structures Against Water
BS 8110 Structural Use of Concrete
BS 8206-2 Lighting for Buildings
BS 8215 Code of Practice for Design and Installation of Damp-proof Courses in
Masonry
BS 8290 Suspended Ceilings
BS 8301 Code of Practice for Building Drainage
4.3 Units of Measurement
All designs and measurements in this Contract shall be provided in the International System of
Units (SI) in accordance with the provisions of ISO 31 and ISO 1000.
4.4 New Three (3) Storied Testing Laboratory Building (Foundations Design and
Structure Columns for Eight (8) Stories)
Three (3) storied buildings (foundation and structure columns for eight stories)shall be
designed and constructed to establish a material acceptance test laboratory,with associated
work including thirteen (13) individual testing laboratories, transformer testing bay (floor
load bearing strength of 80ton-min.), Overhead loading/unload crane (100 ton), cargo lift,
provision of rail with cart, executive rooms, conference rooms, toilet facilities, service road,
fencing work, landscaping and beautification work and other related works.
The Contactor shall be responsible for the design and construction of the testing laboratory
building and associated work, which will include the following:
 Topographical survey as part of site analysis
 Subsoil investigation, sampling and laboratory testing
 Master plan including services road (if applicable), landscaping (beautification
work) as per respective site condition
 Conceptual alternative studies of site plans shall be undertaken for individual sites,
study and architectural planning of individual units. The site plan shall consider the
building and other facilities/utilities like pavement, parking, lighting networks,
landscaping and boundary wall, gates etc.
 Foundation works as per soil test reports
122
123
 Architectural plan, section, all side elevation including 3-D perspective of the
building.
 Structural design as per present code of practices in Bangladesh (BNBC), detail
drawings for construction works.
 All required temporary works.
 Earth works requirements as per site condition.
 Time schedule/work programme, BOQ including rates and all other document,
Maintenance and Operation Manual as required for the process.
4.5 Site Analysis and Topographical Survey
The proposed Acceptance Test Laboratory Building shall be located in Savar Polli Biddyut
Area, Dhaka, Bangladesh. The Contractor shall carry out a topographical survey of the
proposed site prior to design work commencing, using the most modern survey equipment
available in the country. The Contractor shall first establish a benchmark on or immediately
adjacent to each site on a permanent structure, and establish its level relative to the nearest
PWD benchmark. Detailed digital plans of each site shall be prepared using Auto-CAD at a
scale agreed by the Project Manager showing all existing physical features and other
information as listed below and, to the extent necessary, the survey shall extend beyond the
site boundaries to capture adjacent information:
(a) contours at intervals agreed by the Project Manager, extending into the immediate
surroundings of the site;
(b) boundary line of the site;
(c) above ground physical features such as roads, including the nearest National or
other main road, tracks, structures, utilities and plantations;
(d) the location of below ground utilities including piped water supply, gas, drainage,
sewerage and tube wells;
(e) the highest flood level (HFL) at the site and its surrounding areas, related to the
benchmark;
(f) the nearest points at which connections could be made to existing water, electricity
and gas supplies, if available
4.6 Subsoil Investigations
Any previous soil test reports, if available, for the site will be provided by the Employer.
However, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for all foundation design (for 8 storied
building) and must conduct his ownsub-soil investigations at this site, the main purpose of
which is to determine, within practical limits, the stratification, ground water table and
engineering properties of the soils underlying the sites of the proposed buildings. The
principal properties of interest shall be the strength, bearing capacity and settlement
characteristics of the underlying soils. Efficient, safe, economical design and construction can
be achieved only through adequate evaluation of soil conditions of the proposed construction.
The Contractor may appoint a sub-contractor(if required) to carry out the site investigations
but all work and all labs work shall be witnessed by one of his own staff, who shall
countersign all recorded data.
The record of all boring shall include but not limited to the following information:
123
124
(a) Size of the casing (if used)

(b) Number of blows per 300mm required to drive the sampling spoon and data should
be recorded every 1.5 m intervals.
(c) The elevation of the ground surface referred to an established datum
(d) Location and depth of boring and its relation to the proposed construction
(e) Elevation at which samples are taken
(f) Elevation of the boundaries of soil strata
(g) Description of soil strata encountered and any particular unusual or special
condition such as loss of water in the earth and rock strata, boulders, cavities and
obstructions, use of special type of samplers, traps etc.
(h) The level of ground water together with a description of how and when ground
water level was observed
A minimum of sixteen (16) boreholes or augurs shall be drilled at laboratory building site and
if the results vary across the site, the Project Manager shall determine whether and how many
additional boreholes shall be drilled.
4.7 Laboratory Testing

The following soil tests shall be performed in an independent recognized testing laboratory
approved by the Project Manager for evaluation of soil parameters:
(a) Grain size analysis
(b) Specific gravity
(c) Unit weight (wet & dry)
(d) Natural moisture content
(e) Unconfined compression strength
(f) Direct shear
(g) Consolidation test
The Contractor‟s Soil Investigation Reports for the site shall propose full details of
foundations and loading thereon and shall provide estimates of total settlements and
differential settlements of the underlying soil deposits and substantiate the recommendations
regarding type of foundation. The site investigations and analysis of the data in the Test
Reports shall contain but not be limited to the following:
(a) Location of ground water level
(b) Bearing capacity of the soil
(c) Comparison of alternative types and/or depths of foundation
(d) Data on soil parameters and properties
(e) Settlement predictions
(f) Risks, if any to property adjacent to the site.
(g) End bearing value and skin friction for pile design
124
125
4.8 Bulk Earthworks
The existing level of the site shall be either 600 mm above the HFL or equal to the level of
the nearest main road to the site, whichever is the higher, and also determined such that water
shall not drain from the approach road or main road to the site. It is the Contractor‟s
responsibility to determine the fill height required from the topographical survey data in
accordance with the above criteria.
Slope protection works shall also be designed and carried out. This protection should be
mainly by the construction of reinforced concrete retaining walls, pre-cast concrete piles or
seasoned wooden piles, which shall be dependent on the height of filling required as well as
existing sub-soil. The Contractor may select and design the type of retaining wall considering
the Soil Investigation Reports and the following:
(a) RCC retaining wall shall be selected where the filling height is above 3.0m. The
foundation of the wall shall be dependent on the sub soil report.
(b) Pre-cast pile shall be considered where the filling height between 2.0m to 3.0m. The
spacing of the pile shall depend on the filling height and size of pile. A rectangular
RCC pre-cast slab of size 1.0m x 0.5m shall be used and is to be fixed with the pile
by proper bolting to retain the soil.
(c) Seasoned wooden pile shall be considered, where the filling height is below 2.0m. A
metal sheet with proper treatment shall be fixed with the pile by proper bolting to
retain the soil. The spacing of the pile depends on the filling height and diameter of
pile
The fill materials shall be deposited and spread in successive uniform horizontal layers of
about 150rnrn thick and compacted by use of mechanical 1.5 ton “Vibro” compactor or other
approved devices to a 98% standard dry density in road and pavement sub-base and 95%
standard dry density for other areas. In filling /back filling against a newly constructed
structure precaution must be taken so that the structure is well matured to take the thrust of
filling and when filling against a wall, the filling shall be carried out from both sides
simultaneously.
Tests shall be carried out at an accredited independent and recognized testing laboratory to
ascertain the nature of the fill material and the degree of compaction obtained for the filled
material for which samples shall be taken and transported to the recognized laboratory by the
Contractor at his cost and as directed by the Project Manager.
4.9 Building Foundations
The type of foundations required shall be selected and designed by the Contractor based on
the results of the subsoil investigation and testing program at the material testing Laboratory
site. The foundations shall be deep (pile) foundations according to subsoil conditions. The
foundation design shall be robust and satisfactorily meet or exceed the technical requirements
of an eight (8) storied building. The Contractor shall submit his foundation design with full
supporting calculation for the approval of the Project Manager. Design shall be according to
BS EN 1992-1-1 and BS EN 1997-1. For the deep piles, the submission shall include full
details of the type of pile (bored or driven) and the proposed construction sequence.
125
126
4.10 Civil Work
The material testing laboratory shall be designed with a three-storied building (with a
foundation suitable for eight-stories) with an approximate total floor area of 2,128.715 sq-m /
or as calculated by the Contractor.
- Ground Floor: Ceiling Height: 5 m

o Distribution Transformers unloading/loading area: In the Distribution
Transformer Test Bay area in Lab-6, the floor shall have adequate load
bearing capacity.
o Power Transformer Test Bay: floor area load bearing capacity shall be 80 tons
min. with overhead crane facility for 11/12 m lift and 100-ton capacity. In
design calculations, adequate factor of safety shall be kept in view.
o Rail and steel carrier cart to take and move power transformer to testing area
in Lab-5. Power transformer rating: 20/28 MVA maximum, weight with oil
range up to 80 tons
o Lab-5: Power Transformer Testing System - PTTS
o Lab-6: Distribution Transformer Testing System - DTTS
o Lab-7: High Voltage Electrical Testing
o Lab-8: Mechanical Testing/Tensile Testing
o Lab-9: Auto-Recloser/Circuit Breaker/ Fuse Links/Fuse Cut-Outs Testing
o Lab-10: Cable & Conductor Testing
o Lab-11: Insulators Testing
o Lab-12: Transformer Oil Testing
o Toilet Block (Male & Female Toilets)
o Cargo Lift
o Passenger Lift
o Stairs
- First Floor - Ceiling Height:3-3.5 m
o Lab-1: 1P & 3P Meter Testing
o Lab-2: CT/PT Testing
o Lab-3: Lightning Arresters Testing
o Lab-4: Relays & Electronics Equipment Testing
o Equipment & Spare Parts Store
o Male & Female Toilets
o Cargo Lift
o Passengers Lift
o Stairs
- Second Floor - Ceiling Height:3-3.5 m
o Lab-13: To be determined-TBD
o Executive Rooms
126
127
o Offices
o Toilets
o Conference Room
o Dining Room
o Kitchen
o Photocopy Room
o Cargo Lift
o Passenger Lift
 Two Stairs with one flight: Run width- 25 cm, riser height = 15 cm and railing with
SS/MS angle
 FGL of the building yard should be 60 cm above the highest flood level.
 The outside wall of the Building shall be covered with China made Titles and the
floors of the Building shall be Mosaic finishing or as approved by BREB or the
Project Manager.
 Doors and shutters of the individual Labs and rooms in the Building shall be at the
suitable positions, as per instructions of the Project Manager (in accordance with the
approved materials).
 Cable Trench, Duct and Sump Pits: Cable trench depth should be provided above
flood level of that area i.e. should be able to avoid water logging in the cable trench.
 Supply and installation of Air Conditioning System for Laboratories, executive
rooms, conference room as indicated in the Schedule of drawings including all other
accessories/ components required for fitting & fixing up to commissioning.
 Supply and installation of submersible water pump motor set for safe drinking water
including borehole drilling, pipes and all other accessories/ components required for
fitting & fixing up to commissioning and overhead water tank conserve.
 All necessary furniture for the laboratories, executive rooms, conference room as
indicated in the Schedule
 Supply and installation of CCTV.
 Supply and installation of public address system PAS.
 Supply and installation of telephone network
 Material test results used in construction works.
4.11 Design and Construction Requirements and Interchangeability
4.11.1 General Requirements
The works shall be designed to operate safely, reliably and efficiently in accordance with the
design and operating requirements stated in this Specification. No violation from the
Specification shall be made subsequent to the Contract without the written approval of the
Project Manager.
127
128
Each of the several parts of the equipment and plants to be provided shall be of the
manufacturer‟s standard design, provided that this design shall be in accordance with an
international code of practice and generally in accordance with this Specification.
The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that they shall not suffer
damage as a result of stresses under the most severe service conditions. The materials used in
the construction of the equipment and Building shall be of the highest quality and selected
particularly to meet the duties required of them. The plants and equipment shall be designed
and constructed to minimize correction. Workmanship and general finish shall be of the
highest class throughout.
All items and corresponding parts performing similar functions shall be interchangeable in
order to minimize the stock of spare parts.
All equipment shall be designed to minimize the risk of fire and damage which may be
caused in the event of fire.
4.11.2 Specific Requirements
The choice of equipment in the Building and design of the installation is to meet the following
criteria:
(a) Building Floor layouts are to utilize the minimum of land area.
(b) All equipment is to facilitate the installation of all circuits indicated as “future” with
the minimum of disruption. All cabling schemes, A.C. equipment etc. shall be
designed to accommodate all such future circuits and loads.
(c) The plants and equipment installation shall be designed for a minimum service life of
30 years.
(d) All plants and equipment is to have a minimum of 2 years satisfactory and proven
service record of high durability and reliability in a similar environment.
Documentary evidence in support of the choice of any item of plant shall be provided
by the Contractor if requested by the Project Manager.
Each floor of the building is to be designed such that the failure or removal of any one item of
plant or equipment for maintenance or repair shall not damage or hamper the operational
integrity of the Building The design and layout of the Building shall ensure the safety of
personnel concerned with the operation and maintenance of the building.
4.12 Plant and Equipment Identification
4.12.1 Identification on Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare comprehensive plant and equipment Identification Schedules.
Each item in the Schedules shall include the drawing number of the related flow sheet, diagram
or drawing showing that item.
4.12.2 Labels and Nameplates (where applicable)
The Contractor shall supply and install labels, nameplates, ratings, instructions and warning
plates, necessary for the identification and safe operation of plant and equipment at Building.
128
129
Nameplates and labels shall be non-hygroscopic material with engraved lettering of a

contrasting colour or, alternatively in the case of indoor circuit-breakers and starters, of plastic
material with suitably coloured lettering engraved thereon.
All nameplates and labels shall be securely fixed to items of plant and equipment with stainless
steel rivets, plated self-tapping screws or other approved means. The use of adhesives shall not
be permitted.
Individual items and all relevant areas within the contract works where a danger to personnel
exists shall be provided with plentiful, prominent and clear warning notices. These warning
notices shall draw attention to the danger or risk with words which attract attention and
summarize the type of risk or danger. The notices shall also carry a large symbol which
graphically depicts the type of risk.
All equipment within panels and desks shall be individually identified. The identification shall
correspond to that used in schematic and wiring diagrams.
Each circuit breaker panel, electrical control panel, relay panel etc., shall have circuit
designation label mounted on the front and rear. Corridor type panels shall additionally have
circuit designation labels within the panels.
All equipment and apparatus mounted there on shall be clearly labeled in an approved manner.
The function of each relay, control switch, indicating lamp, MCB, link etc. shall be separately
labeled.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation, or replacement of all labels on existing
plant, which becomes inaccurate as a consequence of the contract works.
The language of labels, plates and notices shall comply with the requirements of the Contract.
4.13 Safety and Security
4.13.1 Interlocks (Where applicable)
A complete system of interlocks and safety devices shall be provided so that the following
requirements and any other condition necessary for the safe and continuous operation of the
plant and equipment are provided:
(a) Safety of personnel engaged on operational and maintenance work.
(b) Correct sequence of operation of the plants during starting up and shutting
down periods.
(c) Safety of the plan and equipment, when operating under normal or emergency
conditions.
(d) Interlocks shall be preventive, as distinct from corrective in operation.
129
130
Where equipment supplied under this Contract forms the whole or a part of a system for
which one of more interlocking schemes are required, the Contractor shall be responsible for
designing all interlocking schemes and presenting them for the Project Manager‟s approval.
General descriptions of interlocking requirements are given in the Specifications but the
Contractor shall include for any other interlocks he considers necessary.
4.13.2 Locks, Padlocks, and Key Cabinets (Where applicable)
The Contractor shall provide padlocks, locks, chains or other locking devices (where
applicable) for the locking of all equipment cubicles, electrical isolating switches, selector
switches, valves, etc. to the approval of the Project Manager.
All locking devices and chains shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant material. All
mechanisms shall be provided with a cover to minimize entry of water or dust.
Locks shall conform to a master keying feature system to be agreed with the Project Manager
for groups of equipment. All locks shall have individual high integrity locks and shall be
provided with three (3) keys. Each key shall be provided with a label as specified.
The Contractor shall supply and fit key cabinets equipped with labeled hooks, each Identified
with its appropriate key. Every cabinet shall be provided with a nameplate identifying the
cabinet with its respective item or items of plant. Sufficient cabinets shall be provided to store
all keys supplied under this Contract and cater for future extensions.
The Contractor shall provide comprehensive lock and key schedules to readily permit
identification with equipment and doors. Such schedules are not required for loose padlocks.
Where modifications are performed to existing sites the Contractor shall provide a system
identical to that existing.
4.14 Commissioning Spares
In addition to the spare parts being provided to the Employer, the Contractor is responsible
for ensuring that he has access to a stock of commissioning spares. Spares provided to the
Employer are not to be utilized as commissioning spares without written approval of the
Project Manager, in which case the Contractor shall immediately replace the contract spares
at his own expense.
All commissioning spares are considered as Contractors equipment.
4.15 Painting and Cleaning
Immediately following signing of the contract, the Contractor shall submit the names of the
proposed paint supplier and applicator together with a quality assurance program for
approval. All paints for a contract shall be provided by one manufacturer and preferably shall
be manufactured in one country to ensure compatibility.
Painting of the Building works shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate
schedule. The work is generally covered by the schedules but where particular items are not
130
131
referred to specifically, they shall be treated in a manner similar to other comparable items as
agreed with the Project Manager.
The schedules indicate standards of surface preparation and painting which is intended to
give a minimum service life of 10 years in a coastal industrial environment, with need for
minor remedial work only during that period.
Steel sections and plate shall be free from surface flaws and laminations prior to blast
cleaning and shall not be in worse condition than Pictorial Standard B, Swedish Standard SIS
05 5900.
The Project Manager will consider alternative paint schemes to meet the requirements of
fabrication using modern automated materials handling systems, provided they offer the same
standards of surface protection and service life as those intended by the schedules.
All paints shall be applied by brush or spray in accordance with the schedule, except for
priming coats for steel floors, galleries and stairways where dipping is permitted.
Where paint is to be applied by spray, the applicator shall demonstrate that the spray
technique employed does not produce paint films containing vacuoles.
Where paint coatings are proposed for the protection of surfaces of equipment exposed to
corrosive conditions, such as plant items exposed to brines or sea water immersion in liquid,
or wet gases, the coatings shall be formulated to the suitably corrosion resistant and shall be
high voltage spark tested at works and/or at site prior to commissioning. The test procedure
shall be based on the use of a high voltage direct current. The voltage used shall be 75% of
the breakdown voltage of the coating. This breakdown voltage shall first be separately
determined using test plates coated with the specified coating formulation and thickness. The
coating on the test plate shall also be micro-sectioned by the applicator to show that it is free
from vacuoles and other defects likely to invalidate the test procedure.
If the defects revealed by the above test procedure do not exceed one per 5 m 2 of coating
surface, the coating need not be re-tested after the defects have been repaired. If the defects
exceed one per 5 m2 of coating surface, the repairs shall be resettled after any curing is
completed, and this procedure shall be repeated until the defects are less than one per 5 m2 of
coating surface. After repair of these defects, the equipment can be placed in service without
further testing.
All coating proposed for the internal protection of domestic water storage tanks and shall be
certified by an approved independent Authority as suitable for use in potable water
installations and shall meet the non-painting requirements of BS 3416.
All polished and bright parts shall be coated with grease, oil or other approved rust preventive
before dispatch and during erection and this coating shall be cleaned off and the parts
polished before being handed over.
Where lapped or butted joints form part of an assembly which is assembled or part assembled
prior to final painting, the jointed surfaces shall be cleaned free from all scales, loose rust,
dirt and grease and given one brush applied coat of zinc phosphate primer before assembly.
131
132
Paint shall not be applied to surfaces which are superficially or structurally damp and
condensation must be absent before the application of each coat.
Painting shall not be carried out under adverse weather conditions, such as low temperature
(below 40° C) or above 90% relative humidity or during rain or fog, or when the surfaces are
less than 30° C above dew point, except to the approval of the Project Manager or his duly
appointed representative.
Priming coats of paint should not be applied until the surfaces have been inspected and
preparatory work has been approved by the Project Manager or his duly appointed
representative.
No consecutive coats of paint, except in the case of white, should be of the same shade.
Thinners shall not be used except with the written agreement of the Project Manager.
On sheltered or unventilated horizontal surfaces on which dew may linger more protection is
needed and to achieve this additional top coat of paint shall be applied.
The schedules differentiate between „Treatment at Maker‟s Works‟ and „Treatment at Site
after Completion of Erection‟ but the locations at which different stages of the treatments are
carried out may be modified always providing that each change is specifically agreed to by
the Project Manager and the painting is finished at site to the Project Manager‟s satisfaction.
All paint film thickness quoted are minimum and refer to the dry film condition. All thickness
shall be determined by the correct use of approved commercial paint film thickness
measuring meters.
The Contractor shall ensure that precautions are taken in packing and crating to avoid damage
to the protective treatment applied before shipment, during transport to the site.
Structural bolts shall be galvanized, sherardized or cadmium plated and painted as for
adjacent steelwork.
All structural timber that does not require to be painted (timber joists, flooring, etc.) shall be
treated with two coats exterior grade approved timber preservative.
The requirements of this clause and the schedules shall be interpreted in accordance with the
requirements and recommendations of BS 5493 and CP 231, 3012 and the paint
manufacturer‟s special instructions where applicable.
Colour shall be in accordance with BS 1710 and BS 4800 or equivalent national standards.
4.16 Galvanized Work
All galvanizing shall be carried out by the hot dip process and unless otherwise specified,
shall conform in all respects with applicable IEC Standards, BS Standards and ASTM
Standards.
Attention shall be paid to the detail of members, (in accordance with IEC Standards, BS
Standards and ASTM Standards). Adequate provision for filling venting and draining shall be
132
133
made for assemblies fabricated form hollow sections. Vent holes shall be suitably plugged
after galvanizing.
All surface defects in the steel, including cracks, surface laminations, laps and folds shall be
removed (in accordance with IEC Standards, BS Standards and ASTM Standards). All
drilling cutting, welding, forming and final fabrications of unit members and assemblies shall
be completed before the structures are galvanized. The surface of the steelwork to be
galvanized shall be free from welding slag, paint, oil, grease and similar contaminants.
The coating shall be as specified in BS EN ISO 1461or equivalent National standard.

Structural steel items shall initially grit blasted to BS 4232, second quality (SA2.5). The
minimum average coating weight on steel sections 5 mm thick and over shall be as specified
in BS EN ISO 1461.
Bolts, nuts and washers, including general grade high strength friction grip bolts (referred to
in BS 3139 and BS 4395 part 1) shall be hot dip galvanized and subsequently centrifuged
(according to BS 729). Nuts shall be tapped up to 0.4 mm oversize after galvanizing and the
threads oiled to permit the nuts to be finger turned on the bolt for the full depth of the nut. No
lubricant, applied to the projecting threads of a galvanized high strength friction grip bolt
after the bolt has been inserted through the steelwork shall be allowed to come into contact
with the faying surfaces.
During off-loading and erection, nylon slings shall be used. Galvanized work which is to be
stored in works on site shall be stacked so as to provided adequate ventilation to all surfaces
to avoid wet storage staining (with rust).
Small areas of the galvanized coating damaged in any way shall be brought to the attention of
the Project Manager who shall authorize repair by cleaning the area of any weld slug and
though wire brushing to give a clean surface, and application of two coats of zinc rich paint
or the application of low melting point zincalloy repair rod or power to the damage area,
which is heated to 3000C.
After fixing, bolt heads, washes and nuts shall receive two coats zinc rich paint.
4.17 Steel Pipe Work
All steel piping shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with British
Standards or equivalent Nationals Standards approved by the Project Manager. In particular,
the minimum wall thickness of steel pipework shall comply with Table 2 of BS 1387.
Drains and air vents shall be provided as required by the physical arrangement of the pipe
work and shall be via valves with the drain and vent pipe work led to drain points to the
approval of the Project Manager.
Screwed pipe work systems shall be provided with adequate unions to enable valves and
fittings to be removed if required with minimum disturbance to the rest of the pipe system.
133
134
4.18 Bolts, Studs, Nuts and Washers
All bolts and nuts shall conform dimensionally to the requirements of BS 3092 or BS 4190 or
equivalent National Standard.
The Material of all bolts, studs and nuts for piping systems shall conform to the requirements
of BS 4505 or equivalent National Standard or ASTM Standards.
The threaded portion of any bolt or stud shall not protrude more than 1.5 threads above the
surface of its mating nut.
When fitted bolts are used they shall be adequately marked to ensure correct assembly.
Bolts, nuts, studs and washers in contact with sea water or used on pipe work systems
containing sea water shall be of the same material as flanges etc.
The use of slotted screws shall be avoided; hexagon socket screws or recessed type heads
shall be used.
4.19 Architectural and Structural Requirements of Buildings
4.19.1 Architectural Planning and Design
New building and any associated parts shall be designed to be architecturally pleasing in
appearances to the satisfaction of the Employer and to withstand the tropical climate and
wind pressures with minimal maintenance.
Architectural plan and elevations of all sides of buildings shall be agreed with the Project
Manager before other details are finalized. All external walls shall be 230 mm first class brick
work plus a 50 mm thick layer of Mirpur ceramics facing bricks or similar approved for
building as required by the architectural drawing. The internal walls shall be 105 mm
thickfirst-class brick work with plastered and painting of an approved color. For the building
internal walls shall be plastered with paint finishing (to be approved by the Project Manager).
Bath room floors, wall sand stairs shall be tiled. Window frames shall be aluminum with MS
grill. Doors shall be wooden and water proofed.
The main entrances to the building shall be got approved from the Project Manager.
The service facilities like electricity, water supply and sanitary works, sewerage, gas
connection (if possible) etc. shall be provided as per requirements. Best quality fitting and
fixture made in Bangladesh shall be provided in bathroom in kitchen room. Electrical fittings
and fixtures shall be best quality and wiring provided in the Material Testing Laboratory
Building shall be internal. Samples shall be shown to and approved by the Project Manager.
4.19.2 Structural Design
Structural design of the Material Acceptance Test Laboratory Building shall be according to
the Bangladesh National Building Code (BNBC). Loads for reinforce concrete design shall
be calculated as the sum of dead loads, live loads and environmental loads (wind and seismic)
as explained in the BNBC. Ultimate Strength Design (USD) method (BNBC Chapter 6) shall
be adopted for design of all reinforce concrete structural elements.
134
135
The roof shall be a cast in situ concrete slab designed for 4.5kN/m2 live load (keeping in view
adequate factor of safety). First floor and rest of floor load shall be 3.0kN/m2(keeping in view
adequate factor of safety). Design calculations shall be approved by the Project Manager.
4.20 Utility Services
Utilities shall be designed and installed comprising:

(a) Plumbing system including wastewater and surface water drainage system
development including septic tank, soak well, and surface or buried drain.
(b) Water supply and sanitary work.
(c) Electrical works includes internal wiring, fitting, fixing all necessary items, internal
lighting, street lighting, necessary earthing, shielding and bonding as approved by
the Project Manager.
(d) Telephone network, where needed.
(e) CCTV, where needed
(f) Public Address System, where needed
4.21 Fire Detection and Protection Facilities
The Contractor shall design, manufacture, deliver to the site, install, test and commission the
firefighting system to protect each Laboratory and floor in the Building, all building
associated equipment and outdoor area. In particular, the following shall be included:
(a) Fire Detection and Alarm system: fire detection shall be by means of smoke
detectors and ultra violet flame detectors with a backup system utilizing rate-of-rise
temperature detectors, along with an alarm system.
(b) Balancing, testing and commissioning of fire detection and alarm system for 16
zones.
(c) Dry chemical powder and carbon dioxide type fire extinguishers.
(d) Five wall mounted sand buckets outside the control room building at suitable place
locations
A reinforced concrete fire wall is required between transformer and the building. The wall
size shall depend on the transformer size. The Contractor shall prepare proposed designs for
approval of the Project Manager.
4.22 Preparation of the Site
Refuse or superfluous earthen the site shall be removed before construction begins. Shrubs
and stumps of trees shall be uprooted and removed off site. Any valuable material derived
from the clearing of the site should be stored and disposed of according to the BNBC.
No tree shall be cut down or pruned unless prior approval is given by the Project Manager. A
survey report must be submitted and sanctions obtained before the trees are disposed of. If
white ants are found to exist in the trees, their nests shall be located and dug up and the queen
ant be destroyed. Holes left after uprooting of the trees shall be backfilled with sand or earth,
135
136
care being taken that the fill, on compaction, achieves the density of the surrounding soil.
The Contractor‟s Engineer himself shall set out all important levels for permanent works
using the site benchmark established during the topographical survey. Areas for storage and
stacking of materials should be set out and pegged, similarly the position of temporary
buildings, the access road and site roads.
The Contractor shall not fall any tree outside the site boundary without the express written
permission of the land possessor, even if such tree is an obstacle to execution of the work.
4.23 Temporary Buildings on Site
Locations of temporary offices, guard sheds, work sheds and accommodation on each site
shall be selected such that they do not clash with the location of permanent work and do not
interfere with construction work. Prefabricated buildings that are simple to erect and
dismantle, yet provide a pleasing look, are preferred.
4.24 Access to the Site
The access road is from the nearest main road as indicated in the site plan. While designing
the access alignment, the Contractor shall maximize natural slopes as much as possible for
drainage of rainwater and the facilities shall be secured effectively and economically. The
design and drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor to current practices AASHTO codes
of practice.
4.25 Site Drainage
The entire surface of each Building site within its boundary walls shall slope at 1 in 150
minimum gradient to open channels around the entire perimeter. These channels shall be
designed for a rainfall intensity of 60 mm per hour. Outside the boundary wall, the Contractor
shall be responsible for drainage up to 20 meters, or to suit the site requirements, from the
wall and the drainage outlets may be need to be provided with suitable erosion protection.
The ground immediately adjacent to foundations shall be sloped away from them at a slope of
not less than 1:12 for a minimum distance of 205m measured perpendicular to the toe of the
wall. Consideration shall be given to possible additional settlement of backfill when
establishing the final ground level adjacent to foundation.
The concrete wall of cable trenches shall project at least 70 mm above brick paving level to
prevent run off entering the cable trench. The floors of all cable trenches or tunnels shall be
sloped to soak ways.
The cable trenches shall be free from surface water drainage. If the cutoff area exceeds 30 m2
it shall be drained by a concrete pipe sized to take the runoff to the boundary drain. The
Contractor‟s drainage design shall avoid all ponded water to avoid forming a mosquito
breeding ground.
136
137
All drainage pipe work except cable trenches within buildings shall be UPVC pipe of
diameter as per design requirement. But cable trenches are RCC work as per design
requirements.
The floor slab shall be constructed in reinforced brick concrete (RBC) floor125 mm thick and
foundations for controlling equipment in RCC.
External pipe work shall be 150 mm minimum diameter concrete pipes at a minimum depth
of invert of 600 mm. Where pipes, including existing pipes along with site, are less than 400
mm above adjacent foundations, they shall be surrounded in concrete. Where required,
drainage pipes shall be kept below cables, allowing 1.1 m cover to the top of pipes.
Manholes shall be of brick construction with 500mm x 500mm clear openings and air tight
ductile iron covers to BS EN 124. Manholes shall be located at all changes of pipeline
direction. The minimum gradient for all pipelines shall be 1 in 80. Manholes shall not be
located in roads.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all negotiations with local authority (WASA) where a
connection to a public sewer is proposed. The Contractor shall provide all protection required
to existing sewers and shall deepen foundations, including boundary wall foundations, where
required all foundations are below adjacent sewers.
The building shall be provided with a septic tank designed for 120 users and a soakaway of
open brick construction 11 m deep by 2.2 m diameter filled with broken bricks. The septic
tank shall be located at suitable place of the area. The inner surface of all manholes and septic
tanks shall be painted with two coats of bitumastic paint to protect it against sulphate attack.
The septic tank shall have access holes directly over the inlet pipes and outlet pipes. Where
public sewers exist along the side of building site, the Contractor shall connect directly to the
sewerage line from the soakaway. Two vents of minimum height 2.2 m shall be provided on
each septic tank.
4.26 Site Maintenance during Construction
a) The site shall be kept as clean as reasonably possible during construction.

Materials shall not be stacked haphazardly but kept in a planned manner in
proper stacks. Care shall be taken to maintain the site with proper drainage of
rain and stagnant water.
b) The proposed roads should be laid out and used for carriage of materials to
avoid vehicles travelling randomly over the site and spoiling it. The base of the
road may also be laid and maintained during construction.
c) Any rejected materials, dismantled materials and other items not required in
the construction shall be removed from the site immediately, so that there is no
chance of it being used by the Contractor‟s labour.
137
138
B. CIVIL
5.0 BUILDING AND ANCILLARY FACILITIES
138
139
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause No. Description Page No

5.1 Civil Works-General 140
5.2 Mobilization and Preparation of the Site 149
5.3 Dismantling & Removal of Existing Structures for Rehabilitation Sites 150
5.4 Site Office Facilities for the Engineer 150
5.5 Earth Work in Excavation for Structure 151
5.6 Brick Flat Soling (BFS) 152
5.7 Lean Cement Concrete (CC) Works 152
5.8 Cement Concrete in Floor 153
5.9 Damp Proof Course 153
5.10 Reinforced Cement Concrete Work (RCC) 153
5.11 RCC with Water Proofing Admixture 162
5.12 Reinforcing Steel in Concrete 162
5.13 Brick Work 165
5.14 Patent Stone Flooring 167
5.15 Ceramic Tiles 168
5.16 Plaster Work 168
5.17 Neat-Cement (Skirting/Dado) 170
5.18 Making Groove On Wall Surface 171
5.19 Painting Works 172
5.20 Timber Works 174
5.21 Metal Works 177
5.22 Aluminum Doors, Windows etc. 178
5.23 Water Proofing Polythene Sheet 180
5.24 Lime Terracing on Roof 181
5.25 Screening on Roof 181
5.26 Surface Drain 182
5.27 Apron 182
5.28 Road Work 183
5.29 Clearing after Completion 185
5.30 As Built Drawings 185
5.31 Tests for Materials 186
139
140
5.1 Civil Works-General

This specification has been prepared with all possible care and diligence and every effort has
been made to cover all types of materials and items of works necessary to complete the
Project in all respects.
All workmanship and materials to be used in the Works shall be of the best quality of their
respective kinds as specified herein. All materials used in the Works shall be brand new and
obtained from the sources and suppliers approved by the Project Manager. Materials shall
comply strictly with the requirements prescribed hereinafter or, where such requirements are
not specified in this specification, the latest issues of the relevant Technical Standard shall be
followed. All tests of materials shall be done by laboratory approved by the Project Manager.
The accuracy and sufficiency of information furnished in this specification is not guaranteed.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to clear any confusion or ambiguity in this
specification well ahead of submission of bid. In case of any missing item relevant applicable
standards, codes and specifications shall be followed or applied.
5.1.1 Materials
5.1.1.1 Cement
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to the requirements of the Standard
Specifications for Portland Cement Type -I, ASTM C-150 or BDS 232 (2nd Revision) unless
otherwise specified.
Cement shall conform to the following standards as per BDS 232 (2nd Revision) and ASTM
C109, C191, C204.
a)Water for normal consistency : 26% to 33%

b) Fineness : Minimum 280 sq.m./kg (by air
permeability method)
i)Initial setting time, ASTM C191 : Not less than 45 min.

ii)Final setting time, ASTM C191 : Not less than 375 min.
c)Minimum compressive strength

i)3rd. day : 9.45Mpa (1350 psi)
ii) 7th day : 14.7Mpa (2100 psi)
iii)28th day : 21.0 Mpa (3000 psi)
Cement shall be delivered in packages as packed by the Manufacturer with the brand name,
type of cement and weight of each bag marked on the bag. Sample test of cement must be
done by laboratory approved by the Project Manager: Two bags from each brand or each
consignment of supply of 25 metric tons of cement shall be selected for testing. The Project
Manager require the Contractor to have the cement tested or can take samples in the presence
of Contractor from cement bags stored at work site and send them to an approved laboratory
for testing.
140
141
Cement of doubtful quality shall not be used until satisfactory results are obtained. All
cement not conforming to specifications and cement that has deteriorated, been damaged or
has set shall not be used and shall be immediately removed from work site by the Contractor.
The cost of all such cement shall be borne by the Contractor.
5.1.1.2 Brick
Common building clay bricks shall conform to BDS 208 (First Revision).
Bricks shall be manufactured from combination of clay mixed with silica sand and alumina
and shall be uniformly burnt throughout. Bricks shall be kiln burnt.
First Class Bricks
First Class Bricks shall comply with the following requirements of BDS 208 (Common
Building Clay Bricks –First Revision)
a) Bricks shall be of machine mould, uniform colour, shape and size having sharp square
sidesand edges and paralleled faces.
b) Bricks shall be sound, hard and well burnt homogeneous in texture and free from flaws
and cracks.
c) Bricks shall emit a clear metallic sound when struck with a small hammer or another
brick. A fractured surface shall show a uniform compact structure free from lumps,
grits or holes.
d) A first-class brick shall not absorb more than 1/5thof its dry weight when immersed in
water for 24hours.
e) A first-class brick shall not break when struck against another brick or when dropped
at T-position on hard ground from a height of about 1.2 meter.
f) Standard dimension of bricks shall be 240 x 115 x 70mm (9.5” x 4.5” x 2 .75”)
g) Allowable variations in dimensions shall be:
i) in length not more than 6mm
ii) in breadth not more than 5mm
iii) in height not more than 1.5mm
h) Unit weight of bricks shall be minimum 1100 kg/cum
i) Minimum compressive strength of bricks shall be for
i) Halved bricks (mean of 12 bricks): 28 Mpa (4000psi)
ii) Individual brick: 21.1 Mpa (3000psi)
j) Range of efflorescence for a first-class brick shall be slight to nil.
Picked Jhama Bricks
Picked Jhama-Bricks shall be over-burnt First-Class Bricks, uniformly vitrified throughout

with good shape, hard slightly black in colour, and without cracks or spongy areas. Minimum
compressive strength shall not be less than 28 N/mm2 (4000 psi)
All other requirements for First Class Bricks shall apply to Picked Jhama except for
dimensions.
141
142
Perforated Bricks
Perforated bricks shall meet the following specifications:

a) Minimum unit weight : 3.00 kg/brick
b) Minimum compressive strength on gross
area:
i) Multi-core brick : 70kg/sq.cm
ii) 10-Hole engineering brick : 210kg/sq.cm
iii) Maximum size of perforation : 25sq.mm
c) Minimum number of perforations
i) Along width of brick : 2
ii) Along length of brick : 6
d) Minimum wall thickness:
i) Between brick edge and perforation : 10mm
ii) Between adjacent perforations : 10mm

e) Maximum water absorption
i) 5hrs, boiling : 20% of dry wt.
ii) Efflorescence : Nil

Dimensions (3mm) 24cm × 11cm × 7cm (9.5” ×4.5” × 2.75”)
The perforations may be of any regular shape in cross section, in case of rectangular section
the larger dimension shall be parallel to length of the brick. Dimension of perforation
measured parallel to the plane of the shorter side shall not be more than 15cm except in case
of circular shape of the perforation in which case it may be allowed up to 20 cm. Total area of
perforation shall not exceed 45% of the total area of corresponding face of the brick.
Clinker Bricks
Clinker bricks or tiles shall meet the following requirement:
Minimum unit weight : 2kg/brick

Minimum compressive strength : 560kg/sq.cm (8000psi)
Minimum modulus of rupture : 560kg/sq.cm (600psi)
Water absorption 5 hrs. boiling : 12%-15% of dry wt.
Efflorescence : Nil
Dimensions : 200mm x 100mm x 5mm
(8” × 4” × 2”)
Clinker bricks shall be manufactured by dry process and burnt to a higher temperature and
shall uniformly vitrified to a dark copper tone. Edges shall be square, straight and sharply
defined.
5.1.1.3 Sand (Fine Aggregate)
Sand shall conform to BDS 243, ASTM C 33
142
143
Sand shall be either natural sand, composed of clean, hard, durable uncoated particles
resulting from the disintegration of siliceous and/or calcareous rocks; or manufactured sand
resulting from the crushing of boulders or shingle.
The maximum size of the particles shall be 4.75 mm (3/l6 in) and shall be graded down.
Sand shall be clean and free of injurious amounts of organic impurities; deleterious
substances shall not exceed the following percentages by weight:
Clay Lumps and friable particles-Maximum 3%

Coal and Lignite 0.25%
Material passing the 0.075mm (No. 200) sieve 1%
Shale, coal, soft or flacky fragments 1%
Sulfur compounds 0.3%
Organic material content no organic material.
Sand shall be well graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to the following Fineness
Modulus:
Concrete : 2.5 (Two point five)
Concrete : 1.5 (One point five)
Mortar : 1.5 (One point five)
Filling sand : 1.0 (One point zero)
: 0.8 (Zero point eight)
Sand from different sources of supply shall not be mixed and stored in the same stock pile
nor used alternately in the work without permission from theProject Manager.
5.1.1.4 Coarse Aggregate and the Bouder
(a) Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall conform to BDS 243 (Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural
Sources for Concrete 1;ASTM C 33: Concrete Aggregates).
Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate in concrete shall not be larger than:
a) One-fifth of the narrowest dimensions between sides of forms; or

b) One-third the depth of slabs; or
c) Three-fourth the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires,
bundles of bars.
(b) The Boulder
The boulders to be used for coarse aggregate in concrete shall be composed of limestone,
sandstone, granite, trap rock or rock of similar nature and shall have the following properties.
143
144
Compressive strength (minimum) 35Mpa (5000psi)

Specified gravity 2.2-2.6
Unit weights 22-25.1 kn./cum
Porosity 2.10%
Water absorption (maximum) 2.5% by wt
The boulder shall be of uniform light color as approved and shall be free of thin laminations,
adherent coatings, and deleterious substances. The wear loss of coarse aggregate of all types
shall not exceed 35% by weight when tested by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test.
5.1.1.5 Water
The water used in mixing and curing concrete shall be tested for chlorides and sulphates in a
standard material-testing laboratory as directed by Project Manager. The maximum
acceptable limits shall be as follows:
 1,000mg/literas S03 for sulphates

 500mg/liter as Cl ion for chloride
Water shall be clear and free from salt, oil or acid, vegetable or other substances injurious to
the finished product. The pH values of water shall generally be not less than 6. Water used in
construction work shall be potable.
5.1.1.6 Admixtures
Admixtures used for the purpose of modifying the normal plastic life of concrete mix or for
influencing its rate of gaining hardness and strength or for the workability or concrete shall
not be used except with the written approval of theProject Manager.
Admixture if specified or permitted shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO Standard

Specification M-194/ASTM, C-494 or ASTM C-1017.
It shall be kept in mind that a small change in the amount of admixture may cause great
change in their action and their adequacy of performance is difficult to measure at the
construction site during the progress of work. Water reducing admixture, accelerating
admixture, water reducing and retarding admixtures, water-reducing and accelerating
admixtures shall conform to ASTM C-494 (Chemical Admixtures for Concrete) or ASTM C-
1017 (Chemical Admixtures for use in producing flowing Concrete)
5.1.1.7 Reinforcing Bar
High tensile steel reinforcing bar shall be structural grade deformed bar specified as per
ASTM, A615M, and BOS 1313: 91, Bars having minimum yield levels of 275 Mpa (40,000
psi) and 415 Mpa (60,000 psi) are designated as Grade 40 and Grade 60 respectively. High
tensile steel reinforcing bars shall meet the following strength test requirements:
144
145
Table 1
Properties Grade 40 Grade 60
Yield strength 275 Mpa 415 Mpa
(minimum) (40000 psi) (60000 psi)
Ultimate strength 483 Mpa 620 Mpa
(minimum) (70000 psi) (90000 psi)
(a) Tolerance on Mass

Table 2
Nominal size Tolerance of mass per
(mm) Meter run (%)
Upto 7  8.0
8 to 12  6.0
Over 12  4.5
(b) Tolerance on Diameter
Tolerance in diameter for both plain and deformed bars shall not exceed 2.5% for 12mm and
less size and 1.8% for sizes larger than 12 mm.
(c) Tensile Requirements

Table 2
Grade 40 Grade 60
Tensile strength, min. psi 70000 90000
Yield strength min. psi 40000 60000
Elongation in 8 in min. %
Bar Nos.
3 (10mm) 11 9
4 ,5, 6 (12, 16, 20 12 9
mm)
7, 8 (22, 25 mm) … 8
9, 10 (28, 32 mm) … 7
11, 14, 18 … 7
(35, 45, 57 mm)
(d) Bending Requirements
The bend-test specimen shall withstand being bent around a pin without cracking on the
outside of the bent portion. The requirements for degree of bending and sizes of pins are
prescribed in Table 3 -Bend Test Requirement.
The bend test shall be made on specimens of sufficient length to ensure free bending and with
apparatus which provides.
 Continuous and uniform application of force throughout the duration of the bending
operation.
 Unrestricted movement of the specimen at points of contact with the apparatus and
bending around a pin free to rotate.
 Close wrapping of the specimen around the pin during the bending operation.
145
146
(e) Bend Test Requirements
Bar Designation No. Pin diameter for Bend TestA

Grade 60 Grade 40
3,4,5 31/2 d b 31/2d
6 5d 5d
7,8 5d --
9,10 7d --
11 7d --
14,18 (900) 9d --
A 0
Test bends 180 unless noted otherwise.
db = nominal diameter of specimen
(f) Frequency of Tensile, Bend, Re-bend testing
Nominal size of Value of x (Quality of materials in tones)

bar (mm) Tensile test Bend test Re-bend test
Under 10 25 50 50
10 to 16 35 70 70
20 to 32 45 90 90
For the specified tests sample length shall be 600mm long or 20 times the nominal size
whichever is greater. Sample shall be selected from each batch at a frequency of not less than
one up 5 (five) tones or part thereof where x has the value given in the above table. Samples
from the bend and re-bend tests shall not be selected from the same bar.
(g) Cross Sectional Area and Mass
Nominal size Mass (kg/m) Cross sectional are (mm2)

6 mm 0.222 28.30
8 mm 0.395 50.30
10 mm 0.616 78.50
12 mm 0.888 113.00
16 mm 1.579 201.00
20 mm 2.466 314.00
22 mm 2.980 380.00
25 mm 3.854 491.00
28 mm 4.830 616.00
32 mm 6.313 804.00
All steel bars prior to its use shall be cleaned with wire brush to make it free from loose scale,
dirt, paint, oil, grease or other foreign substances.
All reinforcing steel shall be stored properly under shed not to be contaminated by oil, grease
or mud.
146
147
(h) Requirement for Deformation in Reinforcing Steel
The requirement of deformation shall meet ASTM A615.
a) Deformations shall be spaced along the bar at substantially uniform distances. The
deformations on opposite sides of the bar shall be similar in size and shape.
b) The deformations shall be placed with respect to the axis of the bar so that the
included angle is not less than 450 deg. Where the line of deformations forms an
included angle with the axis of the bar of from 450 to 700deg inclusive. The
deformations shall alternately reverse in direction on each side, or those on one side
shall be reversed in direction from those on the opposite side. Where the line of
deformation is over 700 deg. a reversal in direction is not required.
c) The average spacing or distance between deformations on each side of the bar shall
not exceed seventeenths of the nominal diameter of the bar.
d) The overall length of deformations shall be such that the gap between the ends of the
deformations on opposite sides of the bar shall not exceed 12.5% of the nominal
perimeter of the bar. Where the ends terminate in a longitudinal rib, the width of the
longitudinal rib shall be considered the gap. Where more than two longitudinal ribs
are involved, the total width of all longitudinal ribs shall not exceed 25% of the
nominal perimeter of the bar. Furthermore, the summation of gaps shall not exceed
25% of the nominal perimeter of the bar. The nominal perimeter of the bar shall be
3.14 times the nominal diameter
e) The spacing/height and gap of deformations shall conform to the requirements

prescribed in Table 1 of ASTM A615.
f) Any bar that fails to satisfy the above requirements is to be treated as plain
reinforcement according to ACI Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete ACI 318-95.
5.1.1.8 Timber for Doors/Windows
Timber for doors shall conform to BDS 142; specification for Wood Doors (under revision):
BDS 820, Recommendation for maximum permissible moisture content of timber used for
different purpose in Bangladesh.
Timber used for doorframe and leaf shall be well-seasoned, dry and straight grained, free
from knots and other defects affecting its appearance, strength and durability. All timbers
used for doors/windows shall be mechanically seasoned and the moisture content shall not be
more than 12-13%.
5.1.1.9 Aluminum Sections
All Aluminum Sections shall conform to U.S. Architectural Aluminum Manufactures

Association Standards (AAMA).
The following are the standards to be followed for Aluminum doors, windows and curtain
147
148
walls or as specified in Bill of Quantity:
Channel thickness for doors : 1.8 -2.5mm

Channel thickness for windows : 1.2 -1.8mm
Anodization thickness : 15 microns
Density of anodization : 4mg per sq. m
5.1.1.10 Glass
 Glass for aluminum door and window tinted or clear should be 5mm thick and there
should be no undulations
 For smaller wooden panel/M.S. glazed shutters glass should be 3mm thick and there
should
 be no undulations.
5.1.1.11M.S. Pipe
M.S. pipe shall be made from low carbon steel conforming to ASTM A53 and
following physical requirements:
Nominal Wall Inside Outside

Diameter Weight
Pipe Thickness Diameter
(kg/m)
Diameter (mm) (mm) (mm)
150 mm 7.11 154.08 168.30 28.26
100 mm 6.02 102.36 114.40 16.07
75mm 5.49 77.92 88.90 11.29
50mm 3.91 52.48 60.30 5.44
25mm 3.38 26.64 33.40 2.50
20mm 2.87 20.96 26.70 1.69
12mm 2.77 15.76 21.30 1.27
5.1.1.12 UPVC Pipe
UPVC pipe shall be of Un-plasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) and shall conform to the
following specifications:
Specific Gravity : 1.36 -1 .43

2 2
Tensile strength : 450 Kgf/Cm -560 Kgf/Cm
Elongation : 80%
2
Compressive Strength : 600-700 Kgf/Cm
148
149
Mean outside Schedule 40 Wall Schedule 80 Wall

Nominal Size
Diameter (MM) Thickness (mm) Thickness (mm)
Inch (mm) Min Mix Min Mix Min Mix
2.00” 50 60.17 60.47 3.91 4.42 5.54 6.20
3.00” 75 88.70 89.10 5.49 6.15 7.62 8.53
4.00” 100 114.07 114.53 6.02 6.73 8.56 9.58
5.00” 125 141.05 141.55 6.55 7.34 9.52 10.66
6.00” 150 168.00 168.56 7.11 7.79 10.97 12.29
8.00” 200 218.70 219.46 8.18 9.17 12.70 14.22
5.2 Mobilization and Preparation of the Site
Description
This item shall consists of mobilization of man powers, materials & equipment and
preparation of site by clearing off of the site of rubbish of all kinds including surplus earth,
slurry, weeds, grass etc., cutting and uprooting of trees of all girth; removal of drains,
dewatering & bailing out of water, during whole construction period, sewers or any other
services, leveling of site including filling, if necessary, protection of the periphery of the site
by earth to prevent passage of any outside rain and waste water etc. dismantling of existing
structure if any, and removal of surplus materials and debris to a safe distance as directed by
the Project Manager.
Construction Requirement:
Before setting out the new work and commencing foundation work the site must be cleared
off of all those described above. On clearance of site it should be roughly leveled as required.
The trees shall be cut and their roots totally up-rooted as directed by the Project Manager No
tree should be cut unless it is absolutely unavoidable. All serviceable materials obtained from
the clearing shall be property of the competent authority as determined by the Project
Manager. Salvaged material may be handed over by the Contractor to the local authority on
instruction from the Employer.
5.3 Dismantling & Removal of Existing Structures for Rehabilitation Sites
Description
This item shall consist of the removal/ dismantling and satisfactory cleaning, stacking, storing
or disposal, inside or outside the site of such portions of existing structures as provided in the
Plans, Schedule of Quantities and Specifications or ordered by the Project Manager. This
includes all items such as breaking and removal of khoa debris, concrete, R.C.C, brick work,
plaster and other items as mentioned in schedule of quantity or as directed by the Project
Manager.
149
150
Construction Requirement
Before commencement of removal/ dismantling work, the structure or parts thereof shall be
properly earmarked and necessary arrangement for stabilization of the adjoining structures
shall be ensured by means of adequate shoring, shuttering, propping and strutting. The
dismantling work shall not commence until the arrangement of safety of the adjoining
structure has been insured by the Contractor, inspected and approved by the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any damage to the portion of structure which'
were not intended to be dismantled and make good the damages, if any, at his own cost. The
Contractor shall comply with all safety regulations and shall furnish, erect and maintain
suitable barricades and warning signs and take such other measures as necessary to prevent
personal injury or property damage. All these barricades, warning signs shall comply with the
by-laws, regulations and provisions of BNBC and shall be to the satisfaction of Employer,
and Local Authorities concerned.
This item of work also includes cleaning and sorting out of the salvaged materials ina usable
condition, transporting and storing neatly for use/disposal as directed by the Project Manager.
The items of dismantling works of different structures in foundation also include all
excavation, bailing out water by pumping, drainage, bracing, shoring, etc. as found necessary
and their subsequent removal and satisfactory disposal of all materials obtained from such
excavations and backfilling to the level of original ground where required. The Contractor
shall keep adequate records of all dimensional measurements of the structures and all other
information relating to them as revealed and obtained during their work and have such
measurements and information duly endorsed by the Project Manager at site. The work shall
not start unless full measurement is recorded by the Project Manager. In some special cases,
however, the recording may be done after dismantling.
The salvaged materials before or after dismantling shall be immediately measured and
recorded in presence of the Project Manager and shall be in the custody of the Contractor
until instructed to be disposed of by the Project Manager. Any loss of any dismantled
material shall be recovered from the Contractor's bill at the recovery rate.
5.4 Site office Facilities for the Project Manager and his Staff
Description
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary site office facilities during the
construction period for the Employer and Consultant.
5.5 Earth Work in Excavation for Structure
Description
The item shall consist of setting out true lines to all foundations for structures, performing the
excavations to the required levels and grades in any kind of soil encountered, removing the
spoils and backfilling of original ground line as provided in these specifications or as directed
by the Project Manager.
150
151
Construction Requirements
The Contractor shall comply with all safety regulations and shall furnish, erect and maintain
suitable barricades and warning signs and take such other measures as necessary to prevent
personal injury or property damage.
5.5.1 Earth Filling
Description
The item shall consist of filling any place or area, to make up levels, according to these
Specifications and Plans with specified earth materials.
Silty Sand or other approved materials, free from large lumps, organic or other extraneous
materials, shall be used for fill. Materials from excavation on the sites may be used as
ordinary fill if it is approved.
about 150 mm thick and compacted by use of mechanical 1.5 ton “Vibro” compactor or other
standard dry density for other area.
Tests shall have to be carried out at recognized laboratory to ascertain the nature of the fill
material and the degree of compaction obtained for the filled material for which samples have
to be taken and transported by the Contractor at his expense and as directed by the Project
Manager.
5.5.2 Sand Filling
Description
The item shall consist of filling any place or area, to make up levels, according to these
Specifications and Plans with specified and approved materials.
Construction Requirements:
Silty Sand or other approved materials, free from large lumps, organic or other extraneous
materials, shall be used for filling Materials from excavation on the sites may be used as
ordinary fill if it is approved.
Materials
Fineness modulus not less than 1.0 shall be clean and free from organic and other deleterious
materials.
about 150rnrn thick and compacted by use of mechanical 1.5 ton “Vibro” compactor or other
standard dry density for other area. In filling /back filling against a newly constructed
structure precaution must be taken so that the structure is well matured to take the thrust of
filling and while filling that against a wall, the filling is done from both sides simultaneously.
151
152
Tests shall have to be carried out at recognized laboratory to ascertain the nature of the fill
material and the degree of compaction obtained for the filled material for which samples have
to be taken and transported to the recognized laboratory by the Contractor at his expense and
as directed by the Project Manager.
5.6 Brick Flat Soling (BFS)
Description
The item shall consist of supplying and laying bricks on top of the earth or sand bed to form a
sub-base.
Bricks shall comply with requirements of First Class bricks. The binding sand shall have a
minimum Fineness Modulus of 1.0 and shall be clean, and free of any organic matters.
Bricks shall be laid flat in surface to surface contact with adjoining bricks and their joints
shall be filled with sand. The sand shall be brushed in until the joints are filled. Flushing in of
sand with water shall not be done unless permitted. Bricks shall not be laid on the floor or
foundation bed until the floor or foundation bed is inspected and approved by the Project
Manager.
In case of Multi-Layer Soling, care shall be taken to stagger or "break" all joints in placing
subsequent courses of soling. No brick shall be laid on loose earth or earth filling which are
not compacted to the desired degree.
5.7 Lean Cement Concrete (CC) Works
The specification shall be the same as for RCC works excepting that:
(i) No reinforcement shall be used;

(ii) Proportion shall be as noted in Schedule of Items;
(iii) 12 mm downgraded chips of Jhama bricks /Boulder shall be used as coarse
aggregate as specified in Schedule of items;
(iv) The curing shall be done for 7 days minimum;
(v) Compaction of concrete may be done by wooden or steel tempers or rammers in lieu
of vibrators.
In order to improve bond with masonry/concrete work coming above it, if required, the
surface shall be roughened before it reaches initial set, by scouring with the help of a pointed
tool.
152
153
5.8 Cement Concrete in Floor
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing in floor or elsewhere, 75mm or
38mm thick cement concrete with 1:3:6 mix of cement, sand of FM 1.2 and 12mm
downgraded bricks or stone chips as specified in schedule of items.
Construction shall be carried out as per requirements of drawing.
5.9 Damp Proof Course
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing, on top of foundation walls or
elsewhere 75mm/ 38 mm thick artificial stone with a 1:1.5:3 mix of cement, sand of FM 2.5
and 12 mm downgraded crushed stone chips and finishing with a coat of bitumen as per
instruction of the Project Manager.
Damp-proof course shall extend the full width of the plinth walls unless otherwise required
by the plans and shall be laid only after the levels of the plinth have been checked.
5.10 Reinforced Cement Concrete Work (RCC)
Description
This item shall consist of manufacturing concrete as provided in these Specifications and
construction where required, and of the form, dimensions and design shown on the plans.
Concrete shall consist of a mixture of Portland cement, fine and course aggregate and water.
The proportions in which the various ingredients shall be used in the concrete mix for various
work, shall be designed in accordance with the specified strength and suitable workability.
Material shall conform to the requirements specified below and in the relevant sections
Material Specifications.
Construction shall be according to these specifications. Contractor shall follow the following
standards of American Society of Testing Materials along with the Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI 318-89 for Specification not covered in these
Specifications. In case of differences between specifications contained in this book and those
of ASTM or ACI, the specifications specified in this book shall stand.
Cement
"Specification for Ordinary Portland Cement" (Type-I) - ASTM C150 orBS12
153
154
"Specification for Concrete Aggregates" - ASTM C 33

"Standard Method of Making and curing concrete Test Specimen in - ASTM C31-89
the field"
"Standard Method of Test for compressive strength of cylindrical - ASTM C39-86
concrete Specimens"
"Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" - ASTM C172-90
"Standard method of Making & Curing concrete Test Specimens in - ASTM CI92-90
the laboratory"
"Standard method of obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed - ASTM C42-90
beams of Concrete"
"Standard Specifications of Chemical admixtures in concrete" - ASTM C494
Cement shall be Portland Cement Type-I, ASTM - ASTM C150
Portland cement to be normally used shall conform to ASTM specification C-150 type-l or
BS-12. It shall be free from any hardened lumps and any foreign material other than the
manufacturing ingredients. Cement shall have a minimum 90% of particles by weight passing
the 75-micron sieve. Cement shall have an initial setting time in excess of 30 minutes and
final setting time not longer than 7 hours. The Project Manager reserves the right to reject any
cement that fails to achieve specified concrete strength as per proportion of materials laid
down in the schedule of items.
Only approved brand, grade or kind of cement shall be used in a given structure above the
ground level specially, for fare face finished concrete, tiles works etc. except upon the written
permission of theProject Manager of other used.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper storage of the cement at the job site.
Cement shall be stored in an air tight waterproof shaded area having damp proof floor,
waterproof walls and leak proof roof. The cement stacks shall be placed at a minimum
distance of 300 mm from the walls. The damp proof floor shall be constructed by raising it
minimum 300 mm above the ground. If the cement is damaged and becomes lumpy due to
defective storage, it shall be removed from the job site within 24 hours of receipt of
instructions from the Project Manager.
Cement may be measured by weight of in a standard bag to weigh 1 cwt or 112 pounds/50kg
having a volume of 0.0354 cum or 1.25 cft. The Contractor shall maintain the record of
deliveries of cement to the site and its use in the work.
Fine Aggregate (Sand)
Fine Aggregate shall consist of well-graded clean natural sand, free from injurious amount of
organic impurities and deleterious substances and shall have a fineness modulus of not less
than 2.50. Fine aggregate shall be well graded from coarse to fine and when tested by means
of laboratory sieves shall conform to the following requirements:
Sieve Mass
Percent passing
9.5 mm (3/8 in 100
154
155
4.75 mm (No.4) 95 - 100

1.18 mm (No. 16) 45- 80
0.300 mm (No. 50) 10 – 30
0.150 mm (No. 100) 2 -10
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse Aggregate shall consist of well-graded broken or crushed first class jhama bricks or
boulder chips as specified on the structural drawings and/or BQ and shall be free from any
adherent coatings.
Grading of Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregate shall be well graded, between the limits specified and the size or sizes
designated shall conform to the requirements given in the following tables or otherwise
specified or directed by the Project Manager.
Percentage by weight passing US Standardsieves having square

Designated sizes openings
38mm 25mm 20mm 12mm 10mm No.4 No.8
25 mm down graded 100 95-100 -- 25-60 -- 0-10 0-5
20 mm down graded -- 100 90-100 -- 20-55 0-10 0-5
12 mm down graded -- -- 100 90-100 40-70 0-15 0-5
Delivery and Storage of Materials:
a. Cement
In transit and storage or stock-piled at site shall be protected from dampness or any
damage by climatic conditions that would change its characteristics or usability.
Cement at site shall be stored in dry weather proof godowns (or shed)built at the cost
of the Contractor. Cement must not be stacked in more than l0 bag height. Sufficient
space shall be provided for circulation and rotation of bags in order to minimize the
length of storage of any of the bags. The floor of the godown shall consists of wooden
planks resting on base prepared of dry bricks laid on edge. Batches of cement shall be
used for the work in the order in which they are delivered to the site. A register shall
be maintained by the Contractor listing date of delivery and quantity of each
consignment for easy identification.
b. Aggregates
Aggregate shall be stock-piled at least 7 days prior to their anticipated use to permit
theProject Manager to sample each stockpile to determine the acceptability of the
material for the intended use.
Aggregates of different sizes or grades and from different sources of supply shall not
be mixed. All aggregate shall be stored free from contact with earth and other
deleterious matter.
155
156
Every precaution shall be taken during transport and stockpiling of coarse aggregate
to prevent segregation.
Segregated aggregates shall not be used until they have been thoroughly remixed and
the resultant pile is of uniform and acceptable grading at any point from which a
representative sample is taken.
Composition of Mix
The strength requirement and workability shall govern the mix proportion for each class of
concrete:
Proportion of 28 day Place of Use Aggregates Min.

concrete cylinder Cements
crushing per m3
strength Fine Coarse (50 kg bag)
(min.)
(1:1.5:3) 21 MPa In footing, water Sand 20 mm down 8.0 bags
tank, column, slab, FM 2.5 graded stone chip
beam, stair lintel and
all
other RCC works
like switch yard
foundation
(1:1.5:3.0) 20 MPa In Damp Proof Sand 12 mm down 8.0 bags
Coarse FM 1.2 graded stone chip
(1:2:4) 18 MPa In all RCC works Sand 20 mm down 6 bags

in Ancillary FM 2.5 graded picked
Structures & 1.5 jhama chip'
(1:3:6) 15 MPa In bellow foundation Sand 20 or 12 mm 4.5 bags
and FM 1.5 downgraded
Floor (C.C) picked jhama
chips
SlumpSlab, Beam, Columns etc. -50mm.
Trial mixes for every class of concrete with representative materials from site shall be
prepared by the Contractor and carried to the laboratory in accordance with approved
procedure. The nominal strength in these tests shall exceed the specified minimum strength
by at least 20%. No concrete shall be placed in the permanent works until the relevant mix
has been approved by the Project Manager.
Batching
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good order suitable measuring equipment and
devices required to determine and control accurately the relative amounts of various materials
entering the mix. All measurements shall be by weight/volume and shall be accurate within a
tolerance of 1 % for each batch. If the measurements are by volume then standard wooden
boxes shall be used.
156
157
a. Cement
Unless an integral number of bags, as packed by the manufacturer is used, the Cement shall
be weighed. A bag of cement weighing 50 kg net shall be considered as 0.035 m3
b. Aggregates
Different types and sizes of aggregates shall be batched separately by weight/volume.
c. Water
The amount of mixing water shall be weighed/measured, allowance being made for the
quantity of the free water contained in the aggregates. Water cement ratio shall be decided for
every class of concrete and according to the place of use. The water/Cement ratio shall not
exceed 45% by weight for all type of concrete.
Sufficient acceptable materials shall be available at the batching site to ensure continuous
placement necessary for structures. The moisture content of the accepted aggregate shall
remain consistent to the extent that the resultant successive batches of concrete do not vary in
consistency by more than 6 mm of slump. If the moisture content in the aggregate varies by
more than the above tolerance, corrective measures shall be taken to bring the moisture to a
constant and uniform quantity before any more concrete is placed.
Coarse aggregate shall be saturated with water at least 12 hours before use to prevent
absorption of the mixing water.
MIXING OF CONCRETE
a) Machine Mixing:
Concrete shall be mixed in concrete mixer of approved type and appropriate capacity.
Each batch shall be thoroughly mixed for a period of not less than 2 minute after all materials
including the water are in the drum and during this period the drum shall be in the mixing
position and revolve at uniform rate of not less than 14 or more than 20 revolutions per
minute. The cement and sand shall be thoroughly mixed in dry condition.
The batch shall be so charged into the mixer drum that some water shall enter in advance of
the cement and aggregate. The entire content shall be removed from the drum before the
succeeding batch is placed.
Concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Concrete shall not be used
which has developed initial set or which is not in place within thirty (30) minutes after the
water has been added. Re-tempering of partially hardened concrete by remixing with or
without additional materials or water, or by other means shall not be permitted. The inside of
the mixing drum shall be kept free of hardened concrete at all times.
Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned
before any fresh concrete is mixed. Unless otherwise agreed by theProject Manager, the first
batch of concrete through the mixer shall contain only two thirds of the normal quantity of
coarse aggregate. Mixing plant shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of
157
158
cement to another.
b) Hand Mixing:
Hand mixing shall not be permitted except for unimportant structural members and only at
the discretion of the Project Manager. When hand mixing is permitted it shall be taken to
ensure that the mixing is continued until the mass is uniform in colour and consistency. If
hand mixing is permitted by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall use l0% extra cement
for hand mixing for which no extra payment will be made.
Consistency of Concrete
The consistency of concrete shall be determined following evaluation of the placement

conditions for each individual section of the work but in no case the slump shall exceed
62mm unless otherwise decided. Mix proportions and consistency shall produce a dense, well
compacted concrete with a minimum tendency to segregate under placing conditions, free
from sand streaks, honeycomb, air-pockets, exposed reinforcing steel and other forms of
structural weakness or unsatisfactory appearance.
Transport and Placing
Concrete shall be so transported from the mixer and placed in the form that contamination,
segregation or loss of the constituent materials does not occur. Before placing the concrete,
all form work, space and the reinforcement contained in it shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
extraneous matter. Care shall be taken to fill every part of the forms, to work the coarse
aggregate back from the face so that sufficient mortar shall be flushed from the mass to form
a smooth surface, and to force the concrete under and around reinforcing bars without
displacing them.
The concrete shall be deposited in the forms in horizontal layers to a depth not exceeding 300
mm and each layer shall be properly vibrated before laying the next one.
The concrete shall not be dropped freely from a height exceeding 1.0meter nor shall it be
deposited in large quantities at any point. In columns of structures special tremie pipe may be
used for drop more than 1.8 meters. Dragging of concrete inside the forms or distribution by
vibrators or allowing it to flow by gravity to the ends of the forms shall not be permitted.
In sections where it is extremely difficult, to place concrete containing the larger sizes of the
coarse aggregate, a modified mix, as approved by the Project Manager, may be used to ensure
against honeycomb and separation of the coarse aggregate from the mortar. Concrete shall be
deposited and compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of its discharge from the
mixer and shall not be subjected to vibration between 2 and 24 hours after compaction. When
insitu concrete has been in place for 4 hours no further concrete shall be placed against it for
a further 20 hours.
Compaction
Concrete, during and immediately after placing, shall be thoroughly compacted by

mechanical vibration. The vibration shall be internal unless otherwise authorized by the
Project Manager.
158
159
Vibration shall be of a type and design approved by the Project Manager. It shall be capable
of transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than 4,500 impulses per
minute.
The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of concrete of one inch
slump over a radius of at least 450 mm.
The Contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly compact each batch
immediately after it is placed in the forms. He also provided sufficient number of nozzles of
different diameter to execute the work smoothly.
Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly deposited concrete.
Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforcement to sections or layers of
concrete which have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to lie plastic under
vibration. It shall not be used to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to
cause segregation. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the forms.
Concrete pouring schedules and construction joint sequences of different stages shall have to
be approved well in advance by the Project Manager.
Construction and Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be constructed at the locations and to the dimensions shown on the
plans. Position and detail of construction joints, not shown on the plans, shall be planned in
advance and approved by the Project Manager. Placement of concrete shall be in a
continuous operation between consecutive joints.
Where sections of the work are carried out in lifts, the line of the proposed joint on all
exposed surfaces shall be made truly straight by tacking a temporary horizontal straight edge
on the inside of the form with its lower edge on the line of the joint and then placing concrete
12 mm higher than this edge to allow for settlement. In case of water reservoir PVC water
stopper shall be used in all construction joints with 250mm overlapping at the water stopper
joints.
In resuming the work, the old concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of laitance and all
loose material by stiff wire brush, roughened, if deemed necessary, and washed with clean
water.
The surface then shall be coated with very thick cement slurry before fresh concrete is placed.
Water Reservoir/Tank
Admixture of Sika Plastocrete Super (Conforms to both IS 2645 and IS 9103) 0.2% by
weight of cement or similar product of approved quality at manufacturer recommendation for
heavy duty water tank are to be used in bases and walls of R.C.C. reservoirs/tank.
159
160
Special Casting process for Columns and R.C.C. Wall
Minimum of construction joints shall be allowed in beams, slab and column of the structures.
No construction joint in columns from below floor to bottom of beam shall be allowed,
column must be cast in a lift, to avoid any construction joint below lintel level. Special
shuttering with opening at middle height shall be used for the facility of casting. The opening
shall be closed after casting of concrete upto that level without disturbing the green concrete.
The Contractor shall prepare shuttering details ahead of actual work and shop drawings are to
be approved by the Project Manager. In any case the safety and stability of form work shall
be the Contractor's responsibility. No construction joint shall be allowed between beam, web
& roof slab of building. For wall & water reservoir no concrete shall be placed from a height
of more than 1.0m and the shuttering of the wall shall not be more than 1.25m in height.
Control Tests for Concrete
a. Sampling:
The number, frequency and location of batches to be sampled shall be decided by the
Project Manager. The method of sampling shall be according to ASTM C172.
b. Slump
This determination shall be made at the commencement of concreting, on the occasion of

each change in mix proportions, and thereafter when requested by the Project Manager.
The testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C- 143, current issue.
c. Compressive Strength
Test cylinders 150 mm in diameter and 300 mm high shall be made at the site of the work
in sets of three (3) from each thirty (30) cubic meter of each class of concrete or fraction
thereof or as directed by the Project Manager.
Casting and curing the concrete cylinders shall be in accordance with ASTM C-31,
current issue. Testing of cylinders shall be done in accordance with ASTM C- 39, current
issue; one cylinder at 7 days and 2 at 28-days. Cylinder at 7 days test shall not be less
than 70% of the specified (design) strength.
If the Project Manager allows cubes to be tested instead of cylinders, the cube strength
shall be at least 25.0 percent higher than the cylinder strength specified.
The Contractor shall arrange to transport the cylinders/cubes to the approved laboratory
and arrange to have the test results forwarded (in duplicate) directly from the laboratory
to the Project Manager or his appropriate site representative. The Contractor shall bear all
expenses in connection with the preparation of test cylinders /cubes, i.e. provision of
moulds, cost of concrete, labor and transportation charges to the approved laboratory,
laboratory testing charges etc.
Formwork
Formwork may consist of steel sheets of minimum thickness of 14 BG or wooden planks of
160
161
hard wood of approved variety having a minimum thickness of 45 mm with necessary

battens, struts, stringers, beams, ties, etc. In case of wooden planks the same shall be new and
shall not be used more than three times in contact with concrete.
All formworks, especially for fair face concreting, must be 12 BG steel sheet and should be
dented, rust free by using of sanding disk etc. before every lift of casting.
All formwork shall be of sound materials constructed water-tight, true to line as per drawing
and of such rigidity to prevent bulging or movement during the placement and curing of the
concrete. Form work for bases and walls of water reservoir shall have chamfer of appropriate
dimension as per drawing and direction. After hardening the concrete shall conform to the
shape, dimensions and surface finish described in the Contract. The forms shall be simple in
construction, easy for erection, maintenance and removal
Form lining shall be in largest practicable panel to minimize joints. Under usual conditions
the following minimum periods between concreting and the removal of formwork shall be
observed:
Vertical sides : 72 hours

Soffits from under span of 6 meter or : 18 days
less
Soffits from under span of over 6 meters : Min. 21 days and as directed by Project
Manager.
Concrete exposed by the removal of formwork shall be left untouched pending inspection by
the Project Manager. Cement mortar separators or block of appropriate sizes are to be used in
all covering as per drawing or directed by Project Manager.
The drip course shall be constructed at the edge of roof slab etc. by means of an approved
batten included in the form work before casting or after casting as desired by the Project
Manager.
Surface Finish and Remedial Treatment of Surfaces
Unless otherwise provided on the plans, all reasonably true and even surfaces, which are of
uniform colour and texture, and free from stone pockets, honeycomb, depressions or
projections, shall be considered as acceptable surfaces.
Immediately after the removal of forms, all cavities produced by form ties and all other holes,
broken corners or edges and other defects except air bubble holes, shall be cleaned and after
having been kept saturated with water for a period of not less than two hours shall be
completely filled, rammed and made good with a mortar of the same proportions as used in
the concrete being finished.
The holes shall be completely filled by use of a pressure gun or hand rammed method as
directed by Project Manager's representative.
Any remedial treatment to surfaces shall be agreed with the Project Manager following
inspection immediately after removing the formwork and shall be carried out without delay.
161
162
Any concrete, the surface of which has been treated before being inspected by the Project
Manager, shall be liable to rejection.
Curing and Protection
Concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of weather for a period of not less than
seven (7) days immediately following the placing of concrete.
All concrete surface shall be covered with two thicknesses of wet burlap which have been
spot stitched, or wet jute felt or gunny bags as soon after placing of concrete as it can be done
without marking the surface and kept thoroughly wet by continuous sprinkling of water for a
period of not less than 21 days after the concrete has taken its final set.
In lieu of continuous sprinkling, plastic sheeting or plastic-coated burlap may be used to

prevent moisture loss. The concrete RCC shall be pre-moistened and the plastic sheeting shall
be held securely in place so that positive moisture seal is provided to retain the curing
moisture during the 21 days curing period. Form of perforated sheeting shall De without
delay repaired or replaced with acceptable material.
TRAINED SUPERVISOR
It is essential that the Contractor's supervisor who is in charge of the construction of all
concrete work whether reinforced or not, shall be skilled in this class of work and shall
superintend personally the whole construction and pay special attention to:
a) The quality, testing, proportioning and mixing of the materials and particularly control of
water cement ratio
b) Laying of materials in place and thorough consolidation of the concrete to ensure solidity
and freedom from voids.
c) Position of reinforcements.
5.11 RCC with Water Proofing Admixture
Description
This item shall be done as described in item 2.12 except that for water proofing admixture of
Sika Plastocrete Supper (IS: 2645 and IS 9103) in proportion of 0.2% by weight of cement' or
"SUPER BARBARA 05" of MBI International AG, NITTOPROOF of FOSROK or
equivalent, made in UK/Switzerland/Singapore/Saudi Arabia in proportion recommended by
the manufacturer is to be used in the concrete of the basement mat & wall, underground water
reservoir and where necessary.
This approved admixture shall be put to the concrete mixture machine along with the cement.
Other procedures are same as in item 2.10 including formwork etc.
162
163
5.12 Reinforcing Steel in Concrete
Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and placing in concrete reinforcing steel (Deformed bar)
of quality type size and quantity designated, all as required by these Specifications and as
shown on the applicable structural drawings.
Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars of 60 graded as specified on the structural drawings
and shall meet the following requirements:
1. Quality of reinforcement steel, its properties including strength, elongation,

bending, splicing, hooking, covering and all related events shall be in accordance
with the requirements of ACI 318-89.
2. De-formed bars, when used shall meet the requirements of BS: 4461 or ASTM:
A615 of high strength of 60 - grade.
It should be noted that steel made from scrap iron shall not be accepted for any type of work.
All reinforcement bars shall be clean and free from loose scale, dirt, paint oil, grease or other
foreign substance. Bars should be placed in position as drawing/design requirement and be
cleaned with a stiff wire brash if required.
Bending of Reinforcement
All reinforcement bars shall be bent cold to pertinent dimensions using bending appliances
and method approved by the Project Manager. All bars of slab and beam shall invariably have
standard hooks at the end. All standard hooks shall meet the following requirements:
a. A semicircular turn plus an extension of at least four bar diameters but not less
than 62 mm at the free end of the bar.
b. A 90 degree turn plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of
the bar.
c. For stirrup and tie anchorage only either a 90 degree or a 135 degree turn plus an
extension of at least six bar diameters but not less than 62 mm at the free end of
the bar.
The radii of bend measured on the inside of the bar for standard hooks shall not be less than
the values given below:
Bar size Minimum radii

10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm 2.5 bar dia.
20 mm, 22 mm, 25 mm 3 bar dia.
Bends for stirrups and ties shall have radii on the inside ofthe bar not less than one bar
diameter.
163
164
Placing of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be placed, supported and maintained in the position shown in the
Drawing and shall be checked and approved by the Project Manager before placement of
concrete begins. Unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager, all intersecting bars
shall be tied together with double layer of22G black iron wire and the ends of wire shall be
turned into the main body of the concrete. Clear cover must be maintained to the side of
reinforcement as shown on the drawing by using concrete blocks or separators.
Splicing of Reinforcement
No splices shall be made in the reinforcement where not shown in the drawing. Wherever it is
necessary to splice reinforcement at points other than those shown on the plans, Drawings
showing the location of each splice shall be submitted to and approved by the Project
Manager before the reinforcing steel is placed.
a. Splices in reinforcement in which critical design stress is tensile
Splices at points of maximum tensile stress shall be avoided where possible, such
splices where used shall be lapped or otherwise fully developed. In any case 'the
splice shall transfer the entire computed stress from bar to bar without exceeding
three fourths of the permissible bond values for the concrete. The length oflap shall
be 40 bar diameter excluding hook. However, length of splices to be used for
different bars shall be according to drawing or according to the direction of Project
Manager.
b. Splices in reinforcement in which critical design stress is compressive
Where lapped splices are used it shall be minimum of35 bar diameters excluding
hook. Where longitudinal bars are offset at a splice the slope ofthe inclined portion
of the bar with the axis of the column shall not exceed 1 in 6 and the portions of the
bar above and below the offset shall be parallel to the axis of the column. Adequate
horizontal support at the offset shall be secured by additional stirrups, ties, etc.
Offset bars shall be bent before they are placed in the forms.
Supports
Pre-cast concrete blocks or metal supports of adequate strength, of proper dimension and in
sufficient number shall be used for supporting the bars in position. Blocks shall be of a shape
acceptable to the Project Manager and designed so that they shall not overturn when concrete
is stored. They shall be made of concrete with 10 mm maximum aggregate size from same
materials and of the same mix proportions as that of the concrete in which they are to be
used. They shall be cast and properly cured for at least seven days before use and shall have
wire or other device cast in the block for the purpose of attaching them securely to the
reinforcement. Where directed chairs made with 12mm bars shall be provided for keeping the
negative reinforcement in place during concreting. These chairs when used shall provide
proper cover as required and the numbers shall be as decided by the Project Manager.
164
165
Welding of Reinforcement
Reinforcement in structures shall not be welded except where permitted. All welding
procedures shall be subject to the prior approval of the Project Managers in writing. In pile
reinforcement welding may be necessary and shall be done in accordance to the drawing and
with the approval of the Project Manager. Welding for connecting the damaged portion of the
reinforcement shall be allowed on both sides of the Re-bar and shall be 50 mm of welding
length on both sides and on ends.
If welded connections are made on intermediate grade reinforcing steel, to hold bars in
position, low hydrogen electrodes shall be used.
Concrete protection for Reinforcement
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the covering of reinforcement for different types of
members shall be as follows:
Column, Footing/Mat & Pile Cap

All sides, below FGL 75mm
Column:
All sides, above FGL 50mm
Grade Beam:
All faces 60mm
Other beams in Structures:

Side, Top and Bottom 50mm
Slab, lintle and staircase:
Bottom 25mm
Top 20mm
Protective Coating
All exposed reinforcing steel at construction joints shall be protected with a brush coat of
neat cement, mixed to a consistency of thick paint, within one week after the placing of the
initial concrete, unless it is definitely known that the steel shall be embedded within 60 days.
This coating shall be entirely removed, by lightly tapping with a hammer or other tool, more
than one week previous to the placing of the final pour. The Contractor shall notify the
Project Manager or his authorized representative when the steel has been placed in position
for pouring concrete and no concrete shall be placed until the Project Manager has inspected
the steel and given his approval in writing.
165
166
5.13 Brick Work
5.13.1 250mm BRICK WORK AND ABOVE
Description
This item shall consist of constructing brick masonry work in 1:5 cement mortar in such
thickness and at such heights as required by the plans.
All materials shall meet the requirement of the relevant sections of Material Specifications.
a. Bricks shall be 1st class well burnt bricks of uniform colour, shape, size with sharp
corners bricks unless otherwise specified.
b. Cement shall be Portland cement Type-I ASTM C- 150 or BS - 12
c. Sand shall be clean well graded natural sand having a minimum FM of 1.5.
d. Water shall be same as required for concrete.
Mortar
Mortar of brickwork unless otherwise required shall consists of 1 part of cement and 5 parts
of sand.
Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in the specified proportions until the colour of the
mixture is uniform. Water shall then be added sparingly, only the minimum necessary being
used to produce a workable mixture of normal consistency, the water cement ratio in no case
shall exceed 0.50 by weight, or as directed by the Project Manager.
The mixing shall be done on a clean hard platform with watertight joints to avoid leakage.
The mixture should be covered with polythene sheet or other means so that dust or other
foreign materials cannot be deposited. At the close of each day's work, the mixing trough and
the pans shall be thoroughly cleaned and washed.
Mortar shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use within 30 minutes of mixing.
Mortar, which has taken its initial set, shall, on no account be used on the work, nor shall it
be remixed with or without additional materials or re tempered by other means.
Workmanship
No bricks shall be used until they have been thoroughly soaked in clear water for at least
eight hours. Soaking shall be discontinued one hour before use. Care shall be taken that the
bricks are clean and free from lime or dirt of any kind. If necessary, bricks shall be scrubbed
clean.
Brickwork shall be built in plumb and shall be carried up regularly throughout the entire
length of the structure. Unless otherwise specified, bricks shall be laid in English Bond unless
otherwise specified each brick being set with mortar in bed and vertical joints. All bricks
shall be whole except where necessary for closers and where expressly authorized. All
horizontal joints shall be parallel and level. Vertical joints in alternate courses shall come
166
167
directly over one another. Joint thickness should be uniform and shall be 6 mm for pointing
brick work and shall in no case exceed 10 mm for other brick works. Exposed joints shall be
raked and flush-pointed unless otherwise specified and the face of the work shall be kept
clean as work proceeds. The height of day's work shall be limited to 1.25 meter unless
otherwise permitted. In exposed situations the day's work shall be protected against harmful
effect of weather during and for a period immediately following construction until the mortar
has sufficiently hardened. All brickwork shall be thoroughly cured for a period of at least 7
days. Fixture in masonry such as anchors, clamps, brackets, pipes, etc. shall be built-in during
construction at no additional cost to the Contract.
5.13.2 125 mm Thick Brick Work
The work covered by this item shall consists in constructing 125 mm thick wall with 1st class
bricks in 1:4 cement mortar at any heights as required by the plans.
Construction Requirement and Materials
Materials and method of construction shall be as stated in item 2.13.1 except that the mortar
shall consist of one (1) part of cement and four (4) parts of sand.
5.14 Patent Stone Flooring
Description
The item shall consist of constructing 25 mm /38mm thick concrete with 12 mm downgraded
picked “Jhama” brick chips, sand and cement in specified panels of floor slab and elsewhere
in accordance with these Specifications, use approximately 25 kg of cement per 10 m2for neat
cement finish and finish with steel trowel up to the satisfaction of Project Manager or as
directed.
Materials and construction shall be in accordance with the requirements of item 2.10. The
flooring shall be laid preferably not later than 24 hours after the floor slab is poured. When
flooring is to be laid on an older concrete slab, the base surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of
all loose materials by stiff wire brush, roughened if seemed necessary and washed and soaked
with clean water. Surplus water shall be removed and a dense cement grouting is applied to
the surface before flooring is placed.
The floor shall be divided into panels of specified sizes, which shall not be more than 16
sq.m. by means of wooden 'battens. The top of the battens shall be at the level of the finished
"surface.
The mixture shall be spread evenly between the battens in alternate panels and shall be
uniformly consolidated and leveled by a strike-off. When the moisture has disappeared from
the surface, the surface shall be steel troweled under firm pressure to produce a dense
uniform smooth surface free from trowel marks.
The dividing battens shall be removed carefully after 16 hrs. and the remaining panels shall
be completed in the aforesaid manner. Joints would be marked with thin ropes to allow
167
168
cracks, if any, to form along straight line and providing neat appearance.
The work shall be cured and protected from weather for at least 10 days immediately
following the laying.
5.15 Ceramic Tiles
5.15.1 Glazed Ceramic Tiles
Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and fixing glazed ceramic tiles
on walls and where necessary on a 1:3 cement mortar in accordance with the applicable
plans, schedules and these specifications.
Glazed ceramic tiles unless otherwise specified, shall be standard Grade 200mm x 300mm x
6mm and 250mm x 400mm x 6mm white interior wall tiles free from war page, blemishes
and dimensional defects and conforming to the standards of Federal specification SS-T-308b.
Mortar for installation shall consist of one (1)part cement to three (3) parts sand (FM 1.5).
Grout for tile joints shall be made of white cement coloured as and where specified with inert
pigments.
Preparation of wall surface and application of mortar bed shall comply with the provisions of
item 2.16.1 &2.16.2. If the surface needs leveling a scratch coat of plaster shall be applied,
leveled and scratched for key and allowed to dry for 12 hours before installing tiles. The
setting mortar shall be applied evenly and a neat-cement paste to a thickness of about 1.5mm
shall be trawled to the back of tile and the tile set on firmly tapped into place to ensure full
contact. The joints shall be in specified pattern and shall not exceed 1.5 mm in width.
The mortar bed shall be minimum 6mm thick and shall be cut through horizontally and
vertically every 400 mm to 600 mm. The tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 6 hours
before setting. Installation shall be controlled by strings, pegs, spacers, levels or other
suitable methods to ensure correct layout and uniform leveled joints. The joints shall be
grouted, cleaned and damp-cured for at least 3 days.
5.15.2 Non-Slip Tiles Work
The Non-slip tile shall be smooth, water proof, dust pressed with square edges (Bangladeshi)
and size of the tiles shall be between 200mm x 300mm or 250mm x 250mm or 300 mm x 300
mm. No border edging or rounding pieces shall be used. Length of each size of floor/wall
shall be filled by the tiles completely. The cut sizes if used at the ends shall be equal in size
and as closed to full size as possible by making either the edge or the centre of tile to coincide
with the vertical centre line of floor/wall. The waI1/floor on which the tile shall be applied
shall be kept moistened for 2 hours. The bedding mortar in 1:2 using medium sand (FM 1.5)
shall be applied. The joints in tiles shall be minimum 5 mm wide, kept clean for pointing and
to be filled flush with pointing material with white or coloured cement mortar unless
168
169
otherwise specified. Measurement shall be given for the actual area covered by the tiles. No
measurement of the under bed shall be given.
5.16 Plaster Work
5.16.1 Plaster on Brick Masonry
Description
This item shall consist of providing 12 mm to 20 mm thick (1:4)/ (1:6) on walls, and where
necessary in accordance with these Specifications & direction ofProject Manager.
Materials shall meet requirements specified below and in the relevant section of Material
Specifications.
a. Cement shall be Ordinary Portland cement Type-I ASTM C- 150 or BS-12
b. Sand shall be clean well-grade natural sand having a fineness modulus of 1.50. Sand
shall be washed if necessary.
c. Water shall be potable and clean and contain no salt or organic materials.
d. Admixture shall be mixed with the cement mortar of approved quantity where item in
BOQ is specifically mentioned.
Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in the specified proportion until the mixture is uniform
in colour. Only enough water shall be added to provide plasticity. Mortar shall be mixed only
in quantities for immediate use. Mortar which has taken initial set shall not be used on the
work with or without addition of fresh material.
Before application of plaster, the joints in brick walls shall be adequately raked out where
necessary and smooth concrete surfaces shall be roughened to provide key. The surfaces shall
be scrubbed clean of loose materials and soaked with water and kept damped for 24 hours in
case of brick masonry.
Plaster which consists of two coats, under and finish, when applied over brick masonry, the
"under and finish coats shall be applied with an interval to permit the undercoat to set. Water
proofing admixture of specified quantity shall be mixed with cement mortar as per
manufacturer‟s instruction.
Plaster shall be kept moist by watering and protected from weather for at least 10 days
immediately following completion.
If any cracks appear in the plaster or any part sounds hollow when tapped or is found to be
soft or otherwise defective after the plaster has dried, it shall be considered as defect and the
defect shall be made good by cutting out and re-plastering at the Contractor's own cost.
169
170
5.16.2 Plaster on R.C.C Surfaces
Description
This item shall consist of providing 6 mm to 12 mm thick 1: 4 cement-sand plasters on all

RCC members in accordance with this Specification.
Plaster shall consist of 1-part cement and 4 parts sand and have thickness of 6 mm and shall
be applied in a single coat, where plaster on concrete surface is required 12 mm thick, it shall
consist of two coats, under and finish. The under coat shall consist of a grout application and
shall have minimum thickness of 6 mm and shall be leveled with straight edge and scratched
for key. The finish coat shall be trowelled over with care and leveled with straight edge to
obtain a flat smooth surface. The under and finish coats shall be applied with an interval to
permit the under coat to set. All edges and corners unless otherwise shown on the plans, shall
be rounded or chamfered as directed by the Project Manager. All moldings shall be neat,
clean and true to template.
5.16.3 Plaster with Water Proofing Admixtures
Description
This item consists of providing 20 mm thick 1:4 cement mortar plaster with water proofing
admixture of "Sika Plastorate Super" 0.2% by weight of cement or any other admixture of
internationally reputed manufacturer in the proportion recommended by them shall be used as
per manufacturer‟s instruction. This plaster shall be used on RCC surface or Brick wall or as
directed by Project Manager.
Construction Requirement: Plaster shall consist of 1 part of Portland cement and 4 parts of
sand with recommended quantity of approved water proofing admixture. However, the whole
procedure of this works shall be subject to the approval of the Project Manager.
5.17 Neat-Cement (Skirting/Dado)
Description
This item shall consist of providing 12mm thick neat cement with black/red oxide finished
(1:2) cement- sand Skirting/Dado on a (1:4) cement-sand mortar plaster of 12 mm thick
underbid on walls or where necessary in accordance with these specifications.
Materials shall meet requirement as stated in item in 2.16.1
Wall plaster, if any, shall be removed along the floor to the required height and the surface
shall be thoroughly scrubbed and wetted before applying the underbid. The second undercoat
shall have a nominal thickness of 6 mm and the total built-up thickness shall be same as that
of the plaster on the wall. A 3 mm deep and 3 mm wide groove shall be formed where
skirting/Dado meets wall plaster.
170
171
The skirting/Dado shall be installed flush with the finished wall surface. The intersection with
the floor shall be a right angle and the top of the skirting/Dado shall be straight and sharp.
The underbid shall be laid as uniformly as possible and allowed to become firm before
scratching for key and subsequently allowed to become thoroughly dry before applying the
second undercoat. A neat cement paste 3 mm thick shall be spread evenly over the second
coat and shall be steel troweled under firm pressure to produce a dense uniform smooth
surface free from trowel marks.
The work shall be cured and protected from weather for at least 10 days immediately
following the installation.
5.18 Making Groove on Wall Surface
Description
The work covered by this item shall consists of making groove of 38 mm wide & 25 mm
deep and to be provided on all types of wall surface as per drawing and direction ofthe
Project Manager. The faces of the groove must be straight and well finished.
Before making groove wall shall be chiseled to attain the required depth of the groove. Care
shall be taken for chiseling. In case of any damage the Contractor shall make good to the
damage at his own cost.
5.18.1 Making Groove in RCC Casting (On Railings, Drop Walls & RCC Walls)
Description
Fair faced concrete of drop wall, railing and RCC wall shall have 20mm deep grooves as
shown. All horizontal grooves shall be 40mm wide in the front and 30mm wide at the back
and all vertical grooves shall be 25mm wide in the front and 20mm wide at the back.
Continuous horizontal grooves shall run between the parapet and the slab and also between
the slab and the drop wall. Vertical grooves shall be 2.20m apart, positioned along the
column axes and additionally two numbers in each bay except when otherwise shown. For
R.C.C works in lift walls and staircase walls, the grooves shall be positioned as shown in the
drawing. This is to be done by using approved hard wood plank made plain as per sizes to be
fixed on the shuttering beforecasting of fair faced concrete. This wedge-shaped timber shall
be used for one time onlyand shall have to be changed/ replaced at the time of changing of
plywood during shuttering work of fair faced concrete. This timber must be straight and free
from any defect. REEBOL release agent or any other approved type is to be used before
every casting.
171
172
5.19 Painting Works
5.19.1 Distempering
Description
The item shall consist of applying 2 coat of distemper of approved color over a coat at
priming on plastered wall or ceiling surfaces where necessary in accordance with this
specification.
Distemper shall be water bound distemper of Bangladeshi made (SPD of BERZER) of

approved colour, shade and supplied in original sealed container. Priming consist of chalk
wash with glue. The surface to be distempered shall be dry, well cleaned and free from
efflorescence, dirt and stain of grease. The surface shall be given a thorough rub down to
remove all loose materials and all cracks and surface irregularities shall be repaired with
patching plaster and filler to obtain a smooth and even surface. The mixing of distemper shall
be carried out in accordance with the instruction issued by the manufacturer of the particular
brand of distemper that is to be used. Before starting work, distemper shall be mixed in such
way that one room can be finished with the same mix. Distemper is to be applied quickly.
Thebrush to be dipped and stroked cross wise on the surface. No patchy overlaps shall be
tolerated under any circumstances. Distemper shall only be applied with proper distemper
brushes as supplied or recommended by the manufacturer. A sample area must be prepared
first and got inspected and approved by theProject Manager before the full-scale work
commences. The distempers shall be used till such time as it gives a uniform texture.
5.19.1 White Wash
Description
The work covered by this item (if applicable and approved by the Project Manager) shall
consist of applying minimum 3 coats of white wash with lime on plastered or un-plastered
surfaces in accordance with these Specifications.
Constructional Requirements
Lime shall be slaked lime. The wash shall be prepared by mixing and stirring lime and water
in such quantities as shall produce a mixture of the consistency of thin cream. When
sufficiently mixed, the mixture shall be stained through a clean coarse cloth. Gum Arabic in
proportion of 1 Ib of gum to 15 lb. of lime shall be dissolved along with approved quantity of
blue & zinc oxide in the strained wash.
The surface to be white washed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter by the use of
stiff wire brush, sand papering or other approved means. White wash shall be applied in
minimum 3 coats alternately laid on vertically and horizontally. Each coat shall be perfectly
dry before the succeeding one is laid over it. The wash shall be laid on with good hair brush
& not with brush made of jute. The wash shall be laid in such a way that the whole surface
should give a uniform texture.
172
173
5.19.2 Water Repellent Coating
Description
The item shall consist of applying 2 coats of clear silicone water repellent on exposed brick
or concrete surfaces and cement plaster on wall, ceiling and elsewhere in accordance with
these Specifications.
Materials
Silicone water repellent shall consist of sodium silicate or other alkaline silicates based clear
approved product supplied in original sealed containers bearing the manufacturer's trademark.
Application Method
The application of water repellent coat shall strictly comply with the
manufacturer‟sinstructions. The application shall preferably be carried out after a period of
dry weather and before applications; the surface shall be thoroughly clean and dry. A heavy
coat shall be applied evenly direct from the container by flooding the surface with a wide
brush so that at least 6mm penetration is achieved.
A second coat, applied as above, shall follow after 24 hours subjected dry & clean weather.
5.19.3 Enamel Paint
Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of applying 2 (two) coat of synthetic enamel
paint of approved colour over a coat of priming on plaster wall or ceiling surface where
necessary in accordance with these specifications.
The plaster surface shall be painted with two coats or more of synthetic enamel ready mixed
paint of best quality and approved color. Before application the surface shall be given a
through rub down to remove all loose materials and all cracks and surface irregularities shall
be repaired with patching plaster and filler to obtain a smooth and even surface. The paint
shall be applied on appropriate primer after the surface has been finished with filler/putty, etc.
Before applying the paint on plastered surface, the surfaces must be thoroughly smooth and
cleaned from grease dirt and other foreign materials by a use of stiff wire brush, sand
papering or other approved means. Painting shall not be carried out in damp weather. No
patchy overlap shall be tolerated under any circumstances.
The enamel paint should Robialac (Berger)or equivalent and must be approved by theProject
Manager.
Manufacturer‟s instructions for application for paint must be followed. The colour of the
paint should be according to the direction of theProject Manager.
A sample area must be prepared first and got inspected and approved by theProject Manager
173
174
before the full-scale work commences.
5.19.4 French Polishing to Wooden Surface
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of providing French polishing work to wooden
surface as per direction of theProject Manager.
French polishing to door frame and shutters three coats over a coat of priming including
cleaning finishing and polishing with sand paper etc. all complete in all floor.
5.19.5 Plastic Paint
Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of applying 2 (two) coat of plastic paint of
approved color over a coat of priming on plastered wall or ceiling surface where necessary in
accordance with these specifications. The painted surface shall be easily washable by soft
soap and water.
Materials
The plastic paint should be Robialac (Berger) or equivalent and must be approved by
theProject Manager. The priming consists of appropriate type as specified for the paint by the
manufacturer and shall be applied accordingly.
Application Method
The surface to be plastic painted shall be dry, well cleaned and free from efflorescence dirt
and stain of grease. The surface shall be given a through rub down to remove all loose
materials and all cracks and surface irregularities shall be repaired with patching plaster and
filler to obtain a smooth and even surface. The mixing of plastic paint shall be carried out in
accordance with the instruction issued by the manufacturer of the particular brand of plastic
paint that is to be used. Before starting work, plastic paint shall be mixed in such way that
one room can be finished with same mix. Plastic paint is to be applied with proper brushes as
supplied or recommended by the manufacturer. A sample area must be prepared first and get
inspected and approved by theProject Manager before the full-scale work commences, the
paint work shall not be considered as complete till a surface of perfect uniformity in color,
shade and texture is achieved.
5.20 Timber Works
Descriptions
The item shall consist of supplying and fixing timber for doors, windows fitted with hardware
and finished in accordance with the applicable plans, schedules and these Specifications.
174
175
Construction Requirements for Timber Doors
Timber for shutters, trims and frames shall be Silkorai/Teak/Chapalish. Grounds, studs and
blocking shall be in sound Jam or other approved wood. All timber shall be free from sap,
shakes, large or loose knots and defects affecting the appearance, strength and durability of
construction and shall be well seasoned, dried to moisture content of 6% by weight and
treated with non-swelling, non-staining water repellent paintable wood preservative.
Glue shall be waterproof approved product consisting of synthetic resin (phenolic, amino
plastic or polyvinyl acetate) emulsion adhesives for wood or any other approved materials
conforming BS- 1204.
Knotting shall consist of a uniform dispersion of 25% flake shellac in 75% methylated spirit
or other approved natural or synthetic resin in a suitable solvent and conform to BS-I336.
Stopping shall be made from white or red lead and sufficient linseed oil to produce a stiff
paste and conform to BS-544.
Hardware shall be of approved material, finish, type and make and shall be complete with
necessary screws, trims and all other accessories required for proper installation. All screws
and accessories shall be of suitable size and type and shall match with the pigment as to
material and finish.
Joinery workmanship shall be of the highest quality. All joints shall be well made, cleanly
matched and tight. Verticals shall be plumb. Joints shall be put together with waterproof glue
and if necessary further secured with finishing nails of softwood or with screws of hardwood.
Surface shall be finished smooth free from disfiguring defaces such as raised grain, stain,
evidence of poor and uneven planning and sanding, tool marks, gouges and scratch.
All edges of woodwork shall be carefully trimmed and the arises eased by rounding to a
radius 1.0mm.
Door frames in masonry walls shall be installed only after the walls are in place and have
been cured.
Styles and rails shall be accurately cut and glued together with close fitting mortise and tenon
joints which shall be further pinned with corrosion resisting metal pins of diameter not less
than 5 mm or with hard wood pins of diameter not less than 7 mm. The joints shall be such as
to ensure complete rigidity of framing throughout.
Panels shall be tongued-and-grooved unless otherwi8se shown on the plans, Wide flat
surfaces shall be made of several narrow strips glued, dowelled, splined or dovetailed
together as required.
All faces of frame buried or hidden in masonry shall be painted with 2 coats of tar paint
before erection. The frames shall be installed plumb and fixed to brick masonry with flat iron
hold fasts (225×37×6) mm tongued and turned at the ends and to concrete with No. 12- 90
mm long screws with suitable expansion-shields or fiber-lugs. The hold fasts and fixing
screws shall be spaced not over 1 meter apart. The screw heads shall be countersunk at least
175
176
12 mm below the surface and plugged.
Butt hinges shall be set flush. All hardware shall be installed carefully in correct position
strict conformity with the manufacturer's instructions. All hardware, fitting must have
previous approval of theProject Manager before using into work.
Application of surface finishes shall conform to British Standard Code of practice CP-231.
After erection and before any finish is applied, all woodwork shall be hang -sanded using a
succession of grit sizes each removing in turn all the coarser grooves created by the preceding
grit. Knots and resinous streaks shall be treated with 2-3 coats of knotting applied evenly and
thinly. Nail holes, cracks and cavities shall be filled in with stopping pressed well home with
a stopping knife. Large holes or knots shall be plugged in with a mixture of red lead and
enamel glue in equal quantities laid hot. Knotting and stopping shall extend slightly beyond
the resinous area or cavity on to the adjacent surface.
The final preparation shall be by rubbing down with fine abrasive paper and dusting off with
air jet. The sanding shall always follow the line of grain. No cross -grain sanding marks shall
be admissible for any finish system on veneered or solid wood members. All wood surfaces
shall be kept free of dust, dirt adhesives or other substances which would interfere with
normal finishing procedure. Painting shall be done as per specification of respective item. If
varnishing is required the following specification shall be followed.
Oiling shall be done with linseed oil, either raw or boiled according to whether a flat or
glazed surface is required. Unless otherwise specified a mixture of raw and boiled oil shall be
used. The oil shall be rubbed into the wood till the surface is dry. The oil shall be applied
sparingly and excess removed to avoid a sticky surface.
Lacquer varnish shall consist of a colourless finish of shellac diluted in alcohol. A washcoat
of sealer consisting of 1/4 Kg cut of shellac shall be applied first and when dry sanded lightly.
For internal works, 2 coats of lacquer consisting of 1 Kg cut of shellac shall be applied from a
well charged clean brush which shall be worked on the surface no longer than is necessary to
ensure even spreading. For external works 4 coats shall be applied. Each coat of varnish shall
be lightly rubbed down with fine steel wool or abrasive paper and dusted before applying the
next.
5.20.1 Single Leaf Flush Door
Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and fitting, fixing single leaf
flush door in accordance with applicable plan or same as existing door.
Construction Requirement of single leaf flush door
The single leaf flush door of approved size of best quality Bangladesh made (as approved)
shall be BFIDC or equivalent standard.
176
177
5.21 Metal Works
Description
The item shall consist of providing installing and finishing in place steel doors & windows
with grill, rolling shutters, collapsible gate, ventilators, gates, boundary grill, hand rails or
any other items, including frames made of plain steel structural shapes, plates, angles, pipes
rods, wire mesh, steel sheet etc. where necessary in accordance with the applicable plans,
schedule and these Specifications.
Mild steel pipe shall be of specified size conforming to the requirements of ASTM AS3.
Structural steel shall conform to the requirement of ASTM A-36 and shall include plain
structural shapes and plates cut to length or fabricated.
Glazing shall be provided with 3mm thick transparent acrylic panes (sheet).
All components of every item of work shall be accurately cut, formed, cast, fitted, welded
and finished true to form and dimensions as indicated on the plans and drawings. Unless
otherwise specified all welding shall be fillet welding.
All steel surfaces shall receive 2 coats of hard-gloss paint of approved colour over a coat of
approved anti-corrosive primer unless otherwise specified. Prior to painting, the surface shall
be cleaned of mill scale, rust, oil grease and dirt. Surface not painted to the Project Manager's
satisfaction shall be repainted at Contractor's own cost.
5.21.1 M.S. Grill
Description
The steel frame shall be made of mild steel as per drawing and design. This is to be fitted at
any places as per drawing and direction of the Project Manager.
The mild steel shall conform of the requirements of ASTM A-53. The structural steel shall
conform of the requirement of ASTM A-36. These flat and angle M.S. sections are to be cut
to sizes, fabricated, welded (continuous) and to the shape and sizes of the frame as per
drawing. This frame shall have two coats of synthetic enamel paint over a coat of approved
anticorrosive primer. The enamel paint should be of approved colour. Each frame must have
min. 8 nos. of clamps on 3 sides of the frame.
A frame should be prepared and deposited with the Project Manager for his approval. Only
after approval the manufacturing should start.
5.21.2 Courtyard and parking area Structures
The courtyard and parking area structures shall be a cost-effective combination of spun
concrete poles (SPC) and galvanized members. The concrete poles shall be
177
178
design/manufactured in accordance with the standard REB specifications.
Method of Construction
A truss is a formed structure composed generally of straight members so arranged and

fastened together at their ends. The stresses in the members, due to the forces at the joints are
either tension or compression. Most of the trusses in practice are composed of a number of
triangles formed together.
The plane truss consists of a number of bars jointed together such that they lie in one plane &
form a frame-work which is suitable against any type of loading acting in the same plane.
Mild steel work in trusses should be done with mild steel sections of different sizes as per
design and drawings. These sections are to be fitted and fixed in positions carefully as per
design and drawing with gusset plates, nuts & bolts, rivets or by welding. Then after cleaning
the surface adequately two coats of anticorrosive paint over a prime coat of red oxide or red
lead shall be applied with appropriate applicator. To determine the number of rivets, must be
known the design load, thickness of gusset plate and angles, the sizes of rivets and allowable
unit stresses.
5.22 Aluminum Doors, Windows etc.
Description
The works under this item shall consists of supplying and fixing of aluminum products of
various types such as doors, windows, curtain walls, curtain rails, cladding/ flushing of sills,
etc. fitted with necessary hardware and finished in accordance with applicable drawings and
specification.
a) Materials and Products

Doors, windows, curtain walls etc. shall be of approved standard conforming to the U.S.
Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (AAMA) or BT A specifications. The
frames and sash members shall be of extruded shape made of 6063 T5 high quality aluminum
alloy having a minimum section thickness of 2mm unless otherwise shown on the drawings
or indicated in the schedule of items and shall conform to AAMA or BT A standard.
b) Fasteners, Hardware and anchors

Fasteners, hardware and anchors shall be of aluminum or non-magnetic, non-corrosive
material compatible with aluminum, all windows shall be provided with non-jamming latches
of rocker type designed to be locked from inside. Window locks shall be flush type as
manufactured by the Adams Rite Manufacturing Company of Gleudale, California or
approved equivalent. The doors shall be provided with cylindrical locks and suitable built-in
non-jumping latches and bolts.
Security locks shall be pin type mortise lock, 6 or 7 pins and adaptable to Master, Grand
master and Great Grand Master keys. Sliding windows and doors shall be fitted with
adjustable sealed bearing sheaves of durable hydrated nylon or approved equivalent. Closers
Push/pull and kick plates shall have to match with the frames. Any other hard wares to be
incorporated in the work shall also match with the frame. Assembly and installation screws
178
179
shall be of stainless steel. Doors, Windows, curtain walls etc. shall be installed with Teflon
injected expanding bolts, Sills shall contain adequate provisions for drainage. Head, sills and
jamb members shall be of one-piece construction. Aluminum to aluminum contact between
hardware parts or moving members shall not be permitted. Such contacts shall be properly
insulated.
c) Glass Pane
Glass shall be 6mm thick tinted dark bronze float glass panes (Japan, Bangladesh or
Equivalent). Or as per drawing, schedule of item and direction of theProject Manager.
d) Glazing Beads
Glazing beads shall be aluminum shape-in interchangeable type.
e) Glazing Strips
Glazing strips or channels shall be of formed neoprene of acceptable quality.
f) Weather Stripping
Weather stripping shall be of neoprene or silicon treated woven wood or approved equal.
g) Joints
Joints shall be mechanically done square (telescopic) joints. No mitred Joints shall be
accepted. No forced fitting shall be accepted. All units shall be fabricated at the factory to
accurate dimensions.
It shall be rigid and designed to permit complete weather stripping. In principle, the parts
should be put together by self-tapping screws.
h) Surface Finish
All exposed surfaces of aluminum members shall be factory finish and of substantially
uniform appearance conforming to "Architectural" standard.
All exposed surfaces shall be given a natural Anodic Oxide hardcore coating of 15 micron in
thickness and a density of 25mg. per square inch and a uniform color tone conforming to the
U.S. Aluminum Association or equivalent standard. The color spectrum shall be natural
silver/approved shade of bronze or all exposed surfaces of the Aluminum frames shall be
electrostatically painted with VV resistance hard resin powder with minimum coating
thickness of 40 micron of approved color shade. Finish of hardware shall match closely with
the door/window/curtain wall finish.
i) Accessories
Accessories necessary for proper fixing and preparation such as anchors, clips, fins, sub-
frames, metal sills, mullion, covers, casing, other trim, cleaning anchors, glazing beads,
weathering and glazing strips, hardware and mechanical operators shall be supplied ready to
179
180
set in place with the door, window, curtain wall units.
Steel or wood sub frames shall be painted with Zinc-chromatic primer in case of steel and'
with wood preservative in case of wood. Steel anchor shall be properly insulated from
aluminum frame.
j) Sealant
Sealant shall be one-part elastic compound of "Architectural" grade caulk and shall be in
matching color or as approved by theProject Manager.
k) Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare detailed design of all work involved in line with the Consultants
design and prepare Shop Drawings for the total work and submit to theProject Manager for
approval before factory fabrication. All exterior doors, windows and curtain walls shall be
designed to withstand a wind pressure of 30Ib/Sq. ft.
l) Installation
All units shall be assembled at site under proper conditions, erected, fixed and glazed in place
in strict conformity with manufacturer's instruction. All cut-out operations for hardware
preparation shall be made accurately and reinforced as required.
All doors, windows, curtain walls etc. shall be set plumb, square, level and in exact alignment
with surrounding works and shall be securely anchored ready for operation. All joints
between the masonry openings and frames hall be caulked and sealed after installation of the
frames. All installation works shall be done and finished in such a way as to ensure a free and
smooth operation.
Abrasion or other injury to finished surfaces shall be carefully avoided. Cleaning should be
accomplished with plain water or a petroleum type cleaning agent or with the manufacturer's
recommended cleaning reagent. No corrosive reagent shall be used.
5.23 Water Proofing Polythene Sheet
Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and laying in place polythene
sheets over brick flat soling in floor of buildings and where needed in accordance with the
applicable Plans, Schedules and Specification.
The sheets shall be laid within the building covering the entire inside floor area. Before
laying the sheets, the brick surface shall be cleaned with a duster to give the surface a free of
extraneous particles. The sheets shall be free of damage, tear or other imperfection and shall
be laid such that there is a minimum of 225 mm overlap between, adjacent strips. The second
layer shall be laid over the first in the same direction but with a stagger of half the strip width.
180
181
5.24 Lime Terracing on Roof
Description
The item shall consist of constructing a layer of lime concrete 2:2:7 on roof slabs in
accordance with these Specifications.
Lime concrete shall consist of a mixture of 2 parts lime to 2 parts surki and 7 parts brick
chips.
Lime shall be unslaked lime and shall be mixed by weight. Lime weight shall be measured at
Unslaked Condition and one cubic meter of lime terracing work requires 4.60 mounds
(172.16 kg) of lime. Slaked lime shall be screened through 3.35 mm sieves and the residue
shall be rejected. The lime stone should be brought to site and slaked in the ground of the
working place.
Surki shall be made from 1st class (well-burnt but not vitrified) bricks crushed or ground to
pass through a 2 mm sq mesh.
Brick chips (khoa) shall consist of 18 mm down-graded angular fragments of broken or

crushed 1st class bricks.
The mixing shall be done on a clean platform but not on roof. Lime and surki in the specified
quantities shall first be mixed dry till the mixture is of uniform colour. Then the mixture shall
be screened. Specified quantity of previously wetted khoa shall be added .and the whole
turned over once without adding water and twice by gradually adding small quantities of
water for tempering. The mix shall then be allowed to age for at least 7 days. During this
period the mixture shall be turned by spading twice a day and further lime water added if
needed to prevent drying up. Care should be taken to keep it under cover to protect against
rain. The mixture shall then be laid evenly on the roof slab to proper slope and in thickness
30% more than that shown on the plans and thoroughly beaten for 7 days with wooden
mallets to the finished thickness and proper slope. Before beating a lime slurry shall be laid
on the top and allowed to soak well. The lime water mixed with molasses shall be continually
sprinkled on the concrete to keep it wet while being beaten. Beating should not be stopped
until the metallic sound is obtained. The mortar which comes to the surface during the
beating is to be rendered smooth and finished off with lime rubbing. The terracing shall be
kept wet after completion for a period of not less than one week. The soundness of the lime
terrace roof should be tested by cutting a small portion of the materials 75 mm square and 50
mm deep in few representative areas and filling the holes with water and observing for half
an hour. If the water level does not go down in any of the' holes the compaction of the L.C.
shall be considered to have been adequate. If not, the L.C. shall have to be done again.
5.25 Screening on Roof
Description
Average 50mm thick screening with concrete on top of roof slab with cement, sand (FM 2.5)
& 12mm downgraded stone chips. Concrete is to be laid in slope as per drawing and direction
of theProject Manager.
181
182
5.26 Surface Drain
Description
The item shall consist of 300 mm or 450 mm deep drains in accordance with these
specifications.
Bricks, cement, sand and all other materials shall conform to the requirement of respective
materials specified in the relevant sections of materials specifications.
The surface drain shall be constructed in true line and level as per drawing and direction of
theProject Manager.
300 mm deep drains shall have 300 mm clear width with 125 mm thick brick wall (1:6) on 75
mm thick cement concrete (1:3:6) base over single layer brick flat soling. The exposed
surface shall have 12 mm thick cement plaster (1:3) with neat cement finishing and curing at
least for 7 days must be done.
5.27 Apron
Description
The item shall consist of construction 50 mm thick cement concrete over a layer of Brick flat
soling around the structure in accordance to this specification.
Construction Requirements:
Cement Concrete (1:2:4) with neat cement finishing.
Brick flat soling by first class bricks unless otherwise specified.
Sand shall be clean well graded natural sand having F.M of 2.0 for concrete.
Water shall be same as required for concrete.
The area specified for construction of apron shall be thoroughly cleaned, leveled &'
compacted to proper slope & level. Brick flat soling shall be laid over compacted earth
according to specification no. 2.6, then cement concrete (1:2:4) as per specification no.
2.7shall be placed over BFS with maintaining proper level & slope towards drain,
simultaneously neat cement finish shall be applied on top surface curing for a period of at
least 7 days as prescribed in item no. 2.7complete as per drawing & direction to the Project
Manager.
5.28 Road Work - (If applicable)
Note: There is no road work involved, however if required shall be approved by the Project
Manager.
182
183
The proposed site may be connected by a road which shall be constructed during construction
period.
The Construction work of roads shall be carried out in accordance with the Drawing. The
design and drawing shall be as per AASHTO specification. However, demolition and
restoration of the public roads (including private roads) shall be carried out according to the
specifications designated the official in charge of road management notwithstanding the
provisions described in the specifications and the Drawing.
5.28.1 Road Work Inside the Premises- (If applicable)
Sub–grade
a) Any excavation and banking work required for sub-grade construction shall be
carried out in accordance with the respective provisions in General Provision of
earth work.
b) The material required for banking and displacement shall be so placed that the
finished thickness of one layer after compaction shall become 20 cm or less.
c) The sub-grade surface shall be finished by proof- rolling in order to obtain the
contact pressure sufficient to permit smooth traffic of vehicles of 8 tons or over
should any defects be detected as a result of proof-rolling, such detective sub-grade
surface shall be finished again to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
d) The finished sub-grade surface shall be within + 5 cm of the design elevation.
Sub base Course- (If applicable)
(a) The materials to be used for sub base course shall be in accordance with the
specification described in the Drawing. The Contractor shall submit a report
concerning the quality of materials and the methods of sampling to the Project
Manager for approval.
(b) The finished surface of sub base course shall be within –10 mm and+5mm of the
design elevation.
Surface Course (Asphalt pavement) – Approach/Access Roads - (If applicable)
(a) Prior to commencing pavement, the sides of concrete side walk, manhole, etc. shall
be cleaned, and molten asphalt, etc. shall be coated over the sides.
(b) The surface to be seal-coated and prime- coated shall be finished into even level,
and after perfecting removing any bloc, dust and other foreign matters, such surface
shall be cured and dried.
(c) The mixtures shall be spread uniformly, rolled and finished into the specified
thickness. Then, the finished surface shall be measured in parallel to the center line
of the load by using a 3 m straight line ruler. In this case, the depth of any concave
sections shall not exceed 5 mm.
(d) The Contractor shall submit a report on the materials to be used for pavement of
surface course and method thereof to the Project Manager for approval.
183
184
Inspection
The Contractor shall invite inspection by the Project Manager during the course and
after completion of sub base course and surface course works.
5.28.2 Public Road (Including Private Road)
(1) Demolition of Pavement
Demolition of Pavement for public roads including private roads shall be

carried out so carefully as not to cause any hazardous effect upon the
surrounding portions of cement, concrete or pavement.
(2) Road Keeping and Restoration
(3) The road keeping shall be of a construction applicable to the prevailing site
conditions and so provided as not to cause any danger or trouble against
traffic.
(4) The Contractor shall submit the drawings for road keeping to the Project
Manager for approval.
(5) The Contractor shall constantly patrol any spots of road keeping and exert his
utmost efforts perform maintenance and repair of such roads in order to
eliminate any trouble against smooth traffic.
(6) The Contractor shall carry out maintenance and repair of any pertinent roads
so carefully as not to cause any trouble against smooth traffic until the said
roads have been restored and taken over to the official in charge of road
management.
5.28.3 Herring Bone Bond Brick Pavement
Description
This work shall consist of a base composed of bricks, laid on edge in a herring bone pattern,
placed on a prepared single layer brick flat soling in accordance with these specifications and
to the lines, grades, levels, dimensions and cross section shown in the drawings and as
required by theProject Manager.
Materials
The materials shall consist of first class bricks.
Construction Methods
The bricks shall be laid either flat or on edge with the shortest side vertical, in a single layer
in a herring bone pattern to the lines, grades, levels, dimensions and cross section shown on
the drawings and as required by the Project Manager. The edges/lines of the layer shall be
184
185
made with cut bricks to produce a line which is compatible with brick soling. The joints shall
be filled with sand brushed in and the completed layer shall be sprinkle liberally with water.
5.28.3 RCC Pavement – Internal Roads.
Description
The item shall consist of constructing R. c.c. road with 250mm thick guide wall of height
0.30 meter and 150mm thick R.C.C. work over one layer first class brick flat soling and
reinforcement 10mm dia.M.S rod @ 175mm c/c in both directions.
Reinforcement
In pavement shall be placed and secured as shown on the plans in accordance with the
requirements of item 2.12.
Construction and expansion joints

Shall be constructed exactly in accordance with the details shown on plans and with best
workmanship and as per direction of the Project Manager.
Extreme care shall be exercised in placing, compacting and finishing concrete at the joints to
prevent displacement of the joints and to avoid the formation of honeycombs and voids. The
concrete along the joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by the use of vibrators.
As soon as the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the edges of the pavement, the longitudinal
joints, the construction, and expansion joints shall be carefully executed as per drawing and
direction and finished with an edging tool so that the radius shown on the plans is obtained.
Curing and protection
Shall start as soon as newly-laid pavement is sufficiently, hardened and shall be continued for
a period of at least 7 days as prescribed in item no. 2.10
After hardening of concrete, the joints shall be cleaned and filled with sand bituminous
masticto the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
5.29 Clearing after Completion
The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all work upon completion. Clean off an strains, marks,
spots, and disfigurements from all works, touch up as required, clean all windows panes,
remove all rubbish and debris from building and site and leave premises clean and tidy and fit
for occupation in all respects and to the entire satisfaction of the Project Manager.
5.30 AS Built Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare as-built drawings for entire project after completion of
Construction, installation and all tests, and obtain approval from Owner/Consultant, and shall
submit 3 (three) set of such as-built drawing to the Owner for keeping record. Minimum one
computer soft-copy shall be accompanied with the as-built drawings.
185
186
5.31 Tests for Materials
The following tests for the construction materials shall be performed.
5.31.1 Sand
At least two samples shall be tested for each consignment but not exceeding 275 cum.
a) FM
b) Percentage of clay lump
c) Mica content
d) Organic Impurities
e) Material fiber than # 200
5.31.2 Brick
At least 6 bricks to be tested for each consignment not exceeding 50,000 no. of brick.
a) Unit weight
b) Compressive strength
c) Water absorption
d) Dimensions
e) Efflorescence, if necessary
5.31.3 Reinforcement
Each set of samples shall consist of 3 (three) representation standard places of Deformed bar
for each size for each consignment or as directed and shall be tested for the following
properties:
a) Yield or 0.2% Proof strength test

b) Ultimate tensile strength test
c) Elongation
d) Bend test
e) Cross section area
f). Unit Weight/meter
5.31.4 Stone Chips
At least two samples shall be tested for each consignment but not exceeding 600 cum.
a) Gradation
b) Unit weight
c) Specific Gravity
d) Los Angeles Abrasion Test
186
187
5.31.5 Cement
At least 3 samples of cement shall be tested for each consignment but not exceeding 100 tons.
a) Fineness
b) Setting times
b) Compressive strength for 3rd, 7th and 28th day
5.31.6 Concrete
For all concrete work at least 3 (three) sets of 3 (three) samples cylinder/cubes and for each
day casting or for each 15 cum of concrete shall be preserved and tested to for 7 days and 28
days crushing strength.
5.31.7 Water
Sulphate and Chloride content shall be tested for construction works of each site.
5.31.8 Where Tests to be Done
All tests shall be performed in the BRTC of BUET or any other laboratory approved by the
Project Manager.
5.31.9 Cost of Tests
The cost of making any test shall be borne by the Contractor if such test is clearly intended by
or provided for in the specifications or Bill of quantities and is required to ascertain whether
the design of and / or quality of any finished or partially finished work is appropriate for the
purposes which it was intended to fulfill and conforms to specifications.
5.33.10 Building Furniture
The required building furniture as laid in Vol-I. The final specification of the supplied
furniture shall be to the approval of the Project Manager.
187
188
SECTION VI
B. CIVIL
6.0 BUILDINGSANITARY AND WATER SUPPLY WORKS

&ANCILLARY FACILITIES
188
189
TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.1 Plumbing Fixtures 190
6.2 Wash Basins 190
6.3 Kitchen Sink 191
6.4 Soap Tray 191
6.5 Toilet Paper Holder 192
6.6 Glass Shelf 192
6.7 Towel Rails 192
6.8 Mirrors 192
6.9 Shower Rose 193
6.10 CP Grating 193
6.11 CP Bib Cock 193
6.12 CP Stop Cock 193
6.13 G.I. Water Pipes and Fire Stand Pipes 194
6.14 PVC Sewer Pipes and Fittings 196
6.15 UPVC Soil and Waste Pipes and Fittings 196
6.16 RCC Pipes 197
6.17 Inspection Chambers with R.C.C. Cover 198
6.18 Water Tank 199
6.19 Water Pump 199
189
190
6.1 Plumbing Fixtures
6.1.1 Water Closets
Description
The work shall be covered by this item shall consist of furnishing and installing white-glazed
vitreous china water closest (WC) long pan/commode/Combi closet in accordance with these
specifications.
Water closet (commode/Combi closet} shall be "S" or "P" type with low down cistern of
vitreous China and shall be standard product of Bangladesh Insulator and Sanitary Ware
Factory (BISF) Ltd/International- standard complete with seat and cover shall be made of
formal dehyde molding compound of VICTORY brand/ equivalent of approved quality. Size
of commode shall be as per requirements of schedule of item.
Long Pan Shall be squat type as per BISF/ International -standard with integrated foot rests
and shall be as specified in schedule of item.
Low down Cistern for commode/Combi closet/long pan shall be BISF/ International standard
quality cistern of size 550mm x 260mm x 375mm and capacity 12.00 liters.
Cistern For long pan shall be overhead 13 liters type (MAANCO/ BISF/ International
Standard or approved equivalent) complete with float valve, fittings and fixtures as per
requirements of schedule of item.
Angle stop shall be as per drawing and instruction.
Pans shall be fixed to the floor with 1:2 cement mortar in case of squat type and with 4 nos.
CP round headed screws in case of pedestal type.
Cistern shall be secured to the wall by 2 nos. #14 CP round headed screws and supported on
centre bracket fixed to the wall with 2 nos. #14 CP countersunk screws. Cistern shall be
connected to water supply with 12 mm plastic connecting pipe and CP angle stop.
6.2 Wash Basins
Description
The work shall cover by this item shall consist of furnishing and installing white-glazed
vitreous china wash basin on wall and supported by concealed wall hangers and fitted with
chrome-plated 30 mm waste, bottle trap and waste pipe, 12 mm angle stop and pillar faucet,
chain, stay, rubber plug and 12 mm plastic supply connector pipe in accordance with these
specifications.
190
191
Wash basin shall be of BISF-standard colour and size as specified in schedule of items.
Pillar faucets and angles stops shall be 12mm bore chrome plated brass and be of best quality
(king size) Bangladesh made prior approved.
Traps (Syphone: dismantle type) shall be 30mm bore Chrome plated copper alloy having at
least 75mm water seal and shall be priority approved best quality Bangladesh made.
Waste pipe shall be of 30mm. PVC pipe best quality available for sewer grade.
Basins shall be supported on 2 concealed wall hangers. The basin in the executive/Master
toilet room shall be provided with pedestal: 652mm x 204mm x 204mrn size BISF standard
coloured.
Hangers shall be screwed to hardwood plugs built in the wall using 3 nos14 countersunk
screws for each hanger. Hangers shall be painted with 2 coats of oil paint, over a coat of red
lead primer or shall be galvanized.
Taps, valves and traps shall be connected with water supply installation by means of standard
unions, coupling nuts and fittings.
6.3 Kitchen Sink
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of furnishing and installing kitchen sink and tray
on bracket in accordance with these specifications.
Kitchen sink and tray shall be Stainless Steel as per requirements of schedule of items. The
construction requirement shall be similar to Wash Basin.
6.4 Soap Tray
Description
This item covers the supply and installation of soap tray as per following requirement.
Requirements
The soap tray shall be C. P. cast iron of standard size best quality Bangladesh made (as
approved) and should be fixed in wall by drilling & fixing by screws etc. all complete. The
dimension shall be 150mm x ll0mm x 40mm.
191
192
6.5 Toilet Paper Holder
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of furnishing and installing Toilet paper holder in
accordance with these specifications.
Toilet paper holder shall be of approved quality as specified in schedule of item. The holder
shall be fixed with chrome plated brass screws to plugs built in the wall.
6.6 Glass Shelf
Description
This item shall cover supply and installation of glass shelf 5mm as per schedule of item fm:
basins & toilets as per following requirements.
Requirements
The glass shelf shall be best quality local made (Priority approved) with C. P. or stainless-
steel supports & guide rails and should be fitted in the wall with screws etc. complete.
6.7 Towel Rails
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of supply of towel rails and installation of the
same as per following requirements.
Requirements
The towel rails shall be chromium plated heavy type 20mm dia. 600mm long with C. P.
flanged holder, counter sunk screws. The rail should be fixed in walls by drilling holes in
wall, fixing screws through rowel plugto the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
6.8 Mirrors
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of furnishing and installing plate glass mirrors
Japan/Belgium of approximate dimensions 450mm x 350mm and of 5mm thickness over
lavatory basins according to these specifications.
Construction requirements
Edges of mirror shall be clean cut and round smooth. Mirror shall not be installed in direct
contact with the wall. The separation shall be effected by 6 mm thick rubber or cork spacers.
192
193
Fixing shall be by means of chrome-plated holders and screws to hardwood plugs built in the
wall. Care shall be taken to place the mirror symmetrical to the axis of the basin and with
sides vertical and horizontal.
6.9 Shower Rose
Description
The item shall consist of furnishing and installing chrome plated brass shower rose in
The shower rose shall be of nominal 100mm diameter best quality Bangladesh made prior
approved and shall be connected to the water supply installation by screwing giving a leak-
proof joint.
6.10 CP Grating
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of furnishing and installing chrome-plate gratings
in accordance with these specifications.
CP grating shall be 125mm dia. heavy type and approved quality and shall be installed in
direct contract with the floor.
6.11 CP Bib Cock
Description
The item shall consist of furnishing and installing chrome-plated brass bib taps in accordance
with these Specifications.
Bib taps shall be of 12mm bore heavy type with at least 75 mm projection and shall be best
quality Bangladesh made (Nazma, Sharif or equivalent) prior approved Draw-off taps and
stop valves for water services!
Taps shall be connected with the water supply installation by means of standard unions,
coupling nuts and fittings.
6.12 CP Stop Cock
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of furnishing and installing chrome-plate stop
193
194
cocks in accordance with these specifications.
The stop cock shall be 12mm dia heavy duty chrome-plated concealed and shall be approved
quality Bangladesh made (Nazma, Sharif or equivalent).
Stop cock shall be connected with the water supply installation by means of standard unions,
coupling nuts and fittings.
6.13 G.I. Water Pipes and Fire Stand Pipes
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of supplying and installing galvanized steel water
pipes on wall surface or in wall, underground through stack (duct) and where necessary in
Constructional Requirements
GI pipes shall be galvanized steel welded tubes of screwed and socketed type, Class A and
shall be equivalent to as specified in BS-1387.
Stop valves
Shall be of brass and equivalent of the screw down pattern conforming to as specified in BS-
1953.
Draining
Staps shall be screw-down pattern conforming to BS-2879.
Ball valve
Shall be of brass and conform to BS- 1212.
Float for ball valve
Shall be of copper with solder joints and conform to the requirements of Class A, BS-1968.
All fittings shall be standard GI products and shall conform to BS-534.
The piping work shall be carried out in accordance with British Standard Code of Practice
CP-310 Water Supply!
Pipes shall be jointed with preferably with raplon tape according to manufacturer‟s
instructions. However, strands of find jute may be used with the approval of the Project
Manager.
A gate valve along with a float valve shall be provided with a socket union where the service
194
195
pipe from main is connected to the underground reservoir.
Stop valve shall be provided on the supply pipe to individual buildings in an accessible
position inside the building as near as practicable to the point of entry of the pipe to each
building so that the supply may be readily shut off for repairs. A draining tap shall be
provided just above the stop valve to enable the service piping in the building to be emptied
of water when stop valve is shut. Stop valve shall also be provided at the outlet from roof
storage tank and on every branch pipe of the feed pipe as near as possible to the point at
which the pipe leaves so as to minimize interruption of supply during repairs.
Where the service pipe is less than 50 mm bore, all the stop valves shall be of the screw down
type. Other stop valves shall be of the gate type.
Pipe in structures shall be installed during construction. No hole or chasing in wall or floor
shall be allowed without prior approval. Pipes shall be supported by steel clips placed at an
interval of approximately 1 meter. All clips and brackets shall be fixed with rawal plugs into
the masonry.
The fire stand pipe shall be 4" dia. G.I. unless otherwise specified. Each floor shall be
equipped with fire hose, made of rubber lined cotton 63mm diameter. Rubber covered or
unlined linen may be provided with the approval of theProject Manager. A closet in which
hose is stored should be ventilated and installed atleast 1300mm above the finished floor. The
hose is to the equipped with 25 to 33mm nozzle.
The joint shall be made with hose coupling. The length 63mm hose should be about 30m.
This length, measured around obstruction and partitions, should make possible the use of
nozzle within 10m of every part of every floor in the building. Two such closets with hose are
to be provided for each floor in each tower as shown in the drawing.
A hose valve is to be installed close to the water supply pipe (stand pipe) between it and the
hose. The gate valve so equipped shall have thread that are interchangeable with those used
by the local fire department.
Since the stand pipes in the building are supplied from roof tank, they are to be linter
connected at the top as shown in the drawing.
Fire department hose connections shall be provided with an approved straight may check
valve located in the value pit (or the building), but not with a gate valve. Check valve shall be
of the approved extra heavy flanged rattern or as required by the local Fire department.
Piping outside building shall be laid underground and the depth of cover measured from the
top of the pipe to the finished surface of the ground shall not be less than 750 mm where the
pipe passes under roadways or through structures, a min. 100 mm RCC sleeve shall be fixed
to allow freedom of movement.
The Contractor shall carry out and provide as part of the contract all excavation in any kind
of soil encountered for laying pipes to the required depths. No tunneling shall be done except
with the consent of the Project Manager. Where necessary the Contractor shall support the
sides of the pipe trench by suitable timbering, bail out water, remove spoil and backfill to
make up level with sand FM 1.0 without extra cost. Backfilling shall be carried out as
195
196
provided under item 2.5.2 of Spec. civil.
After installation the pipe system shall be hydraulically tested for two hours at a pressure.
equal to 50 psi without showing any sign of leakage.
6.14 PVC Sewer Pipes and Fittings
Description
This item shall cover the supply & installation of PVC for conveying away soil water from
sanitary filaments, waste and rain water pipes with supply of fittings as may be necessary
according to the following requirement.
Requirement
The PVC waste and rain water pipes & fittings shall comply with ASTM D2729-89 for
different diameters and joints should be made to comply with ASTM D267289, ASTM
D2855. Pipes shall be jointed to each other by using suitable solvent cement recommended
by the manufactures. Installation of PVC pipes indirect sunlight is not permitted. Once the
joints are made, they should be left undisturbed for 12 hours for the solvent cement joints to
attain its strength.
6.15 UPVC Soil and Waste Pipes and Fittings
Description
The item shall consist of supplying and laying cast-iron pipes for conveying away soil water
from sanitary filaments.
Cast-iron pipes, shall be equivalent to that specified in BS-416 'Cast -iron spigot and socket
soil waste and ventilating pipes (sand cast and spun) fittings and accessories;
The sanitary pipe work shall comply with British Standard code of practice CP-304.
All pipes shall be aligned properly, laid to specified slope (I in 100) and securely fixed to the
structure above the false ceiling by using ears on pipe sockets or cast-iron/G.I. holder bars or
purpose made straps.
Cast-iron spigot and socket pipes shall be joined to each other with tarred-jute packed in half
the depth of tile socket, while the other half shall be filled in with molten lead properly
caulked and furnished. All joints shall be made perfectly air and water tight. Joints shall not
be embedded in the structure without prior approval. All pipes to be furnished with cement
grouting internally and to be bituminous painted externally.
All junctions shall have back or side door for inspection and clearing.
All necessary fittings such as cowls, gratings, bends, tees (plain or door), offsets (plain and
door), sockets, traps, Y -Tees (plain and door), loops, and siphon with horn shall be furnished
and fixed at no additional cost to the Contract.
196
197
Traps shall have a minimum water seal of 75 mm for pipes up to and including 50 mm dia
and minimum water seal of 50 mm for pipes over 50 mm dia. Floor channel drain shall have
properly trapped outlet fitted with a removable grating. After installation, water seal tests are
to be made to check against any leakage before backfill.
6.16 RCC Pipes
Description
The item shall consist of supplying and laying underground reinforced cement concrete pipes
for sewerage and drainage and connecting to existing sewer or to the septic tank in
accordance with these Specifications.
Concrete pipesshall have a minimum barrel thickness of 14 mm and conform to BS. 556.
Granular bedding shall consist of 12 mm down-graded brick chips.
Cement shall be Portland cement Type-I ASTM C-150, or BS-12
The work shall be carried out in accordance with British standard code of practice CP-301
'Building Drainage' and CP-2005 Sewerage. Pipes shall be laid in trenches at depths and
slopes shown on plans. Unless otherwise specified the pipes shall have a slope of 2%. The
pipes shall be laid in a straight line and at one gradient between manholes. No bend pipe shall
be allowed. Inspection chamber shall be provided at all change of direction and gradient on
pipe except where such change is not too large for cleaning. Manholes or inspection
chambers shall also be provided at all pipe junctions where cleaning is not otherwise
possible. The distance between the access points in no. case shall exceed 50 meters. All
branch pipes shall meet with the main line at manholes. No branch shall be permitted to enter
into the main without inspection chamber.
The centreline and width of trench shall be accurately set out established by means of suitable
pegs and reference points. Where the width of the trench is not specified it shall be 300mm
greater than the external diameter of the pipe.
No less than 3 sight rails shall always be fixed by appropriate surveying method on each
length of trench at any gradient to control excavation and laying.
The trench bottom shall always be kept free from water by suitable drainage and dewatering
if necessary and the walls shall be supported by adequate timbering where so required.
Excavated material shall be deposited at a safe distance from the edge of the trench so as not
to endanger the stability of excavation. All pipes, ducts cables, mains or other services
exposed in the trench shall be effectively supported by suitable means.
Where works are to be executed in the public highway, excavation shall be arranged in
agreement with proper authority so as to cause the minimum obstruction to traffic. Proper
warning and directions to traffic shall be given.
197
198
Trench shall be excavated and trimmed to a depth 150 mm below the invert level of the pipe.
Pipes shall be laid on granular bed which shall extend to the full width of the trench to a
thickness of 150 mm and adjusted to ensure exact line, level and uniform bearing. If the
formation is in-advertently low at any point, it shall be brought up to the correct level by
granular fill to ensure uniformity of pipe support. Soft spots, obstructions, and large roots
shall be removed and tamped-in solid with approved fillto the satisfaction ofthe Project
Manager with additional cost of material.
In short connection runs, where the ground is not wet and allows the trench formation to be
trimmed so as to provide a uniform and solid bearing, the pipes may be laid upon the
formation directly. The pipes shall be mortar-jointed using a 1:3 cement-sand mortar. Before
mortar is inserted, a gasket of tarred yarn shall be caulked into the joint. Ends of the pipe
shall be wetted immediately before jointing. Newly made joints shall be kept damp and
protected from weather and disturbance until covered by the backfill. The interior of the pipe
shall be examined as each joint is made and any intrusion of mortar or gasket removed.
Where it is necessary to cut pipes this shall be done with a suitable tool so as to leave a clean
end, square to the axis of the pipe.
Connection to the existing sewer and excavation around it shall be done only with express
consent and in accordance with the instructions of the local authority. After installation, water
seal tests are to be made without showing any leakage before backfill.
Backfilling shall be with sand F.M 1.0 built up in layers not exceeding 150 mm. Filling shall
proceed downhill and in all other respect comply with the provisions of item 2.5.2 of
Spec.civil.
All surplus excavated material shall be disposed of to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
6.17 Inspection Chambers with RC.C Cover
Description
The item shall consist of constructing inspection chambers, on the underground drainage and
sewerage lines where necessary, of dimensions as indicated and of suitable depth, in
Materials shall conform to the requirements set forth below and in the relevant sections of the
Material Specifications.
Bricks shall be 1st class solid bricks.
Cement shall be Portland cement Type-I ASTM C- 150 or BS-12
Stops irons shall be of galvanized malleable cast iron complying with requirement of BS1247
or of mild steel galvanized after manufacture by hot-dip process.
R.C.C cover and frame for manhole shall be of dimensions shown on the plans.
198
199
Excavation shall be as stated in item 2.5 of Spec. civil.
Brick flat under base concrete shall be as stated in item 2.6of Spec. civil. Concrete for base
shall be constructed as stated under item 2.10 of Spec. civil.
Brickwork shall be as stated in item 2.13.1 of Spec. civil, &2.13.2 of Spec. civil constructed
of 1st class bricks and (1:4) or (1:5) cement mortar as 'per requirement.
Plaster shall be as stated in item 2.16.1 of Spec. civil, 2.16.2 of Spec. civil and consist of
(1:4) or (1:5) cement mortar as per requirement.
Brickwork of chamber shall be built in English bond with watertight joints. The inside shall
be rendered with a neat-cement finished 12 mm thick coat of cement plaster and the exterior
shall be flush pointed. The cover frame shall be correctly positioned and, cast-in during
concreting.
Backfilling shall be done after at least 7 days of curing of brickwork and shall comply with
the requirements of item 2.5.2of Spec. civil unless otherwise permitted to use the excavated
material.
6.18 Water Tank
One overhead tank shall be provided for each floor the minimum requirements for which is
provided below:
The tank should be of Blow Molded fabrication and should be strong and long lasting with a
U. V. Stabilizer. The capacity of the tank shall be 2000 liters (440 Gallon). It should be
installed on the concrete roof of the building. It should be capable of withstanding a
temperature of 110o C.
6.19 Water pump
The water pump provided must be of the submersible type and should be capable of
functioning satisfactorily under the particular site conditions. As a minimum it should
conform to the particulars below:
Submersible AC Motor
Technical
BREB Specification
Particular’s
General Description Pressure balanced submersible AC motor.
Motor type Highly efficient 3 Phase AC motor
Internal filling Water filling
Lubrication Water lubricated
Electronics Any electronics must not be inside the submersible motor
Bearing Water lubricated slide bearing axial bearing: Carbon ceramic
Wetted material Stainless steel (AISI304 or higher), Rubber (Drinking water
approved)
199
200
Voltage 3×100V electronically commutated

Input Voltage 440 V
Submersion limit 300 M
Rated Power Minimum 3.70 KW
Rated Speed 1150 to 3425 RPM
Warranty 05 years or above.
Efficiency 92% or better
Submersible Pump end
Technical
BREB Specification
Particular’s
General Description Submersible multistage centrifugal pump
Back flow protection Non-return valve
Dry run protection Pre-set
Material Body: Stainless steel (AISI 304)
Impeller: SS (AISI 304)
Maximum flow rate 130m3/hr
Minimum borehole 152mm minimum
diameter
Average daily flow at 200,000 Litres per day.
the static head and
Bangladesh insulation
condition
Note: In Support of offered Specification, Printed Catalog must be submitted by bidder.
200
201
B. CIVIL
7.0 INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL ELECTRIFICATION
201
202
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.1 Scope of Work 203

7.2 Standard, Code & Regulation 203
7.3 System Structure, Equipment and Installation 204
7.4 Main Distribution, Distribution & Sub-Distribution Board (MDB/SDB) 212
7.5 Switch and Switch / Fan Regulator Board 213
7.6 Socket/MCB Outlet 214
7.7 Earthing 215
7.8 Service Illumination Levels 215
7.9 Power Outlets 217
7.10 CCTV 217
7.11 Public Address System (PAS) 217
202
203
7.1 Scope of Work
The electrical installation for site comprises electrical wiring of light, fan, small power,
ventilation power, water pump and all other utilities power supply in the building, guard
room and parking area. There shall be two types of power supply4I5V, 240V 50 Hz i.e. 3-
phase 4-wire and single-phase 2 wire.
The Contractor shall have to submit shop drawings on the basis of Consultants drawing for
the project for each and every item of work. The Contractor shall submit at least one month
prior to start of the particular part or parts of their work to the Project Manager for approval.
Similarity the brand, country of origin, design and /sample of all equipment, material, fitting
etc. as applicable and which are required for the building, either local or imported item shall
have to be approved by the Project Manager. Before taking the item at site or before placing
order (for imported items) for procurement, manufacturing etc. or shall be carried out without
having such approval.
The bidder shall specify brand name, country of origin, model number etc. of all equipment
and material and also attach original catalogue with the bid.
Scheduled quantity may vary as per site requirement. Quantity of some items have been
shown as unity. These are only for fixing rate, in case these items are required to be executed,
to avoid NT (Non-Tendered Item).
7.2 Standard, Code & Regulation
The installation in general shall be carried out in conformity with the Electricity Rules of the
Govt. of Bangladesh, Bangladesh National Building Code [BNBC] and the 16th edition of
the Regulation for Electrical Equipment of Buildings of the Institute of Electrical Engineers
(U.K), hereinafter referred as I.E.E. wiring Regulations, and the British Standard Code of
practice for the relevant works. Any special requirement of the Electrical Inspector, Govt. of
Bangladesh or the Power Development Board, Dhaka Electric Supply Authority, Dhaka
Electric Supply Company, or the Telegraph and Telephone Board, or any other Legal
Authority shall also be complied with no extra cost to the Employer.
The following standards, in addition shall be followed for design, manufacture, installation,
testing and commissioning of wiring and the communication system of this project:
Bangladesh National Building Code BNBC

International Electro Technical Commission IEC
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE
National Electrical Manufacturers Association. NEMA
German International Standard VDE
International Standard Organization ISO
Japan International Standard JIS
British Standard BS
203
204
7.3 System Structure, Equipment and Installation
7.3.1 Conduit Work
7.3.1.1 Metal Conduit
Metal conduits shall conform to B.S. 4568 part 1 & part 2, or B.S. 31:100, and shall be 18
SWG (minimum) thick, either solid drawn or formed and then welded. In the later case, the
bore must be free from any burs. The conduits shall be black enameled or galvanized. The
steel shall be such that when bends are formed, the conduit shall not break, crack, or be
deformed. Appropriate sample shall be submitted prior to installation of conduit.
G.I. Conduit
GI conduit shall be used in sizedgrade as shown on the drawing. Inside surface of the pipe
must be free from any burs. All G.I. bends shall be performed and shall be of same materials
as the pipe. Recommended specifications of GIpipe are as follows:
Nominal Outside Inside Wall Weight of pipe

pipe size (mm) dia. (mm) dia. (mm) Thickness (mm) (kg/m.)
25 32.875 26.225 3.325 2.50
37.5 47.5 40.25 3.625 4.05
50 59.375 51.675 3.85 5.45
62.5 71.875 61.725 5.075 8.63
75 87.5 76.7 5.40 11.28
Junction box, Pull box, Circular box, etc.
Junction box and pull box should be made of 16 SWG (minimum) galvanized steel sheet or
any other materials as directed by the relevant authority depending on where it is installed,
and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, to match with the existing construction in
which these are installed. The circular box shall be of brass/PVC. Circular boxes made of
aluminum are not acceptable. The cover (metallic or plastic) of the metallic box should be
fixed by using countersunk brass screws or galvanized machine screw. Box ears shall be at
least 14 SWG, each box (except circular boxes) must have an earth block of copper or brass
of appropriate size (minimum), being for one earthing lead, 3/8"x3/8"x3/8"
(l0mrnxl0mrnxl0mm) block with 3/16" (M5) drilled hole and 1/8" (M3) machine screw
tapped for 24 t.p.i. where earth continuity conductors shall be screwed in. The circular box
shall have at least 1/2” (12mm) long hub.
Appropriate samples shall be submitted prior to installation of these boxes.
Conduit/Pipe Bends
Wherever possible, instead of using bends, the conduit should be bent to the required angle
using pipe bender. The minimum bending radii shall be such as to allow compliance with
204
205
standard specification for bends in cables, and in addition the inner radii of bends shall not be
less than 2.5 times the outside diameter of the conduit.
Cable Bending Radius
The recommended bending radiiare given below:
Dia. of Conduit Radius of Bends
20mm 125mm
25mm 150mm
32mm 200mm
38mm 225mm
If the situation warrants use of separate bends for conduit shall be made from 18 SWG steel,
black enameled or galvanized. Aluminum bends must not be used Brass/PVC bends are
acceptable. No inspection bends shall be used and at places where inspection is required, steel
boxes shall be used.
Separate bends shall be used only after obtaining approval of the Project Manager.
In case of G.I. pipes, long radius preformed bends of the same materials and of required angle
(221/20, 450, 600 & 900) shall be used.
G.I. pipe may be bent to required angle only after obtaining written approval of the Project
Manager.
Conduit Termination and Fittings
At the end of a run, the conduit/G.I. pipe must terminate in a metal box, galvanized or black
enameled. When a conduit is terminated in a metal box (except circular boxes), a smooth
bore brass/PVC bush or ring bush must be used along with brass lock nuts of the following
specification or its metric equivalent:
LOCK NUT
Conduit size (mm) Thickness (mm) O.D. (mm) No. of threads
19 1.56 28.125 3
25 4.68 31.25 3
205
206
BUSH
Conduit size (mm) C.D. Length (mm) No. of Length of

(mm) thread smooth bore
atend (mm)
19 21.875 8.59 4 1.95
25 28.125 10.54 5 2.73
Installation
Metal / G.I. Conduit

In general, conduit pipes shall have surface installation at the truss member and shall be
placed under the truss member to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
Conduits of each circuit must be completely erected before any of the cables are drawn in.
The pipe run should be continuous throughout its length, and kept straight as far as possible.
It should run either horizontally or vertically, and never at an angle. The conduits are to be
properly welded with the truss member at 1 Meter spacing using appropriate welding
electrode and other consumables. If the pipes are installed exposed in wall/over false ceiling
these shall be placed over 10mm space pipe diameter and clamped with saddle or M.S. flat
bar 25mmx3mmat 1meter spacing using rope plug/ rowel boltto the satisfaction of the Project
Manager at no extra cost to the Employer.
All pipe runs should be kept clear of gas, air and steam pipes, and pipes of other services. To
avoid other service pipes, the pipe should be either routed or set out so that at least 75mm
separation is maintained between other pipes and electrical pipes. Conditions other than those
stated above, if encountered by the Contractor, must be brought to the notice of theProject
Manager for instructions.
Pipes installed in ground / R.CC. Floor shall be placed at the time of construction to the
satisfaction of the Project Manager.
Pipes installed in R.CC. Wall and column shall be placed at the time of construction of the
wall. No cutting in wall and column shall be allowed without prior approval.
7.3.1.2 PVC Conduit
PVC conduit must conform to NEMA TG2 or equivalent designed for installation of
reinforcement and before casing in slabs, or exposed. These shall be heavy wall rigid type-40.
The minimum dimensions shall be as per schedule of items and bill of quantities.
No PVC fittings shall have wall thickness at any point less than 2mm.
Installation
PVC Conduit
In general, conduit pipes shall be installed as per item 4.1.3.1. Where PVC conduit uses
fittings made of PVC fiber or other insulating materials, these shall be press fitted and then
206
207
sealed with PVC solvent cement. Where metal fittings are used thread PVC pipe may be
made by using the threads on the fittings as a die.
All exposed PVC pipe runs up to a height of 2 Meter from the floor shall be protected by a
metal enclosure.
PVC pipes shall be bent either by using a pipe bending guide lines as detailed in item 4.1.3.1
or by using a hot-box bender or by using a flame. In any event, the bending radii shall
conform to relevant portion of item 4.1.3.1 and the bend must be we formed and be without
reduction in internal diameter.
Conduit IPipe in Floor
All conduit / pipe shall be installed having a slope of 1:1000 towards the floor mounted pull
box or cable duct so that condense or leakage water drains out easily to the pull box or cable
duct. For runs of more than one conduit in the same floor the direction of slope of different
conduits should be decided in such a systematic manner as to ensure an uniform drain out of
the leakage. All socket joints shall be made water tight.
No U-bend in floor shall be installed.
7.3.2 Cable Work
Material:
Single Core Cable:
Single core low voltage cables and conductors shall be as per BS-6004, BS2004 and VDE
0250, 0271. Conductors shall have 450/750 Volt grade (for BYA cable) and 300/500 Volt
grade (for BYM cable) of PVC insulation. All cables shall be multistrand type unless
otherwise specified. All flexible cables shall be as per BS-6004 unless otherwise specified.
Multi Core Cables:
Multi-core low voltage cable shall be PVC insulated PVC sheathed copper conductor, termite
proof, made and tested according to VDE 0250 and 0271 with rated voltage being
600/1000V.AlI cables shall be multi stranded unless otherwise specified.
Cables directly buried in soil shall be steel wire armored (SW A) type.
Installation:
Cable in Conduit:
Single core cables are to be installed either in metal or in PVC (water grade) conduit. The
conduit size shall be as specified in the drawing. Separate conduit pipe must be used for
individual discipline of supply and services cables, for example, normal power, essential
power, telephone, paging, fire alarm etc. It must be ensured that cables are not scratched/
damaged during pulling. For long lengths, pull boxes must be used even if not indicated in
207
208
the drawings. Cable shall not be drawn round more than two 90 degree bends (or their
equivalent) between two boxes in serial, and any single bend must not be less than 900.
Cable in Tray and Ladder:
Cables in tray or the ladder shall be installed according to design, specification, and standard
and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. Proper spacing shall be maintained for laying
cable. Cables are to be fastened with tray or ladder by appropriate and approved type
fasteners.
Cable in Trench:
Unless otherwise stated in design and schedule, generally the size of the trench shall be of
minimum 825mm-depth and 450 mm widthfor each cable to be laid. Where more than one
cable is to be laid in the trench, the width of the trench is to be increased by 150mm for each
extra cable for size below 70-sq. mm and 300mm for bigger size cables.
A cushion of sand (F.M 1.5), 125 mm thick is to be placed over the bed of the trench over
which the cables are to be laid.
After laying the cable, first class brick on edge or flat is to be placed as separators in between
the cables. After installation of the brick separators, sand filling is to be carried out up to' 150
mm from the top of the bigger cable. After sand filling, one layers of first class brick flats are
to be placed along the length and breadth of the trench as a protection against injury. The rest
of the trench shall be filled with earth, watered and rammed at 150mm layers. Then red
plastic sheet of 0.5mm thick shall be placed throughout the trench as an indication that power
cable(s) has been laid down. After cables are laid the original ground conditions shall be
restored. But if brick pavement, drain, concrete road, or bituminous carpeted road are cut
across or damaged, they shall be remedied and restored to the original specification.
The cable route shall be as direct as possible and shall receive the Project Manager's approval
before excavation.
Cables shall always be laid out or laid into the ground through GI pipe of suitable size as
decided by the Consultant. No extra cost shall be paid for such pipes. The exposed end of the
pipes shall be sealed using PVC or wooden plugs.
Cable marker of approved type shall be provided in the cable trench 300mm below GL level,
along the length of laid cable.
GI cable marker shall be installed at every turning point of the trench.
After the cable is laid, it shall be tested by the Contractor in presence of the Project Manager.
If the test is unsatisfactory, the cost of all repairs and replacement shall be borne by the
Contractor.
All surplus earth shall be removed by the Contractor at their own cost to the indicated places.
Any damage done to any other services by the Contractor for cable laying operations shall be
made good by the Contractor, at their own cost.
208
209
All chasing and passages necessary for laying of cable indoor or outdoor shall be carried out
by the Contractor and the same shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Consultant by
the Contractor without any extra charge to the relevant Authority.
When trenches are left open overnight, and where the road shall be cut, the Contractor shall
exhibit a suitable danger signal such as banners, red flags and red lamps at his own cost.
Temporary arrangement by placing wooden sleepers/steel sheet etc. across the road cutting
for vehicular traffic are also to be made by the Contractor at no extra cost. The Contractor
shall be wholly responsible for any accident, which may occur due to the negligence of the
Contractor.
All excavations shall be filled up in layers with powdered earth and suitably watered and
rammed in such a manner that after completion of the work there is no land subsidence. The
road top shall be re-constructed to match the existing road pavement.
No trench shall be dug until all cables meant for laying have been procured and brought at
site store. Cost of any watering or shuttering and shoring of trench required to be done shall
be borne by the Contractor.
Road Crossing:
At road crossings, the cable shall be protected from damages by passing the cable through
metal or concrete conduit and protecting that conduit with appropriate road construction.
Cable Termination and Joint:
There shall be no twisted joint in the entire wiring system. Cables from 2.5 sq. mm and above
sizes shall be terminated through cable lugs and with spring washer, nut etc. Cable gland
shall be provided for cable termination at the entrance of boxes, panels, chambers etc. For
armoured cables, earth tags shall be provided with cable gland, for connection with system
earth or Earth Continuity Conductor(ECC).
Cable Bending Radius

Cable bending radius shall be in compliance with the IEC applicable standards.
Connection to Switches:
The Switches or Isolators shall be provided at phase conductor only.
Cable Colour:
All cables used must have colour as stated below:
Two wire, single phase A.C system:
 Red, Yellow &Blue for phase.

 Black for neutral.
 Green or Green-Yellow for Earth.
209
210
Three or four-wire, three phase A.C system:
 Red for first phase.

 Yellow for second phase.
 Blue for third phase.
 Black for neutral.
 Green or Green-Yellow for earth
Two wire D.C. system:
 Red for positive or switch wire.

 Black for negative.
For two wire final sub circuits.
Whether A.C. or D.C. supplying lighting or power circuits, the neutral or 'middle' wire shall
always be black and the phase or outer wire (no matter which phase it is connected to) shall
always be red. For lighting, the red wire shall always feed the switch, and the red wire shall
always be used from the switch to the light.
Cable Identification:
All cables, all feeders or circuits in all distribution boards shall be provided with permanent
and approved type of identification.
7.3.3 Earth Continuity Conductor (ECC)
7.3.3.1 Earth Continuity Conductor
Material
All ECC shall be insulated copper (BYA cable) as indicated in the schedule of items and bill
of quantities. ECC shall be of white/green/green-yellow colored.
Installation
The earth continuity conductor and earthing lead shall run in accordance with the drawings
and direction, and all metal fittings shall be earthed with continuity conductors. All the earth
continuity conductors from various circuits, sockets, etc. shall be connected to the earthing
block located within the MDB/SDB. Size of earth continuity conductors shall be as stated in
the drawings. The earth continuity conductor shall be drawn along with the cables as per
drawing and to the satisfaction of Project Manager and no joint shall be allowed from
earthing block to the respective earth point. Light and fan points, except where indicated
otherwise shall not be earthed.
210
211
7.3.3.2 Light Fitting
Material:
The light fitting shall be manufactured as per design, specification and schedule of items and
BOQ and shall comply with the relevant requirements of standards, including BS 4533.
The chokes, if applicable, shall comply with the requirements of BS 2818, and shall have
appropriate power factor correction capacitor (250V, 3.5 µF for 20W and 40W tubes), the
improved P.F shall not be less than 0.90. In no case power consumption by the choke shall be
more than 16W for magnify ballast.
The starters shall be 2 W-IAmp type and shall have built-in radio interference suppressor
capacitor.
All incandescent light fittings, except where specifically stated otherwise, shall have
unswitched brass holders, lamp caps, complying with BS 52.
Type of lamp and detail technical data of various categories of lamps shown in design and
schedule shall be followed. Appropriate sample of light fitting with choke starter and any
relevant control gear shall be submitted for approval, prior to installation.
The bidder must submit detailed technical specification supported by catalogue for all light
fittings, lamps, and accessories. The country of origin or manufacturer‟s country, brand
name, model number etc. details are also to be furnished with the bid.
Any special feature, or equipment or control gear, such as photocell switch, time switch,
power supply support battery, frame for installation of lamp and fixture, remote control
wiring and equipment, relay etc required for any lamp, shall be inclusive of the respective
light fitting item. No extra charge claimed for any of such feature or support. The entire work
shall be carried out as per design, standard, schedule of works and to the satisfaction of the
Project Manager.
Installation:
The light fittings shall be installed in accordance with the applicable lighting layout drawings,
and to the satisfaction of Project Manager.
All pendant fittings shall be supported from brass ceiling base plate with atleast 100mm
screw-hub.
The location of outlets shown in the design shall be considered as approximate and it shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor, before installation of outlet boxes, to study all related
drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural drawing and schedule. Outlets
incorrectly located and lights improperly installed, or any mal-function of any lamp shall be
properly relocated or replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.
211
212
7.3.4 Lamp Post
Material:
The G.I. pipe for lamp post shall be hot dip galvanized. The thickness of the pipe shall be as
below:
Normal pipe size (mm) Wall thickness (mm)

25 2.65
30 2.65
38 2.90
50 2.9
63 3.25
75 3.25
100 3.65
150 4.85
Installation
Fabrication, installation, testing and commissioning shall be done as per drawing, schedule
and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.
7.3.5 Ceiling Fan
Material:
Ceiling fans shall be of capacitor type, AC 240V single phase, 50Hz, complete with
suspension rod of required length, canopy and shall be constructed in accordance with
applicable B.S. The minimum air velocity for 1400mm fan at horizontal distance of 600mm
from the fan center and vertical distance of 1950mm shall be 47meter minute. Appropriate
sample of fan shall be submitted prior to installation for approval.
Installation:
The fans shall normally be installed at a height of 2550 mm from the floor and in accordance
with the applicable fan layout drawings and to the satisfaction of Project Manager. Circular
box with ceiling rose for fan outlet shall be at the center of the clamps.
Fan incorrectly located or any mal-function of any fan shall be rectified or replaced by the
Contractor at their own expense.
7.4 Main Distribution Board& Sub-Distribution Board (MDB/SDB)
Material
The MDB/SDB shall be as per design, specification mentioned in the schedule items and bill
of quantities. Panels shall be designed for operation on a 240/415V, 50Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire
system. The panels and bus bars shall have clearly marked identification.
212
213
The panels shall have printed directory on frames and on/inside of door. The door is to be
provided with flush lock handle. All doors are to be keyed alike. All hinges shall be
concealed. All bus bar shall be isolated by proper voltage rating insulators from board body,
& front side of bus bar must have protective paints. Provision for cable entry to the DB shall
be from top, bottom and sides.
The MCB/MCCB‟s shall be quick-make, quick-break type, and shall have inverse time limit
characteristics with instantaneous magnetic trip elements functioning on overload, earth fault
and short circuit. All circuit breakers shall be 'tripfree'. Ratings and frame sizes of breakers
shall be in accordance with design and schedule. Each breaker shall be capable of carrying
rated full load current continuously without exceeding temperature rise specified in the
applicable IEC standard. Circuit- breaker insulation shall be coordinated with the DB
structure and shall be designed for use on 600-volt system. The MCB must comply with BS
3871 part I category M3 (5A-60A). Rated voltage 240/415V, A.C.50Hz, minimum
interrupting capacity 6000 amp as per B.S. and capable of providing overload and short
circuit protection, through thermal and magnetic trip actions respectively. Temperature
rating, of CB shall be 400 Co, preferably tropicalised (moisture fungus corrosion treated),
with contacts of silver alloy. The MCCB must comply with BS 3871; part 2. MCCB above
25A TP shall be adjustable type.
The MCCB's shall have the minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity as per B.S. and IEC,
at 415V A.C. if not indicated otherwise:
MCB upto 63A TP or SP shall have 6 KA rating. SDC (Switch Disconnector) up to 125 A TP
is 3 KA, upto 250 A TP is 4.3 KA.
The continuous current rating of individual MCB/MCCB's may be varied within + 15% at the
time of installation without any additional cost implication.
Installation:
The Board shall be installed in accordance with applicable layout drawing. Minimum height
to bottom of the Board from the floor level shall be 600 mm and maximum height of any
circuit breaker/switch shall be 1800 mm from the same level or as specified in the drawing.
The minimum depth of MDB, DB or SDB etc. shall be in accordance with schedule of items
and bill of quantity.
The location of MDB/SDB shown on design shall be considered as approximate and it shall
be responsibility of the Contractor before installation of MDB/SDB to study all pertinent
drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural drawings. MDB/SDB
incorrectly located or any malfunction of any equipment, instrument in any board shall be
properly relocated or replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.
Number of outgoing circuits in different panel boards may be varied by ±5% at the time of
installation.
213
214
7.5 Switch and Switch / Fan Regulator Board
Material:
Switch board and fan regulator board shall be as per design, specification and schedule and
shall have gang switches MK England and fan regulators. The switches shall be vertical,
single pole (1-way/2-way) 5A A.C., white or approved color, to BS 3676, complying with the
test requirements for inductive, fluorescent or resistive loads as specified, and satisfy the test
requirements of fluorescent lamp circuits, upto the ratings of these switches, as set out in BS
3676 amendment 3. The switches must have minimum clearance of 3mm between the
contacts, and a similar distance. All contacts shall be faced with pure silver/silver-cadmium
oxide alloy. The switch operating member shall make the speed of 'make and break'
independent of the speed at which the switch is operated. Sample shall be submitted for
approval prior to installation of switches.
Each board shall have copper earthing block/blocks of suitable size with necessary
connecting arrangement.
Installation:
The switch board and fan regulator board shall be installed on wall at a height of 1.5 meter, if
not specified otherwise, from the floor and at locations shown in applicable layout drawings.
The fan regulators shall be installed inside the box with regulator knobs projected over the
covering, if not specified otherwise. The phase wire shall be connected to the switches and
the neutral wire shall be kept solid in all switch connections. The ECC shall be connected to
the earth point inside the switch boards. Approved size steel boxes shall be installed at the
time of construction of the wall to avoid chisell in wall.
The location of board shown on design shall be considered as approximate and it shall be
responsibility of the Contractor, before installation switch board/regulator board boxes, to
study all pertinent drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural drawings
and approved shop drawings of other trades. Switch boards/regulator boards incorrectly
located shall be properly relocated at the Contractor's expenses.
7.6 Socket/MCB Outlet
Material
Socket outlets shall be white in color, and conforming to B.S.546: (3 pins) and B.S. 372: part
1 (2 pins). All switched sockets shall have pure silver/silver-cadmium oxide alloy contacts in
which contact pressure shall be permanently, maintained by subsidiary helical compression
spring. These shall be supplied with countersunk cadmium plated fixing screws and mounted
in 18 SWG (1.5 mm) hammer painted sheet steel box having brass earth point as per drawing
and direction. All switch and socket outlets shall be international standard type and shall be
of same manufacturer. The country of origin of switches and sockets shall be USA, UK,
Germany, French or Japan.
The Controlled sockets of MCB/MCCB, if applicable, shall be unswitched and the box shall
have earth point.
214
215
The lift indicator outlets shall be made of 16 SWG sheet steel, [stainless steel].
Installation:
The Socket/MCB/MCCB shall be installed on wall with lower end of the face plate at a
height of 225mm (Skirting level) from the floor, if not specified otherwise, and locations
shown in applicable design.
The fixing of the outlets boxes shall be by means of flat head cadmium plated screws. The
flat head of the screw shall be sunk in the plates so as to finish flush with the surface of the
cover. The mounting height of the outlet shall be as shown in the drawing. The earth wire
shall be connected to earth point of the box to the 3rd pole of the 3-pin socket.
7.7 Earthing
For the (13) individual laboratories, the earthing, boding and shielding work shall be done as
per the equipment's functional requirements and coordination. The grounding /earth
resistance shall comply the requirement of the equipment's specifications. The calculations
for earth resistance shall be approved by the Project Manager.
Material:
Earthing Electrode:
a. Pipe Electrode
This would be 40mm dia. G.I. pipe with two 3mm dia. holes across the diameter at every
1200mm at the pipe.
b. Plate Electrode
This earth electrode shall be cold rolled double copper plate 600mmx 600mmx3mm having
provision for connecting the earthing lead.
Earthing Lead:
Earthing lead shall consist of copper conductor as per specification given in 23. All terminal
lugs shall be of copper and nut bolts of brass.
Earth Inspection Pit
The size of earth inspection pit shall be constructed as per drawings. The Pit cover shall be
constructed by RCC slab with l0mm dia. MS rod. & having two holding hook of 20mm dia.
MS rod. The designed drawing shall be submitted for the Project Manager‟s approval.
215
216
Installation:
Earth electrode:
a. Pipe Electrode:
The pipe earth electrode shall be buried below ground level, as per design and schedule by
tube-well sinking method. The terminal connected to the earth electrode shall use a brass
clamp. After making the connection, the clamp shall be covered with bitumen poured hot and
covered with jute cloth.
b. Plate Electrode:
The plate earth electrode shall be buried below ground level as per schedule and installed in
an upright position, completely surrounded by a bed of at least 300mm of charcoal and
packed hard. Distance between any two-earth electrodes shall be at least 8 meters.
Earthing Lead:
The earthing lead from the earth electrode shall be connected to the earth block in MBDB etc.
A double run of specified copper conductor (preferably tinned) shall be brought out of earth
electrode through GI pipe and connected to the earth block. All earthing leads shall follow the
shortest and most direct route to earth electrode arid sharp bends shall be avoided. The
earthing lead shall be made mechanically strong and electrically continuous and of minimum
resistance. There shall be no joint in earthing lead conductor, between terminals.
Earth Inspection Pit
The earth inspection pit shall be constructed as per design, schedule andto the satisfaction of
theProject Manager. The slab shall have level surface and the pit shall have well-formed
regular sides. Water curing for the slab and the pit shall be done for a minimum of 7 days.
Earth Loop Resistance test:
The maximum earth loop resistance from any point in the installation, including earthing lead
to the earth electrode shall not exceed the resistance specified in the relevant standard of earth
test. The Contractor must ensure that the leads are efficiently bonded to all metal works of the
building other than the current carrying parts. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
to provide earth tester, all equipment and supports, required for testing and test the
installation in presence of the Consultant or authorized representative of the Authority &
submit the earth test report to the relevant Authority for approval.
For the (13) individual laboratories, the earthing, boding and shielding work shall be done as
per the equipment's functional requirements and coordination. The grounding /earth
resistance shall comply the requirement of the equipment's specifications. The calculations
for earth resistance shall be approved by the Project Manager
7.8 Service Illumination Levels
The lighting system shall be designed in accordance with the International relevant codes and
standards to achieve the correct levels of luminance, which shall be determined during the
216
217
design stage and approved by the client or their authorized representative or by the Project
Manager.
Building Lighting
For guidance only, the following minimum luminance levels are provided but shall meet the
requirements of the relevant illuminations code and standards.
Toilets 100 lux
Laboratories 300 lux
Testing Areas 300 lux
Rooms 300 lux
Stores room 200 lux
The illumination levels at control of instrument panels shall be measured in a vertical plane at
the panel location.
Emergency Lighting
An emergency lighting system shall be installed to provide the following.
Laboratories 50 lux
Rooms 50 lux
Workshop 50 lux
An emergency exit light shall be mounted above each exit/entrance.
Lighting
For guidance the following minimum service illumination levels shall be provided, but shall
meet the requirements of the International relevant illuminations code and standards.;
General lighting 20 lux

Labs lighting 50 lux
7.9 Power Outlets
Power Outlets shall be installed in accordance with the relevant lighting and illuminations
codes and standards. The actual installation size, ratings shall be determined during the
detailed design stage and after the approval of the client's authorized representative or Project
Manager.
7.10 CCTV System
CCTV security system as per technical specifications shall include both attended and
unattended cameras, which include stationary cameras as well as PTZ cameras. On site
recording devices such as VCR, DVR and hard disk also shall be included in the system as
well as data highway, backbone and structured wiring for the network requirements. The
bidder shall provide details of the equipment including network, catalogues and specifications
217
218
with the bid for review and approval. Bidder can survey and asses the material requirements.
The details shall be worked out and given in the BOQS. The system shall be tested and
commissioned to be witnessed by the client.
Note: Vendor shall refer to the technical specifications given in this document.
7.11 Public Address System
All major equipment of PA sound system as per technical specification, such as amplifier,
loud speaker, microphone shall preferably be supplied by one manufacturer for matched
operation as one unified system.
Sound equipment shall be mounted on a rack, installed in the location approved by the
Project Manager. The drawing for the network shall be prepared by the Contractor.
Speakers shall be on the flexible mounting bracket. Shape color and finished to be approved
by the Project Manager.
The system shall be tested and commissioned by the supplier and witnessed by the client. The
bidder shall provide details of the equipment including network, catalogues and specifications
with the bid for review and approval.
Note: Vendor shall refer to the technical specifications given in this document.
218
219
SECTION VI
B. MISCELLANEOUS
8.0 DESKTOP COMPUTER & PRINTER & ACCESSORIES

PHOTOCOPYING MACHINE
219
220
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT AND GUARANTEE SCHEDULE

For Desktop Computer, Printer& Accessories
(To be filled up by the bidder with appropriate data, otherwise the Bid will be rejected)
Failure to provide all of the information requested may lead to the rejection of the bid.
Vendor Guaranteed
Technical Particular’s BREB Specification
Specification
Desktop Computer (Brand)
Brand Internationally Reputed Brand
Model To be Mentioned by bidder
Country of Origin To be Mentioned by bidder
Processor Intel-latest version or Higher

Speed 3.10 GHZ or Higher
Cache 6 MB or Higher
Chipset Intel Express Chipset or Higher

8GB High-Speed DDR-3 RAM,
RAM
Expandable up to 16 GB
Min. 500 GB, SATA, 7200 RPM
HDD
(Min) or Higher
LAN Card Integrated-10/100/1000
1 PCI (Conventional), 1 PCIeX1,
Expansion Slots
1PCIe X 16, 4 SATA Connector
USB Port Minimum-6 (2 Front USB
Ports 2.0 ports & 4 Rear USB 2.0), 1
VGA Display connector, RJ-45 etc.
Graphics (AGP) Built-in
Audio (Sound Card) Built-in

Built-in High Definition audio
Speakers
codec or external Speaker
DVD-RW Drive 16XDVD Writer or Higher
Monitor 18.5” LED Color, Same Brand
Key-Board USB enhanced, Same Brand
Mouse USB Optical Mouse, Same Brand

Tower, Drive Bay: 3X3.5” &
Casing
2X5.25”
Windows7/Windows/Windows
OS Support
Vista
Windows10 Office & Other
Software
Software as per site Requirements.
220
221
Vendor Guaranteed
Specification
Dust Cover, Driver DVD (Copy) &
Manual &Heavy-duty Power supply
Accessories strip (Multiple pin plugs supported),
All necessary power and data
connection cable.
Internet Security Antivirus, License
Antivirus
for 1 year
Warranty 3 Years (Full)
PRINTER
Internationally Reputed Brand,
Brand suitable for operation with latest
Windows operating system
Country of Origin To be Mentioned by bidder
Processor Pentium 166 MHZ or Better

Compatible with the latest MS
RAM
Windows operating system
Connectivity Hi-Speed USB Port
Universal 100-240V AC Adaptor
Power Supply
for worldwide usage.
Operating System MS Windows OS
Standard ISO, CE & FCC Class-B.
Warranty 3 Years (1 year full and 2nd& 3rd
year service only)
Note: In support of offered specification, printed catalog must be submitted by bidder.
221
222
Photocopy Machine -Technical Specifications
Guaranteed
Specification
Color White or Equivalent
Copy Print Speed Black & White 4.9 ppm
Copy Print Speed Color 0 ppm
Copying Resolution 2400x600 dpi or better
CPU 0
Interface Ethernet 10/100/1000BaseT, LAN,
USB
Magnification Zoom 25 to 400%
Media Sizes A4, Letter
Monthly duty cycle 0 Pages
Multiple Copy Prints: 1 to 999 sheets
Network Protocol EtherTalk, IPX/SPX, NetBIOS Over
TCP/IP, TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6) or
Equivalent
Paper Capacity (Sheets) 2300 Sheets
Paper Weight: 35 to 157 gsm
Photocopier Type Multifunctional
Print Resolution 2400x600 dpi
Print Technology Indirect Electrostatic Photographic
Method, Laser Technology
Processor speed 0 MHz
Scan Resolution 600x600 dpi
Warm-up Time 65 seconds
Weight Vendor to specify
Functionality Copy, Print, Scan
Warranty 1 Year(s)
Dimensions(WxDxH)mm Vendor to specify
Memory 1
Power Consumption 1.5 KW
Power Supply 220 - 240 V, 50Hz
OS: AS400, CUPS, Linux, Mac OS X
(10.5.7/10.6.8/10/7/10.8), SAP, UNIX,
Windows XP/Server
2003/Vista/Server2008/7/8/Server
2012
Note: In support of offered specification, printed catalog must be submitted by bidder.
222
223
SECTION VI
C. MISCELLANEOUS
9.0 AIR CONDITIONERING
223
224
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTSFOR AIR CONDITIONER
Four Split Type air conditioners of capacity 2 Tons each shall be provided for each control
room.
Each unit shall conform to the following specifications:
Technical Particular‟s BREB Requirements

Brand Internationally Reputed Brand
Country of origin To be Mentioned by bidder
Cooling Capacity 24000/2
(BTU/HR)/Ton
Power Supply 230V+/-5%, 50 HZ
Power Input (Watt) 2400W (Max.)
Current (Amp) 10.8 A (Max.)
Indoor Air Circulation 1100 (Min.)
(CBM/H)
Temperature Control Thermister
Auto Air Swing 2-way to be provided
Minimum Noise Level Db(A) Indoor Unit:less than 45 db.
Outdoor Unit: less than 55 db.
Remote More than 10 meters remote control
distance.
Remote handset: LCD display with
night glow.
Installation Bidder will complete the first-time
installation.
Refrigerant Environment-Friendly
Type of Compressor High quality and approved brand with
rotarytype compressor
Other o Elegant panel design, with
LED/LCD central Display.
o Galvanized outdoor unit or plastic
outdoor unit for anti-corrosion.
o Flat panel for easy cleaning,
washable plastic filter and horizontal
auto louver.
Warranty One-year replacement of all components
free of cost and next two-year service
free.
Supporting documents Must be supported by printed
Catalogue/Manual.
224
225
SECTION VI
C. MISCELLANEOUS
10.0 LABORATORIES FURNITURE
225
226
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LABORATORY FURNITURE
For Acceptance Test Laboratory, the furniture to be supplied and set up in each individual
testing laboratory (total 13 Labs), executive rooms, conference room, dining room, kitchen,
waiting area, guard room etc. the bidder shall estimate and provide complete details,
specifications with unit and total price.
Note: In support of offered specifications, printed catalog must be submitted by the bidder.
226
227
SECTION VI
C. MISCELLANEOUS
11.0 FIRE DETECTION & FIREFIGHTING PROTECTION

FACILITIES
227
228
FIRE DETECTION & PROTECTION FACILITIES
11.1 Design Requirements
All fire protection installations shall comply with the requirements of the codes of practice of
the National Fire Protection Association, Boston, Massachusetts, U.S.A. as appropriate for
the respective systems, subject to the approval of the Project Manager. The Codes and
practice of the Japanese Fire Protection may also be considered.
Vendor shall refer to the technical specifications of the firefighting system given in this
document.
11.2 Fire Detection and Alarm system
Fire detection shall be by means of smoke detectors/heat detectors with a backup system
utilizing rate-of-rise temperature detectors along with alarm system. The system and its
components must conform to the applicable appropriate standards. The use of these detectors
shall be subject to specific approval by the Project Manager as regards their type and
location.
(a) Fire Alarm Panel: 16 Zone Capacity:
Supply and Installation of 16 Zone Conventional Fire alarm control panel with power
supply unit, batteries and other accessories. The panel shall be complete with zone
indicating LED, Fault Indication and optional telephone Jack etc. The pane shall be
input 220V AC and output 24V DC. Panel shall be confirmed UL Listed or EN54.
Country of Origin: Japan / Italy / UK / USA or equivalent approved by the Project

Manager.
(b) Fire Alarm Bell:
Supply and installation of Conventional type Fire Alarm Bell of 150mm dia, red
color, shall be UL / ULC / CSFM / FM / MEA / BFP / EN54 approved. Power supply
shall be 24VDC. Sound level shall be not less than 92 dBA @ 3meter.Color of the
Bell shall be red.

Manager.
(c) Optical / Photoelectric Smoke Detector:
Supply and installation of Smoke Detector complete with base. Shall be UL / ULC /
CSFM / FM / MEA / BFP / EN54 approved. Integrated alarm LED. Remote LED
connection. Power supply shall be 24VDC.

Manager.
228
229
(d) Heat Detector:
Supply and installation of Heat Detector complete with base. Shall be UL / ULC /
CSFM / FM / MEA / BFP / EN54 approved. Integrated alarm LED. Remote LED
connection. Power supply shall be 24VDC.

Manager.
11.3 Fire Extinguisher
(a) Dry Chemical Powder Type:
Supply & fixing the multipurpose ABCE dry chemical powder stored pressure type
with manometer system. Fire Extinguisher suitable for repeated use complete with
wall bracket, discharge valve, hose pipe, easy refilling system etc. as per sample
approved by the Project Manager.
Country of Origin: China / Malaysia or equivalent approved by the Project Manager.
Quantity: Two (2) portable 6 kg dry powder fire extinguishers shall be located
adjacent to each power transformers.
(b) CarbonDi-Oxide Type:
Supply & fixing the Carbon-di-Oxide type Fire Extinguisher suitable for repeated use
complete with wall bracket, manometer etc. as per sample approved by the Project
Manager.
Country of Origin: China / Malaysia or equivalent approved by the Project Manager.
Quantity: Two (2) portable 5 kg stored pressure carbon dioxide types shall be located
inside the control room and one (1) portable 5 kg stored pressure carbon dioxide types
shall be located inside the Customer Services room.
11.4 Sand Buckets
The Bucket should be wall mounted made from at least 24 SWG sheet with bracket fixing on
wall conforming to NFPA Codes and Standard.
11.5 Water Sprinklers
Water sprinklers shall be provided on each floor. Design drawings shall be approved by the
Project Manager for review, comments and approval. PM comments will be binding on the
contractor.
229
230
SECTION VI
12.0 FORMS AND PROCEDURES
230
231
Forms and Procedures

Form of Completion Certificate .........................................................................................232
Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate ....................................................................233
Change Order Procedure and Forms ................................................................................234
Change Order Procedure ....................................................................................................235
Annex 1.Request for Change Proposal ............................................................................236
Annex 2.Estimate for Change Proposal ...........................................................................238
Annex 3.Acceptance of Estimate .....................................................................................240
Annex 4.Change Proposal ................................................................................................241
Annex 5.Change Order ....................................................................................................244
Annex 6.Pending Agreement Change Order ...................................................................245
Annex 7.Application for Change Proposal ......................................................................247
231
232
Form of Completion Certificate

Date:
Loan/Credit No:
IFB No:
______________________________
To: _________________________________
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,
Pursuant to GC Clause 24 (Completion of the Facilities) of the General Conditions of the

Contract entered into between yourselves and the Employer dated _____________, relating to
the ____________________,we hereby notify you that the following part(s) of the Facilities was
(were) complete on the date specified below, and that, in accordance with the terms of the
Contract, the Employer hereby takes over the said part(s) of the Facilities, together with the
responsibility for care and custody and the risk of loss thereof on the date mentioned below.
1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof:______________________________
2. Date of Completion:__________________
However, you are required to complete the outstanding items listed in the attachment hereto
as soon as practicable.
This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities
in accordance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.
Very truly yours,
Title
(Project Manager)
232
233
Form of Operational Acceptance Certificate

Date:
Loan/Credit No:
IFB No:
_________________________________________
To:________________________________________
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,
Pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 25.3 (Operational Acceptance) of the General Conditions of the

Contract entered into between yourselves and the Employer dated _______________, relating to
the ___________________________________, we hereby notify you that the Functional Guarantees
of the following part(s) of the Facilities were satisfactorily attained on the date specified
below.
1. Description of the Facilities or part thereof:_______________________________
2. Date of Operational Acceptance:_______________________
This letter does not relieve you of your obligation to complete the execution of the Facilities
in accordance with the Contract nor of your obligations during the Defect Liability Period.
Very truly yours,
Title
(Project Manager)
233
234
Change Order Procedure and Forms

Date:
Loan/Credit No:
IFB No:
CONTENTS
1. General
2. Change Order Log
3. References for Changes
ANNEXES
Annex 1 Request for Change Proposal

Annex 2 Estimate for Change Proposal
Annex 3 Acceptance of Estimate
Annex 4 Change Proposal
Annex 5 Change Order
Annex 6 Pending Agreement Change Order
Annex 7 Application for Change Proposal
234
235
Change Order Procedure

1. General
This section provides samples of procedures and forms for implementing changes in the
Facilities during the performance of the Contract in accordance with GC Clause 39
(Change in the Facilities) of the General Conditions.
2. Change Order Log
The Contractor shall keep an up-to-date Change Order Log to show the current status of
Requests for Change and Changes authorized or pending, as Annex 8.Entries of the
Changes in the Change Order Log shall be made to ensure that the log is up-to-date.
The Contractor shall attach a copy of the current Change Order Log in the monthly
progress report to be submitted to the Project Manager.
3. References for Changes
(1) Request for Change as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CR-
X-nnn.
(2) Estimate for Change Proposal as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially

numbered CN-X-nnn.
(3) Acceptance of Estimate as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered

CA-X-nnn.
(4) Change Proposal as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CP-X-

nnn.
(5) Change Order as referred to in GC Clause 39 shall be serially numbered CO-X-

nnn.
Note: (a) Requests for Change issued from the Employer‟s Head Office and the Site
representatives of the Employer shall have the following respective
references:
Head Office CR-H-nnn

Site CR-S-nnn
(b) The above number “nnn” is the same for Request for Change, Estimate for
Change Proposal, Acceptance of Estimate, Change Proposal and Change
Order.
235
236
Annex 1.Request for Change Proposal
(Employer‟s Letterhead)
To:____________________________________ Date:
Attention:______________________________________
Contract Name:_________________________________
Contract Number:_______________________________
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen:
With reference to the captioned Contract, you are requested to prepare and submit a Change
Proposal for the Change noted below in accordance with the following instructions within
_______________ days of the date of this letter____________________.
1. Title of Change:________________________
2. Change Request No. __________________
3. Originator of Change: Employer:_______________________________

Contractor (by Application for Change Proposal No. _______1:
4. Brief Description of Change:_________________________________________________
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change:_____________
6. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the request of Change:
Drawing No./Document No. Description
7. Detailed conditions or special requirements on the requested Change:________________
8. General Terms and Conditions:
(a) Please submit your estimate to us showing what effect the requested Change will
have on the Contract Price.
(b) Your estimate shall include your claim for the additional time, if any, for
completion of the requested Change.
(c) If you have any opinion negative to the adoption of the requested Change in
connection with the conformability to the other provisions of the Contract or the
236
237
safety of the Plant or Facilities, please inform us of your opinion in your proposal
of revised provisions.
(d) Any increase or decrease in the work of the Contractor relating to the services of
its personnel shall be calculated.
(e) You shall not proceed with the execution of the work for the requested Change
until we have accepted and confirmed the amount and nature in writing.
(Employer‟s Name)
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)
(Title of signatory)
237
238
Annex 2.Estimate for Change Proposal
(Contractor‟s Letterhead)
To: ______________________________ Date:
Attention:_______________________________
Contract Name:_______________________________
Contract Number:_____________________________
With reference to your Request for Change Proposal, we are pleased to notify you of the
approximate cost of preparing the below-referenced Change Proposal in accordance with GC
Sub-Clause 39.2.1 of the General Conditions. We acknowledge that your agreement to the
cost of preparing the Change Proposal, in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 39.2.2, is required
before estimating the cost for change work.
1. Title of Change: ________________________
2. Change Request No./Rev.: ____________________________
3. Brief Description of Change: __________________________
4. Scheduled Impact of Change: ___________________________
5. Cost for Preparation of Change Proposal: _______________2
(a) Engineering (Amount)
(i) Engineer hrs x rate/hr =

(ii) Draftsperson hrs x rate/hr =
Sub-total hrs
Total Engineering Cost
(b) Other Cost
Total Cost (a) + (b)
(Contractor‟s Name)
(Signature)
2
Costs shall be in the currencies of the Contract.
238
239
(Name of signatory)
239
240
Annex 3.Acceptance of Estimate
To: ______________________________ Date:
Attention: ________________________________
Contract Name: _____________________________

Contract Number: ___________________________
We hereby accept your Estimate for Change Proposal and agree that you should proceed with
the preparation of the Change Proposal.
1. Title of Change: ___________________________
2. Change Request No./Rev.: _______________________________
3. Estimate for Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________
4. Acceptance of Estimate No./Rev.: _______________________________
5. Brief Description of Change: _______________________________
6. Other Terms and Conditions: In the event that we decide not to order the Change
accepted, you shall be entitled to compensation for the cost of preparation of Change
Proposal described in your Estimate for Change Proposal mentioned in para. 3 above in
accordance with GC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.
(Employer‟s Name)
(Signature)
(Name and Title of signatory)
240
241
Annex 4.Change Proposal
To: _______________________________ Date:
Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________
In response to your Request for Change Proposal No. _______________________________, we

hereby submit our proposal as follows:
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________
3. Originator of Change: Employer: [_______________________________

Contractor: _______________________________
5. Reasons for Change: _______________________________
6. Facilities and/or Item No. of Equipment related to the requested Change:

_______________________________
7. Reference drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:
Drawing/Document No. Description
8. Estimate of increase/decrease to the Contract Price resulting from Change Proposal:3
(Amount)
(a) Direct material
(b) Major construction equipment
(c) Direct field labor (Total hrs)
(d) Subcontracts
3
Costs shall be in the currencies of the Contract.
241
242
(e) Indirect material and labor
(f) Site supervision
(g) Head office technical staff salaries
Process engineer hrs @ rate/hr

Project engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Equipment engineer hrs @ rate/hr
Procurement hrs @ rate/hr
Draftsperson hrs @ rate/hr
Total hrs
(h) Extraordinary costs (computer, travel, etc.)
(i) Fee for general administration, % of Items
(j) Taxes and customs duties
Total lump sum cost of Change Proposal

(Sum of items (a) to (j))
Cost to prepare Estimate for Change Proposal

(Amount payable if Change is not accepted)
9. Additional time for Completion required due to Change Proposal
10. Effect on the Functional Guarantees
11. Effect on the other terms and conditions of the Contract
12. Validity of this Proposal: within[Number] days after receipt of this Proposal by the
Employer
13. Other terms and conditions of this Change Proposal:
(a) You are requested to notify us of your acceptance, comments or rejection of this
detailed Change Proposal within ______________ days from your receipt of this
Proposal.
(b) The amount of any increase and/or decrease shall be taken into account in the
adjustment of the Contract Price.
(c) Contractor‟s cost for preparation of this Change Proposal:2
2
Specify where necessary.
242
243
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)
243
244
Annex 5.Change Order
To: _______________________________ Date:
Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________
We approve the Change Order for the work specified in the Change Proposal (No. _______),
and agree to adjust the Contract Price, Time for Completion and/or other conditions of the
Contract in accordance with GC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Change Request No./Rev.: _______________________________
3. Change Order No./Rev.: _______________________________
4. Originator of Change: Employer: _______________________________

Contractor: _______________________________
5. Authorized Price:
Ref. No.:_______________________________ Date:__________________________

Foreign currency portion __________plus Local currency portion __________
6. Adjustment of Time for Completion
None Increase _________ days Decrease _________ days
7. Other effects, if any
Authorized by: Date:

(Employer)
Accepted by: Date:

(Contractor)
244
245
Annex 6.Pending Agreement Change Order
To: _______________________________ Date:
Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________
We instruct you to carry out the work in the Change Order detailed below in accordance with
GC Clause 39 of the General Conditions.
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Employer‟s Request for Change Proposal

No./Rev.:_______________________________dated:__________
3. Contractor‟s Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________

dated:__________
5. Facilities and/or Item No. of equipment related to the requested Change:

_______________________________
6. Reference Drawings and/or technical documents for the requested Change:
Drawing/Document No. Description
7. Adjustment of Time for Completion:
8. Other change in the Contract terms:
9. Other terms and conditions:
(Employer‟s Name)
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)
245
246
246
247
Annex 7.Application for Change Proposal
To: _______________________________ Date:
Attention: _______________________________
Contract Name: _______________________________

Contract Number: _______________________________
We hereby propose that the below-mentioned work be treated as a Change in the Facilities.
1. Title of Change: _______________________________
2. Application for Change Proposal No./Rev.: _______________________________

dated: _______________________________
4. Reasons for Change:
5. Order of Magnitude Estimation (in the currencies of the Contract):
6. Scheduled Impact of Change:
7. Effect on Functional Guarantees, if any:
8. Appendix:
(Signature)
(Name of signatory)
247
248
SECTION VI
13.0 FLOOR PLANS
248
249
Site Plan
249
Layout Plans
PROJECT : CLIENT : DESIGN ENGINEER : CONSULTANT:
PROJECT MANAGER :
MD.SAZZAD HOSSAIN
BANGLADESH RURAL
ELECTRIFICATION BOARD (BREB) CAD BY : NADIMHOSSAIN
DRWG. TITTLE :
DATE : JAN, / 2018 SHEET NO : A-00 SITE PLAN Gulshan-2, Dhaka-1212, Bangladesh
250
Ground Floor Plan
250
PROJECT MANAGER :
MD.SAZZAD HOSSAIN
BANGLADESH RURAL
ELECTRIFICATION BOARD (BREB) CAD BY : NADIM HOSSAIN
DRWG. TITTLE :
DATE : JAN, / 2018 SHEET NO : A-01 GROUND FLOOR PLAN Gulshan-2, Dhaka-1212, Bangladesh
251
First Floor Plan
251
PROJECT MANAGER :
MD.SAZZAD HOSSAIN
BANGLADESH RURAL
DRWG. TITTLE :
DATE : JAN, / 2018 SHEET NO : A-02 1ST FLOOR PLAN Gulshan-2, Dhaka-1212, Bangladesh
252
252
PROJECT MANAGER :
MD.SAZZAD HOSSAIN
BANGLADESH RURAL
DRWG. TITTLE :
DATE : JAN, / 2018 SHEET NO : A-03 2ND FLOOR PLAN Gulshan-2, Dhaka-1212, Bangladesh
253
SECTION VI
14.0 ANNEXURE 1
CONTACT DETAILS
253
254
Annexure-1
Contacts, names, designation, address, e mails:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
254

2B. Bid Document Volume II (Part B)

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2B. Bid Document Volume II (Part B)

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Section VI.

BIDDING DOCUMENT FOR

DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING &

BID PACKAGE NO.: UREDS-G-10

UNDER IDA CREDIT NO. 5381-BD

ISO 9001, ISO 14001 &

BANGLADESH RURAL ELECTRIFICATION BOARD

Bidding Document for

DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING &

ICB No.: UREDS-G-10

ISSUED ON: ________________

EMPLOYER: BANGLADESH RURAL ELECTRIFICATION

PROJECT: UREDS; DCSD (UP-GRADATION OF RURAL

SECTION VI: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS .............................................................3

3.0 Building Equipment and Different Systems Technical Speciffactions....................4

4.0 Civil: General Technical Requirements for Building Works ..............................117

5.0 Civil: Building and Ancillary Facilities..................................................................138

8.0 Miscelleaneous: Desktop Computer, Printer, Photocopy Machine.....................219

9.0 Miscelleaneous: Air Conditioning ..........................................................................223

10.0 Miscelleaneous: Laboratory Furniture ................................................................225

11.0 Fire Detection & Firefighting Protection .............................................................227

12.0 Forms & Procedures ..............................................................................................230

13.0 Floor Plans ..............................................................................................................248

14.0 Contacts ..................................................................................................................253

3.0 Building Equipment and Different Systems Technical

Description Specification # Page No.

Overhead Bridge Crane 100 ton Specification # 34 5

Lifts/Elevators (passenger and cargo) Specification# 35 31

Close Circuit TV (CCTV) System for Specification# 36 51

Public Address (PA) System Specification# 37 61

PABX System Specification# 38 71

Fire-Fighting System Specification# 39 79

Generator Set Specification# 40 103

BANGLADESH RURAL ELECTRIFICATION BOARD (BREB)

Overhead Bridge Crane - 100 Ton

3. Experience and Quality Control

Capacity 100 ton lifting capacity

Hoist limit 100 ton (keep factor of safety in view)

Motor Ratings Vendor to specify for the offered system for:

Crane Type Double Girder, Top running

Control System Conventional master control for all motions

Crane operations Through wire master control

Operator Cabin None

Structural Fabrication Crane Structural Constructional Details

Bridge Leg Box type construction

Raw material Only steel plates, tested and certified quality

Welded Joints To be followed for Bridge/leg Fabrication

Number of Joints To be followed for Bridge/leg Fabrication

Splice Joint No splice joint is allowed in girder fabrication.

Heat Treatment The Trolleys (where applicable) shall be Stress Relieved by

Type of Brakes a) Hoist: DC Brake

Hoist Hooks Vendor to specify for the offered crane

Wire Rope Vendor to specify for the offered crane

DC Brake Unit Vendor to specify for the offered crane

Radio Control Vendor to specify for the offered crane

Thrust Brake Unit Vendor to specify for the offered crane

Limit Switch (Gravity Siemens

Overload Relay for Siemens

HRC Fuses (make) Siemens

Rotary Limit Switch (make) Siemens

Switch Fuse Unit (make) Siemens

MCCB (make) Siemens, Schneider Electric

MCB (make) Siemens, Schneider Electric

Pneumatic Time Delay Vendor to specify for the offered crane